Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout111 E 3rd St Technical - BuildingTECHNICAL Permit o 62 Address 317.0 Project description .Leve■ 1 asekyley,+ w od,e.1. The Nie, D-e 4+ off oes c wok reA o cc-e, VI ore. Date the permit was finaled 'Co-- (I -10 Number of technical pages ans OG-j- ZO0c V�c, ?\co()s f i i CIaHam County 3rd Street Building Level 1 N Renovation 1 Clallam County Project No. 620708CH1 1 SPECIFICATIONS October 2009 FILE Architects Project No 09102 Seaman Arc ej Ltd NQ 8.58038 $6 CITY OF PORT ANGELES Construction Plans The Issuance of this permit based upon these plans, specifi- cations and other data shall not prevent the building official from thereafter requiring the correction of errors in said plan specifications and other data, or from preventing building operations being carried on thereunder when in violation of all codes and ordinances of this jurisdict'o Approval Date t7�rz Sw� oppelovit PLA NS'PPRU)CFr) BY CJ, q c POI I A ,F,ti FIRE DES. 0_ 1DAT cr\ w rd Clallam C unty 1 treet Building Level Renovation Clallam County Project No. 620708CH I I li SPECIFICATIONS i October 2009 Architects Project No 09102 U b_Arch Beaman Architecture, Ltd. P.O Eta RCM 5/ 4528 REGISTERED ARCHITECT DIVISION ZERO Notice of Cat for Bids Section 00100 SEALED BIDS will be received by the Board of Clallam County Commissioners at 223 East 4th Street, Room 150 Port Angeles, Washington until, 10:00 AM (PST) December 16, 2009, at which time they will be publicly opened and read aloud for Clallam County 3 Street Building Level 'I Renovation Complete drawings and specifications may be obtained from Pen Print, Inc. 230 E. 1 Street, Port Angeles, WA 98362, phone 360.457 3404 All bidding and related questions should be directed to Beaman Architecture, Ltd in writing at mbebeamanarch.com Attention Michael Beaman. The sealed bids must be clearly marked on the outside of the envelope, "Bid Proposal Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 1 Renovation" Bid documents delivered to other offices and received late by the Commissioner's Office will not be considered nor will bids received by facsimile or e-mail. Clallam County will determine the lowest responsible bidder in accordance with the terms of Clallam County Code Section 312, and further reserves the right to reject any or all bids received, or to accept the bid which in its estimation best serves the interests of Clallam County or to waive informalities in the bidding. 'Clallam County hereby notifies all that it will affirmatively ensure that in any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, disadvantaged business enterprises as defined in Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 at 49 CFR Part 23 will be afforded full opportunity to submit proposals in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color national origin, or sex in consideration for an award. There will be a mandatory on -site walk- through conducted Monday, December 7, 2009 at 11 p.m. Bidders shall meet at subject property at 311 E. 3 Street for a facility walk through. Questions and clarifications will be taken at that time. This will be the only opportunity to access the facility so bring whatever tools are needed to confirm information on drawings and specifications. Park on the street and not in the parking lot, as the upper level of the building, is occupied with tenants. Date: Alm kyi be` I 20O ATTEST Trish Holden, Clerk of the Board, CMC END OF SECTION 00100 Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities CLALLAM COUNTY PARKS, FAIR FACILITIES DIVISION NOTICE OF CALL FOR BIDS Construction Timeframe. 60 Calendar Days to Final Completion Clallam County 3 Street Building Level 1 Renovation Division 00- Notice of Call for Bids BO RD OF CLALLkliaret731qTrrOMMISSIONERS Howard V Doherty Jr Chair Please publish :(PDN) Nov 22 Nov 29 2009 November 17 2009 �t� t1 ff1 DIVISION ZERO Instructions to Bidders Section 00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS 1 1 Bidding Documents include the Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents. Bidding Requirements include Advertisement and Notice of Call for Bids, Instructions to Bidders, Bid Forms, Sample Contract Forms, and Supplementary Instructions Contract documents consist of Agreement or Contract Form between Owner and Contractor Conditions of the Contract including General, Supplementary Drawings, Plans, Specifications and all Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract. 1.2 Addenda are written or graphic instructions issued by the Owner or Owner's representative Architect, which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections. 1 3 A Bid is a properly completed and signed proposal to do the work for sums stipulated and submitted in accordance with the Bidding Documents. 1 4 The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which Bidder offers to perform work described as the base to which work may be added or deleted for sums stated in Alternate Bids. 1 5 An Alternate Bid is an amount stated in the Bid to be added or deducted from the Base Bid if Alternate work is accepted. 1 6 A Unit Price is an amount stated in Bid as a price per unit for materials, equipment, or service as described in Bidding Documents. 1 7 A Bidder is person or entity who submits a Bid. 1 8 A Sub bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials, equipment or labor for a portion of work. ARTICLE 2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATION 2.1 By making a Bid the Bidder represents that the Bidder has visited the site and become familiar with local conditions under which the work is to be performed, has read and understands all Bidding and Contract Documents, and correlated personal observations with the requirements of the proposed contract documents. Site visits shall be as stated on Notice of Call for Bids. 2.2 The Bid is based upon materials, equipment, labor and systems required by the Bidding Documents without exception. ARTICLE 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS 3 1 1 Bidders may obtain complete sets of Bidding Documents from the location designated in the Advertisement or Notice of Call for Bids, at no charge. (Each set consists of (1) Project Manual, which includes Drawings and Specifications, with a limit of two (2) sets per bidder) All bidders shall return documents within seven (7) days of bid opening A bidder receiving the Contract Award may retain Documents. Clallam County 3' Street Building Level 1 Renovation Division 00- Instructions to Bidders Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities October 20 2009 DIVISION ZERO Instructions to Bidders Section 00200 3.1.2 Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding documents in preparing Bids, neither Owner nor Owner's representative Architect assumes responsibility or errors or misrepresentations resulting from use of incomplete Bidding Documents. 3.1 3 In making copies of the Bidding Documents available, the Owner and /or Owner's representative Architect, do so for the purpose of obtaining Bids and do not confer a license or grant permission for any other use of the Bidding Documents. 3.1 4 Copies of bidding documents and specs are available for review in Parks Office, Room 180 in the Old Courthouse. 3.2 Interpretation or correction of Bidding Documents 3.2.1 The Bidder shall carefully examine the Bidding Documents, examine the site and local conditions, and compare them with other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to work being Bid, and shall at once report to the Owner and /or Owner's representative Architect errors, inconsistencies, or ambiguities discovered. 3 2.2 The Bidder and sub bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall make a written request to Owner and /or Owner's representative Architect at lease seven days prior to date of receipt of Bids. 3 2.3 Changes in the Bidding Documents will be made by Addendum and changes made in any other manner will not be binding and Bidders shall not rely upon them. 3.3 Substitutions 3 3.1 The materials, equipment, products described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any substitution. 3 3.2 No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless written request for approval has been received by Owner or Owner's representative Architect at least ten days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Such requests shall include the name of the materials or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitution including drawings, performance and test data, and other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement setting forth changes in other materials, equipment or other portions of the Work including changes in the work of other contractors that incorporation of the proposed substitution would require, shall be included. The burden or proof of the merit of the proposed substitution is upon the proposer The Owner's decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed substitution shall be final. 3 3.3 If the Owner approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids, such approval will be set forth in an Addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner 3 3.4 No substitutions will be considered after the Contract award unless specifically provided in the Contract Documents. 3 3.5 Should any proposed product substitution require any redesign work by the Owner and /or Architect or his consultations to accommodate the substitute product, costs for such redesign work shall be included in the Bid amount and shall be paid to the Architect or Owner at his usual rates for the time expended in the required redesign work. Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 1 Renovation Division 00- Instructions to Bidders Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities October 20 2009 DIVISION ZERO Instructions to Bidders Section 00200 ARTICLE 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES 4.2 Bid security 4 1 1 Bids shall be submitted on forms identified to ones included in the Bidding Documents; shall have all blanks filled out in ink (typed or manually); with sums expressed in words and figures where indicated with words governing; and all alternates and unit prices bid. If alternates do not change Base Bid enter 'no change 4 1.2 Interlineations, alterations and erasures must be initialed by signer of the Bid. 4 1 3 Bid shall include legal name of Bidder and a statement that the Bidder is a sole proprietor partnership corporation or other legal entity Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a Contract. A Bid by a corporation shall give the state of incorporation or corporate seal affixed A Bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent's authority to bind the Bidder 4.2.1 If so stated in the Advertisement or Notice of Call for Bids, or in Bidding Documents, each Bid shall be accompanied by a bid security in a.) cash, b) cashier's check/money order c.) certified check, or d.) Surety Bond in the amount of 5% of the total Bid amount. Bid security shall be in form required, pledging that the Bidder will enter a Contract with the Owner on the terms stated in Bid, and will furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder Bid security of the lowest three Bidders may be retained by Owner for a period not to exceed 30 days following opening of Bids. All other Bidders securities shall be returned within ten days of date of receipt of bids. Should Bidder fail to enter into a Contract or furnish bonds where required, the amount of Bid Security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty 4.2.2 Surety Bond shall be written on required forms and the attorney -in -fact who executes the bond shall affix to the Bond a certified and current copy of the power -of- attorney 4.3 Submission of bids 4 3 1 Bids, Bid Security and other documents required to be submitted with the Bid shall be enclosed in a sealed, opaque envelope marked with the notation 'SEALED BID' with project name clearly marked on the outside of the envelope. The envelope shall be addressed to the party receiving Bids as identified in the Advertisement or Notice Call for Bids and include the Bidder's name and address. If Bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with notation 'SEALED BID ENCLOSED' and the project name on the face thereof 4 3.2 Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of Bids. Bids received after time and date will be returned unopened The Bidders shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at location designated for receipt of Bids. 4 3 3 Oral, telephone, telegraphic, or fax Bids are invalid and will not receive consideration. 4.4 Modification or withdrawal of Bid 4 4 1 A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during the stipulated time period of thirty days following the time and date designated for the receipt of Bids, and each Bidder so agrees in submitting a Bid. Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 1 Renovation Division 00- Instructions to Bidders Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities October 20 2009 DIVISION ZERO Instructions to Bidders Section 00200 4 4.2 Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids, a Bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn by notice to the party receiving Bids at the place designated for receipt of Bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the signature of the Bidder or by telegram, if by telegram, written confirmation over the signature of the Bidder shall be mailed and postmarked on or before the date and time set for receipt of Bids. A change shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original Bid. 4 4 3 Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the date and time designated for the receipt of,Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these instructions to Bidders. 4 4 4 Bid Security if required, shall be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as modified or resubmitted. ARTICLE 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 5 1 Bids received on time and properly identified will be opened and read aloud at the Board of Commissioners meeting held immediately after the time and date for receipt of Bids as advertised in Notice Call for Bids. 5.2 The Owner shall have the right to reject any or all Bids reject a Bid not accompanied by a required Bid Security or by other data required by the Bidding Documents, or reject a Bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular 5 3 The Owner may determine that a Bidder is not responsible and reject his proposal for any of the reasons found in Clallam County Code 3.12. 5.4 Bid award 5 4 1 It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the lowest responsible Bidder provided the Bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents and does not exceed the funds available. The Owner shall have the right to waive informalities or irregularities in a Bid received and to accept the Bid, which in the Owners judgment, is in the Owner's best interests. 5 4.2 The Owner shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Bidding Documents, and to determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and Alternates accepted. ARTICLE 6 POST BID INFORMATION 6 1 Contractor's Qualification Statement Bidders to whom award of a Contract is under consideration shall submit to the Owner or Owner's representative Architect, upon request, a properly executed Contractor's Qualification Statement in the form requested by the Owner 6.2.1 Submittals The Bidder shall within three days of notification of selection for the award of a Contract, furnish the Owner or Owner's representative Architect in writing if not required to be included on the Bid Proposal Form. 1 Work to be performed by Bidders own forces 2. A complete list of sub bidders or sub contractors to be used to complete this project 3. Name of project superintendent or foreman to be used 4 Names of manufacturers, products, and supplies of principal items or systems proposed for the Work. 6.2.2 Prior to award of the Contract, the Owner or Owner's representative Architect, will notify Bidder if Owner has a reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by Bidder If Owner has objection, the Clallam County 3` Street Building Level 1 Renovation Division 00- Instructions to Bidders Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities October 20 2009 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 I 1 1 DIVISION ZERO Instructions to Bidders Section 00200 Bidder may (1) withdraw the Bid or (2) submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustment in the Base Bid or Alternate Bid to cover the difference in cost, if any occasioned by the substitution. The Owner may accept the adjusted bid price or disqualify the Bidder In the event of withdrawal or disqualification, the Bid Security will not be forfeited. 6.2.3 Persons and entities proposed by the Bidder and to whom the Owner has made no reasonable objection must be used on the work for which they were proposed and shall not be changed except with the written consent of the Owner 6.2.4 A copy of Contractor's UBI Certification shall be submitted with the signed agreement. ARTICLE 7 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND 7 1 Bond requirements 7 1 1 The Bidder shall furnish bonds covering faithful performance and payment of all obligations, and as described in the Bidding Documents and all bonds, shall be paid for by the Bidder and costs shall be included in Bid. 7.2 Time of delivery and form of bonds 7.2.1 The Bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three days following the date of execution of the Contract. If the Work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the Bidder shall, prior to commencement of the Work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished and delivered in accordance with this Subparagraph 7.2.1 7.2.2 Unless otherwise provided, the bonds shall be written on forms provided by Owner Performance Bond and Payment Bond. Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the Contract Sum plus sales tax. 7.2.3 The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the Contract. 7.2.4 The Bidder shall require the attorney -in -fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney ARTICLE 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT 8.1 Form to be used 8 1 1 The Agreement for the Work shall be the completed sample included in the Bidding Documents and shall be signed by the Bidder within ten days of notice by the Owner of award of Contract to the Bidder END OF SECTION 00200 Clallam County 3 Street Building Level 1 Renovation October 20 2009 Division 00- Instructions to Bidders Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities DIVISION ZERO Bid Proposal Form Section 00300 BID PROPOSAL FORM Project: Clallam County 3 Street Building Level 1 Renovation Project Number 620708CH To CLALLAM COUNTY PARKS FAIR FACILITIES DIVISION Submission of this bid proposal certifies that the Undersigned has examined the project site and the conditions of work; and has carefully read and thoroughly understands the Bidding Documents governing the work embraced in this project, and the method by which payment will be made for said work. The Undersigned hereby proposes to undertake and complete the work embraced in this project in accordance with said Bidding Documents and agrees to accept as payment for said work the amounts indicated below under Bid Proposal. The base bid shall include all work except that indicated in the Alternates. The Undersigned acknowledges that payment will be based on the actual work performed, as measured or provided for in accordance with the said contract documents, Base Bid, Alternates and Unit Prices shall not include State of Washington Sales Tax. Appropriate sales tax is to be added to invoice amounts after award of bid BID PROPOSAL BASE BID AMOUNT OF COMBINED WORK ALTERNATES The undersigned agrees to perform the following items of work, as further described in the Contract Documents under SECTION 01230 ALTERNATES for the following additions and /or deductions to the Base Bid: Alternate Number and Description Addition 1 Fire Alarm System The undersigned also guarantees the above Alternate Bid Prices for (60) Sixty days from the date of Contract signing as being fair contract price for which he will execute a change order adding the various alternate parcels of work to the Contract. The undersigned certifies that the above referenced documents as well as the premises and conditions affecting the work to be done are thoroughly understood and that at no time will misunderstanding of the drawings, specifications, or conditions to be overcome be pleaded. CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION OF BIDDING CONTRACT DOCUMENTS By signing this form, the Contractor certifies that based on the Contractor's knowledge and review that the Contractor finds the Bidding Contract Documents sufficiently complete and in sufficient detail to perform the work required. Clallam County 3 Street Building Level 1 Renovation Division 00- Bid Proposal Form Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities dollars October 20 2009 DIVISION ZERO Bid Proposal Form Section 00300 BID GUARANTEE (See Bid Bond Form attached) The Undersigned furnishes herewith a bid guarantee in the amount of 5% of the total Base Bid proposal lump sum amount and attaches same to the proposal This bid guarantee warrants that the undersigned will not withdraw his proposal for a period of thirty (30) days after the scheduled closing time for the receipt of proposals, and that if this proposal is accepted, the undersigned will enter into a formal contract (prepared by the Owner) and that the required performance bond and payment bond will be given. In the event of the withdrawal of this proposal within the period stipulated above, or the failure of the undersigned to enter into a contract and give the required bonds, the undersigned will be liable to the Owner for the full amount of the bid guarantee as liquidated damages on account of the default of the undersigned. A proposal guaranty in an amount of five percent (5 of the total bid, in the form as indicated below is attached hereto: Check: CASH IN THE AMOUNT OF CASHIER'S CHECK/POSTAL MONEY ORDER CERTIFIED CHECK PAYABLE TO CLALLAM COUNTY PROPOSED BOND IN THE AMOUNT OF 5% OF THE BID NON COLLUSION STATEMENT By signing this proposal, the Contractor certifies that he /she has not participated in any collusion, or otherwise taken action in restraint of free competitive bidding in connection with this project for which this proposal is submitted. NON DISCRIMINATION The Contractor hereby agrees to not discriminate against any person on the basis of race creed, political ideology color national origin, sex, marital status, sexual orientation, age or presence of any sensory mental or physical disability INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR STATEMENT The Contractor certifies that services shall be furnished by the Contractor as an independent contractor and nothing herein contained shall be construed to create a relationship of employer /employee or master /servant, but all payments made hereunder and all services performed shall be made and performed pursuant to this Agreement by the Contractor ADDENDA Receipt of Addenda(s) numbered is hereby acknowledged and all costs of the Work therefore have been included in the Bid Proposal BIDDER NAME AND SIGNATURE The name of the Bidder submitting this proposal, the address and phone number to which all communications concerned with this proposal shall be made and the number which has been assigned indicating the Bidder is licensed to do business in the State of Washington are as follows: Clallam County 3 Street Buildmg Level 1 Renovation Division 00- Bid Proposal Form Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities October 20 2009 DIVISION ZERO Bid Proposal Form Section 00300 Firm Name: Address. Telephone 1 Contractor's License No Exp.Date The firm submitting this proposal is a: Sole Proprietorship Corporation Partnership The names and titles of the principal officers of the corporation submitting this proposal or of the partnership, or of all persons interested in this proposal as principals are as follows SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED OFFICIAL(S) (PROPOSAL MUST BE SIGNED) END OF SECTION 00300 Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities FIRM NAME (Seal) Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 1 Renovation October 20 2009 Division 00- Bid Proposal Form DIVISION ZERO Supplemental Bid Forms Section 00400 SUPPLEMENTAL BID FORMS ARTICLE 1 The Bid Bond format listed below shall be used by Bidders when submitting their Bid Bond. KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS that we as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal and a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of as Surety hereinafter called the Surety are held and firmly bound unto as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, in the sum of Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities (here insert full name address or legal title of Contractor) (here insert full name address or legal title of Surety) (here insert full name and address or legal title of Owner) Dollars for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally firmly by these presents. WHEREAS the Principal has submitted a bid for (here insert full name, address and description of project) NOW THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a Contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding of Contract Documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the Prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such Contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the Work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. Signed and sealed this day of 20 (Principal) (Seal) (Witness) (Title) (Surety) (Seal) (Witness) (Title) Clallam County 3r Street Building Level 1 Renovation October 20 2009 Division 00- Supplemental Bid Forms DIVISION ZERO Supplemental Bid Forms Section 00400 ARTICLE 2 STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS When requested by the Owner Contractor shall complete and submit the below information within three days of notification by Owner 1 Name of Bidder 2. Business Address: 3 How many years has said bidder been engaged in the contracting business under the present firm name? 4 Contracts now in hand (Gross Amount) 5 General character of work performed by said company 6 List of more important projects constructed by said company including approximate costs and dates: 7 List of company's major equipment: 8. Bank References: 9 Department of Labor and Industries Firm No. 10 Department of Revenue Registration. Name of Bidder By Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 1 Renovation Division 00- Supplemental Bid Forms Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities Title Date October 20 2009 DIVISION ZERO Supplemental Bid Forms Section 00400 ARTICLE 3 STATEMENT OF PROPOSED SUB CONTRACTORS AND MAJOR MATERIAL SUPPLIERS The Contractor shall submit a complete list of all major material suppliers and a sub contractor's list within three days of notification of Bid award or upon request by the Owner to provide it. Sub Contractor's List NAME ADDRESS DESCRIPTION OF WORK/MATERIAL MATERIAL SUPPLIERS Clallam County 3 Street Building Level 1 Renovation October 20 2009 Division 00- Supplemental Bid Forms Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities DIVISION ZERO Supplemental Bid Forms Section 00400 ARTICLE 4 RETAINAGE INVESTMENT OPTION DECLARATION CONTRACTOR. PROJECT NAME. Clallam County 3' Street Building Level 1 Renovation PROJECT NUMBER. 620708CH Pursuant to RCW 60.28.010 as amended, you may choose how your Retainage under this contract will be held and invested. Please complete and sign this form indicating your preference. If you fail to do so the County will hold your Retainage as described in "Current Expense Option 1 below 1 Current Expense: The County will retain the money in its Current Expense Fund Account until thirty days following final acceptance of the improvement or work as completed. You will not receive interest earned on this money 2. Interest Bearina Account: The County will deposit Retainage checks in an interest bearing account in a bank, mutual savings bank, or savings and loan association, not subject to withdrawal until after the final acceptance of the improvement or work is completed, or until agreed to by both parties. Interest on the account will be paid to you. 3 Escrow /Investments: the County will place the Retainage checks in escrow with a bank or trust company until thirty days following the final acceptance to the improvement or work as completed When the moneys reserved are to be placed in escrow the County will issue a check representing the sum of the moneys reserved payable to the bank or trust company and you jointly This check will be converted into bonds and securities chosen by you and approved by the County and these bonds and securities will be held in escrow Interest on these bonds and securities will be paid to you as interest accrues. 4 The Contractor may at his /her option choose to not submit a performance bond and agrees to a 50% Retainage in lieu of a performance bond. Retainage to be released when Contract is complete and all paperwork submitted. (Pertains to projects under $25 000 ONLY) Retainage is normally released 30 40 days after final acceptance of work by the County or following receipt of Labor and Industries Department of Revenue clearance whichever takes longer Clallam County 3 Street Building Level 1 Renovation Division 00- Supplemental Bid Forms Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities (Contractor's Signature) (Title) October 20, 2009 DIVISION ZERO Supplemental Bid Forms Section 00400 ARTICLE 5 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND FORM The Contractor will use AIA Document A312 Forms, as revised, as the acceptable forms when providing bonds. ARTICLE 6 INDUSTRIAL INSURANCE PREMIUMS AND CONFESSION OF JUDGMENT 1 The contractor shall pay and is responsible for payment of all industrial insurance premiums that become due and payable to the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries (Department) pursuant to Title 51 RCW whether such premiums are attributable to the contractor or its subcontractors. 2. In the event that Clallam County is required to make industrial insurance premiums to the Department due to the failure, neglect or refusal of the contractor to make payment as required herein, the contractor authorizes Clallam County to take judgment against it, and the contractor hereby confesses judgment, in the amount which Clallam County is required to pay the Department pursuant to Title 51 RCW to satisfy contractor's liabilities hereunder The contractor confesses judgment in an amount equal to the entire industrial insurance premium liability due to the Department on behalf of the contractor and its subcontractors hereunder less any premium payments previously made to the Department by the contractor 3 The contractor expressly agrees that the amount confessed herein was expressly negotiated and that the amount due to Clallam County for satisfying contractor's obligations to the Department hereunder is due, justly due or to become due. 4 Until such time as Clallam County is actually reimbursed for industrial insurance premiums paid to the Department due to the failure, neglect or refusal of the contractor to meet its obligations hereunder the contractor shall be debarred from bidding on any projects for which Clallam County solicits bids. State of County of Corporate (CORPORATE SEAL) ss 1 On this day of 20 before me personally appeared to me known to be the (president, vice president, secretary treasurer or other authorized officer or agent, as the case may be) of the corporation that executed the within and foregoing instrument, and acknowledged said instrument to be the free and voluntary act and deed of said corporation, for the uses and purposes therein mentioned, and on oath stated that he was authorized to execute said instrument and that the seal affixed is the corporate seal of said corporation. In witness whereof I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my official seal the day and year first above written. Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level I Renovation Division 00- Supplemental Bid Forms Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities (Contractor's Signature) (Title) October 20 2009 DIVISION ZERO Supplemental Bid Forms Section 00400 State of County of Individual. On this day personally appeared before me to me known to be the individual, or individuals described in and who executed the within and foregoing instrument, and acknowledged that he (she or they) signed the same as his (her or their) free and voluntary act and deed, for the uses and purposes therein mentioned. Given under my hand and official seal this day of END OF SECTION 00400 20 ss 1 Notary Public in and for the State of Washington Residing at (Contractor's Signature) (Title) Notary Public in and for the State of Washington Residing at Clallam County 3` Street Building Level 1 Renovation October 20, 2009 Division 00- Supplemental Bid Forms Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities DIVISION ZERO Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Section 00500 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR Project Name CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION Project Number 620708CH This agreement is entered into between Clallam County a political subdivision of the State of Washington, hereafter called 'County" and hereinafter called 'Contractor' The Owner and Contractor agree as set forth below 1 This Agreement is comprised of the Bidding Documents, Contract Documents, the Agreement, Plans and Specifications as described in the Contract Documents, Addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement and modifications issued after execution of this Agreement. 2. The Contractor shall execute the entire work described in the Bidding and Contract Documents. 3 The date of commencement is the date the Contractor receives a signed copy of this Agreement by the Board of Commissioners, which shall be considered the notice to proceed. 4 The Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire work no later than subject to adjustments provided for in the Contract Documents. 5 The Owner shall pay the Contractor in current funds for Contractor's performance of the Contract the Contract Sum of dollars subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Contract Documents. 6 Progress Payments a. The Owner shall make progress payments to the Contractor on account of the Contract Sum as provided for below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. b The Contractor shall submit Application for Payment on AIA Document G702 forms not more than once per month or Contractor's own form with same information found on G702 Forms. c. The Contractor shall submit Application for Payment prior to the last day of each calendar month to the Owner or Owner's representative Architect. d. The Owner shall make progress payments within 15 calendar days of receipt of Application for Payment and certification that work has progressed satisfactorily e. Each Application for Payment shall be based upon the schedule of values submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. The schedule of values shall allocate the entire Contract Sum among the various portions of the Work and be prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Owner or Owner's Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Owner or Owner's Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for payment. f Applications for Payment shall indicate the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. g. Subject to the provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of each progress payment shall be computed as follows. Take that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed Work as determined by multiplying the percentage completion of each portion of the Work by the share of the total Clallam County 3` Street Building Level 1 Renovation Division 00- Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities October 20 2009 DIVISION ZERO Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Section 00500 Contract sum allocated to that portion of the Work in the schedule of values, less Retainage of five percent. Pending final determination of cost to the Owner of changes in the Work, amounts not in the dispute may be included as provided in the General Conditions even though the Contract Sum has not yet been adjusted by Change Order Add that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the completed construction less Retainage of five percent. Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner and Subtract amounts, if any for which the Owner or Architect has withheld or nullified a Certificate of Payment as provided in the General Conditions. 7 Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be made by the Owner to the Contractor when (1) the Contract has been fully performed by the Contractor except for the Contractor's responsibility to correct non- conforming Work as provided in the General Conditions and to satisfy other requirements, if any which necessarily survive final payment; and (2) a Final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Owner or Owner's representative Architect; such final payment shall be made by the Owner not more than 30 days after the issuance of the Owner or Owner's representative Architect's final Certificate for Payment, punch list is completed and all close- out paperwork and documents have been submitted to the Owner including Department of Revenue clearance. 8. Other documents, if any forming part of the Contract Documents are as follows: A. UBI Certification (copy to be attached to Agreement) IN WITNESS WHEREOF the Parties have executed this Agreement on this day of 20 CONTRACTOR: (Name) (By) (Its) Date: ATTEST Clerk of the Board, Trish Holden, CMC END OF SECTION 00500 ,20 Clallam County 3 Street Building Level 1 Renovation Division 00 Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities OWNER: BOARD OF CLALLAM COUNTY COMMISSIONERS Howard V Doherty Jr Chair Approved as to Form: Prosecuting Attorneys Office October 20 2009 DIVISION ZERO General Conditions of the Contract Section 00600 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 11 Definitions 1 1 1 Contract Documents consist of Agreement between Owner and Contractor General Conditions of the Contract, Supplemental Conditions, Bidding Documents, Bonds, Drawings and Specifications, Addenda, approved Alternates, and modifications issued after execution of the Agreement. 1 1.2 The term Work means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents and includes all labor materials, equipment and services provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. 1 1 3 The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work. 1 1 4 The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment construction systems, standards and workmanship for the Work and performance of related services 1 1 5 The Proiect Manual is the volume assembled for the work, which includes the Bidding Documents including Call for Bids and Instructions to Bidders, and Contract Documents. 1.2 Execution, Correlation and Intent 1 2.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner and Contractor as provided in the Agreement. 1.2.2 Execution of the contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2.3 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor The Contract Documents are complementary and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. In the event of a conflict or discrepancy in or between the Contract Documents, interpretation shall be governed as set forth in the following order the first taking highest precedence. 1 Agreement (Owner- Contractor) 2. Addenda 3 National, State and local codes or ordinances 4 Supplementary Conditions 5 Other Conditions 6. General Conditions 7 Specifications (Division 1 through 16). Specifications shall govern over drawings and general notes insofar as quality of materials, thickness or gauge of materials, finish of materials, composition of materials and quality of workmanship 8. Drawings. Figure dimensions on drawings shall govern over nominal dimensions and over drawings without figured dimensions. Largest scale drawing covering any portion of the work shall govern over small -scale drawings of same portion of work, except as noted herein for Clallam County 3 Street Building Level 1 Renovation Division 00- General Conditions Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities October 20 2009 DIVISION ZERO General Conditions of the Contract Section 00600 figured dimensions. Actual physical dimensions of specified stock items shall govern over dimensions shown on drawings on work to receive such stock items. Custom items or modified stock items shall be fabricated to dimensions shown on drawings or to fit into other dimensioned work. Should conflict occur in or between drawings and specifications, Contractor is deemed to have estimated the more expensive way of doing work unless he has asked for and obtained written decision (4) Four working days before submission of bids as to which method or materials will be required. 1.2.4 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. 1.2.5 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well -known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. 1.2.6 The apparent silence of the specifications or plans as to any detail or the apparent omission from them of a detailed description concerning any point shall be regarded as meaning that only the best general practice is to prevail and that only material and workmanship of first quality are to be used. All interpretations of these specifications shall be made on the basis above stated. 1.3 OWNERSHIP OF DOCUMENTS 1 3 1 The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Owner or Owner's Architect are instruments of the Owner's service through which the Work to be executed by the Contractor is described. The Owner shall be deemed the author of them and will retain all common law statutory and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyright. ARTICLE 2 OWNER 2.1 1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the contract Documents as if singular in number The term 'Owner" means the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative. 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish surveys, utility locations, or other records that the Owner has presently on file or presently knows of to the contractor upon request. The Owner will not provide additional surveys, layouts or locations unless specifically stated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2.1 3 The Owner shall secure and pay for the building permit. All other permits and fees for permits shall be paid for by the Contractor 2.1 4 The Owner shall have additional responsibilities enumerated herein. 2.1 5 If the Contractor fails to correct Work or persistently fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner by written order signed personally or by an agent specifically so empowered by the Owner in writing, may order the Contractor to stop the work, or any portion thereof until the cause for such order has been eliminated. Clallam County 3 Street Building Level 1 Renovation Division 00- General Conditions Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities October 20 2009 DIVISION ZERO General Conditions of the Contract Section 00600 ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR 3 1 1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number The term Contractor" means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative. 3 1.2 The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with each other and with information furnished by the Owner and shall at once report to the Owner errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for damage resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized (or should have recognized) such error inconsistency or omission and knowingly failed to report it to the Owner If the Contractor performs any construction activity knowing it involves a recognized error inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents without such notice to the Owner the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such performance and shall bear an appropriate amount of the attributable costs for correction. 3 1 3 The Contractor shall take field measurements and verify field conditions and shall carefully compare such field measurements and conditions and other information known to the Contractor with the Contract Documents before commencing activities. Errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered shall be reported to the Owner at once. 3 1 4 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. 3 1 5 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons performing portions of the Work under a contract with the Contractor 3 1 6 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery water heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. 3 1 7 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other persons carrying out the Contract. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them. 3 1 8 The Contractor warrants to the Owner that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new that the Work will be free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted, and that the Work will conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear under normal usage. If required by the Owner the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. 3 1 9 The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer use and similar taxes for the work or portions thereof provided by the Contractor which are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. Clallam County 3 Street Building Level 1 Renovation Division 00- General Conditions Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities October 20 2009 DIVISION ZERO General Conditions of the Contract Section 00600 3 1 10 Other than the Building Permit, the Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work. 3.1 11 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on performance of the Work. 3 1 12 If the Contractor observes that portions of the Contract Documents are at variance with codes, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner in writing, and necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate modification. 3.1 13 If the Contractor performs Work knowing or should have known it to be contrary to laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations without such notice to the Owner the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for such Work and shall bear the attributable costs. 3 1 14 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the work, the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor's tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials. 3 1 15 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor 3.1 16 The Contractor shall provide the Owner access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located 3 1 17 To the fullest extent permitted by law the Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless, the Owner Architect, Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorney's fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury sickness, disease or death or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the work itself) including loss of use resulting therefrom, but only to the extent caused in whole or in part by negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor a Subcontractor anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whole acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Paragraph. 3.1 18 With respect to performance of this agreement and as to claims against the county its elected and appointed officers, agents and employees, the Contractor expressly waives its immunity under Title 51 RCW the Industrial Insurance Act, as now and hereafter amended for injuries to its employees and agrees that the obligations to indemnify defend and hold harmless provided in this agreement extend to any claim brought by or on behalf of any employee of the Contractor This waiver is mutually negotiated by the Owner and Contractor ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4 1 The Owner's project manager shall be the administrator of the contract unless the Owner has agreement for architectural services. 4 1 1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number The term Architect" means the Architect or the Architect's authorized representative. Clallam County 3 Street Building Level 1 Renovation October 20 2009 Division 00- General Conditions Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities DIVISION ZERO General Conditions of the Contract Section 00600 4 1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. 4 1 3 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract documents, and will be the Owner's representative (1) during construction (2) until final payment is due and (3) with the Owner's concurrence, from time to time during the correction period. The Architect will advise and consult with the Owner The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified by written instrument in accordance with other provisions of the Contract. 4 1 4 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the completed Work and to determine in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when completed will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on -site inspections to check observations as an architect, the Architect will keep the Owner informed of progress of the Work, and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work. 4 1 5 Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially authorized, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communicate through the Architect. Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner 4 1 6 Based on the Architect's observations and evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts to the Owner who has final approval and authority 4 1 7 The Architect, with Owner's approval, will have authority to reject Work, which does not conform to the Contract documents. Whenever the Architect, with Owner's approval considers it necessary or advisable for implementation of the intent of the Contract Documents, the Architect, with Owner's approval, will have authority to require additional inspection or testing of the work. However neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons performing portions of the Work. 4 1 8 The Architect will review and with Owner's approval, approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. 4 1 9 The Architect, with the Owner's approval will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may authorize minor changes in the work as provided in Paragraph 7 1 4 4 1 10 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion, will received and forward to the Owner for the Owner's review and records written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 1 Renovation October 20 2009 Division 00- General Conditions Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities DIVISION ZERO General Conditions of the Contract Section 00600 ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 51 Definitions 5 1 1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. 5 1.2 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner the names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal portion of the Work. The Owner will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing stating whether or not, after due investigation the Owner has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity Failure of the Owner to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. 5.1 3 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner has made reasonable and timely objection. 5.1 4 If the Owner has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner has no reasonable objection. The Contract Sum shall be increased or decreased by the difference in cost occasioned by such change and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued However no increase in the Contract Sum shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required. 5 1 5 By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which the Contractor by these Documents assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors shall similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub subcontractors. ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER 6.1 1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Clallam County 3 Street Building Level 1 Renovation Division 00- General Conditions Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities October 20 2009 DIVISION ZERO General Conditions of the Contract Section 00600 6 1.2 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces. 6.1 3 If part of the Contractor's Work depends, for proper execution or results, upon construction or operations by the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Owner apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor to so report shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or separate contractors completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 7 1 1 Changes in the work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by Change Order 7 1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner Contractor and Architect. 7 1 3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contractor shall proceed promptly unless otherwise provided in the Change Order 7 1 4 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Owner or Architect and signed by the Owner Contractor and Architect stating their agreement upon all of the following: 1 a change in the Work, 2. the amount of the adjustment in the Contract Sum, if any and 3 the extent of the adjustment in the Contract Time, if any ARTICLE 8 TIME AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 8.1 1 Contract time shall be as stated on the Notice of Call for Bids, from date of commencement established in the Agreement until final completion. 8 1.2 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement, the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. 8 1 3 The Contractor shall not knowingly except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance to be furnished by the Contractor The date of commencement of the Work shall be not changed by the effective date of such insurance. Unless the date of commencement is established by a notice to proceed given by the Owner the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing not less than five days or other agreed period before commencing the work to permit the timely filing of mortgages, mechanic's liens and other security interests. 8.1 4 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or of an employee of either or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by delay authorized by the Owner then the Contract time shall be extended by Change Order 8.1 5 Should the Contractor fail to complete the Work within the Contract Time the Owner will sustain damage. Clallam County 3 Street Building Level 1 Renovation Division 00- General Conditions Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities October 20 2009 DIVISION ZERO General Conditions of the Contract Section 00600 8.1 6 Therefore, the parties agree that the Contractor shall pay the Owner as liquidated damages and not as penalty an amount as follows, which shall be considered to be the amount of the damage sustained by the Owner on account of the condition specified and shall continue to be paid until the condition specified is met. 8 1 7 It is agreed by the parties that time is of essence in this agreement and, if the date of final completion is delayed, the Owner will be damaged. The exact amount of the damage will be difficult to calculate, but will include such items as outside leases, loss of efficient function, and inconvenience to the public and to the Owner It is agreed between the parties that the amount of damages will be $250.00 per calendar day from Final Completion date as designated for each individual project as stated on the Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor The Owner may deduct the sum of such liquidated damages from any moneys due or that may become due the Contractor or if such moneys are insufficient, the Contractor or his Surety or Sureties shall pay the difference. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9 1 1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. 9 1.2 Before the first Application for Payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner or Architect a schedule of values allocated to various portions of the work, prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Owner or Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Owner or Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. 9 1 3 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner or Architect, if one is used, an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the schedule of values. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require such as copies or requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers, and reflecting Retainage if provided for elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 9 1 4 Such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the work which have been properly authorized by Change Orders. 9.1 5 Such applications may not include requests for payment of amounts the Contractor does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier because of a dispute or other reason. 9 1 6 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. 9 1 7 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment, all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information and belief be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor Clallam County 3r Street Building Level 1 Renovation October 20, 2009 Division 00- General Conditions Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities DIVISION ZERO General Conditions of the Contract Section 00600 Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor materials and equipment relating to the Work. 9 1 8 The Owner shall determine the payment amount to be made to the Contractor 9 1 9 At the time each month stipulated in the Owner /Contractor Agreement, the Owner shall pay to the Contractor an amount equal to ninety -five percent (95 of the value of labor and material incorporated in the work, all as approved by the Architect in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents, such amount paid to the Contractor shall be less the total of all previous payments and deductions provided for in the Contract Documents. The five percent (5 withheld shall be Retainage, which shall be paid as provided hereinafter The percentage of contract retained shall be five percent (5 pursuant to RCW Chapter 60.28 as amended. Thirty days after final acceptance of the completed work, the balance due will be paid, provided, a. The work be fully completed b. Certification has been received by the Owner from the State Department of Labor and Industries, as to payment of prevailing wages, in conformance with laws. c. Certification has been received by the Owner from the State Department of Revenue that all taxes have been paid, no tax lien may exist, and d. The Contractor warrants to the Owner all claims by materialmen and workmen if any for unpaid charges against the work have been satisfied and e. To hold the Owner harmless from all liens on the completed work. In the event these provisions are not met, the Owner may pay a percentage of the Retainage, holding back that quantity of money for materialmen and laborer's liens, tax liens, cost and attorney's fees to defray the cost of foreclosing all other liens, costs, and Architect's fee to defray cost of additional Construction Administration services. After the award of a Contract for public improvement or work for which retained percentages are required to be reserved under the provisions of RCW 60.28.010 Owner shall require the Contractor to exercise in writing one of the options listed in RCW 60.20 010 Retained amounts shall be paid into an escrow account, if requested in a financial institution chosen by the Contractor and approved by the Owner the interest earnings from which shall accrue to the benefit of the Contractor 9 1 10 Final payment will not be made by the Owner until all contract conditions and requirements have been fulfilled and all forms and certificates are received in full. 9 1 11 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Owner or Architect will promptly make such inspection, and when Owner and Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.1 1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. 10 1 2 In the event the Contractor encounters on the site material reasonably believed to be asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) which has not been rendered harmless, the Contractor shall immediately stop Work in the area affected and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. The Work in the affected area shall not thereafter be resumed except by written agreement of the Owner and Clallam County 3 Street Building Level 1 Renovation October 20 2009 Division 00- General Conditions Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities DIVISION ZERO General Conditions of the Contract Section 00600 Contractor if in fact, the material is asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) and has not been rendered harmless. The work in the affected area shall be resumed in the absence of asbestos or PCB or when it has been rendered harmless by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor 10 1 3 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to 1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby 2. the work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub subcontractors, and 3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. 10 1 4 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss. 10 1 5 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities. 10 1 6 When use or storage of explosive or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. 10 1 7 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property caused in whole or in part by the Contractor a Subcontractor a Sub subcontractor or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible, except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor the foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations. 10 1 8 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to endanger its safety 10 1 9 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor's discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. 10 1 10 The Contractor agrees to comply with Chapter 49 18 RCW providing that no laborer workman, or mechanic in the employ of the Contractor Subcontractor or other person doing or contracting to do the work or any part of the work contemplated by the Contract, shall be permitted or required to work more than eight (8) hours in any one calendar day provided that, in cases of extraordinary emergency such as danger to life or property the hours of work may be extended, but in such cases shall not be less than one and one -half times the rate allowed for this same amount of time during eight (8) hours service. Any work necessary to be performed after regular working hours, or Sunday or legal holidays shall be performed without additional expense to the Owner Contractor further agrees the said Contract is terminable in case the Contractor shall violate the provisions of such act. Clallam County 3` Street Building Level 1 Renovation Division 00- General Conditions Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities October 20 2009 DIVISION ZERO General Conditions of the Contract Section 00600 ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE BONDS 11 1 1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. 1 claims under workers or workmen s compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts which are applicable to the Work to be performed 2. claims for damages because of bodily injury occupational sickness or disease, or death of the Contractor's employees; 3. claims for damages because of bodily injury sickness or disease, or death of any person other than the Contractor's employees, 4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage which are sustained (1) by a person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to employment of such person by the Contractor or (2) by another person; 5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself because of injury to or destruction of tangible property including loss of use resulting therefrom; 6 claims for damages because of bodily injury death of a person or property damage arising out of ownership maintenance or use of a motor vehicle, and 7 claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor's obligations. 11 1.2 The Contractor shall name the Owner the Architect, their consultants, and their officers, agents and employees, as additional insured on the insurance policies, except the workers or workmen s compensation policy The Contractor shall obtain from the Owner and Architect the list of names to appear on the insurance policies. 11 1 3 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11 1 1 shall be written for not less than the following, or greater if required by law 1 Workers Compensation, a. State. Statutory b. Applicable Federal (e.g. Longshoremen harbor Work, Work at or outside U S Boundaries): Statutory c. Employer's Liability $1 000 000 00 d. Benefits Required by Union labor contracts: as applicable e. Include all states endorsement 2. Comprehensive General Liability (Including Premises Operations; Independent Contractor's Protective, Products and Completed Operations, Broad Form Property Damage) a. Bodily Injury' $1 000 000 00 Single Limit Per Occurrence Full Contract Amount Aggregate, Products and Completed Operations b Property Damage. Course of Construction Insurance Full Contract Amount Each Occurrence Clallam County 3 Street Building Level 1 Renovation October 20 2009 Division 00- General Conditions Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities DIVISION ZERO General Conditions of the Contract Section 00600 Full Contract Amount Aggregate c. Products and Completed Operations Insurance shall be maintained until 30 days after final completion d. Property Damage Liability Insurance shall include coverage for the following hazards: Vandalism, Fire Explosion, Collapse, and Underground e. Contractual Liability 1 Bodily Injury $1 000 000 Each Occurrence 2. Property Damage: Full Contract Amount Each Occurrence Full Contract Amount Aggregate f Personal Injury with Employment Exclusion Deleted: $1 000 000 00 Aggregate 3. Comprehensive Automobile Liability (Owned, Non owned, Hired) a. Bodily Injury $1 000 000 00 Each Person $1 000 000 00 Each Occurrence b. Property Damage $100 000 00 Each Occurrence 4 If possible, all of the above insurance coverage shall be carried with the same insurance company 11 1 4 Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner and the Architect prior to commencement of the work. These Certificates shall contain a provision that coverage s afforded under the policies will not be canceled until at least thirty (30) days prior written notice has been given to the Owner the Architect, the Contractor and the Owner's insurer Certificates shall be furnished in duplicate and stipulate all coverage required, and the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner and the Architect copies of all endorsements that area subsequently issued amending coverage or limits. 11 1 5 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located property insurance in the amount of the initial Contract sum as well as subsequent modifications thereto for the entire Work at the site on a replacement cost basis without voluntary deductibles. Such property insurance shall be maintained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been made. 11 1.6 Property insurance shall be on an all -risk policy form and shall insure against the perils of fire and extended coverage and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief collapse, false work, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect's services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. Coverage for other perils shall not be required unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 11 1 7 The Contractor shall secure and pay for performance and payment bonds issued by a bonding company licensed to transact business in the locality of the project, on a Bond Form executed in pursuance to Chapter 39 08 Revised Code of Washington. The Bond Form must comply with all requirements of the Owner's attorney The surety bond shall be in the following penal sums. Performance Bond 100% of agreement sum, including Washington State Sales Tax Labor and Material 100% of agreement sum, including Washington State Sales Tax Clallam County 3` Street Building Level 1 Renovation Division 00- General Conditions Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities October 20 2009 DIVISION ZERO General Conditions of the Contract Section 00600 Four copies of Bond Certification required 11 1 8 The Contract Bond or an equivalent Maintenance Bond shall continue in for force until final acceptance of the Work by the Owner 11 1 9 The Contractor guarantees the excellence of both workmanship and material, and the payment of all obligations incurred until the Work is finally accepted and for (30) days thereafter and until the provisions of the Contract Documents are fulfilled. 11 1 10 For the projects under $25,000.00 Contractor may agree to a 50% Retainage fund in lieu of providing a performance bond. The Retainage fund to be held by the County until work is complete, all paperwork is turned in and state releases signed and returned to County ARTICLE 12 WARRANTY 12.1 1 The Contractor shall warranty all labor materials and work performed for a period of 1 year from date of final completion. ARTICLE 13 LAW, SUCCESSORS, TESTS 13 1 1 The contract shall be governed by law of the place where project is located. 13 1.2 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other If either party attempts to make such as assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. 13 1 3 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law 13 1 4 No action or failure to act by the Owner Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder except a may be specifically agreed in writing. 13 1 5 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner or with the appropriate public authority and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The contractor shall give the Owner timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so the Owner may observe such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or approvals which do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. 13 1 6 If the Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection or approval, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner and the Contractor shall Clallam County 3 Street Building Level 1 Renovation Division 00- General Conditions Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities October 20 2009 DIVISION ZERO General Conditions of the Contract Section 00600 give timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so the Owner may observe such procedures. 13 1 7 If such procedures for testing inspection or approval reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall bear all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures. 13 1 8 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Owner ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION 14 1 1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor 1 refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; 2. fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors; 3. disregards laws, ordinances, or rules, regulations, or orders of a public authority having jurisdiction, or 4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 15 PREVAILING WAGES 15 1 1 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TO FILE STATEMENT OF INTENT TO PAY PREVAILING WAGES AND AFFIDAVIT OF WAGES PAID The prevailing rate of wage to be paid to all workmen, laborers, or mechanics employed in the performance of any part of this Contract shall be in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 39 12 RCW as amended, and the rules and regulations of the Department of Labor and Industries of the State of Washington. The prevailing wage rates for the locality or localities where this Contract will be performed shall be determined by the Industrial Statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries, and are, by reference, made a part of this contract as though fully set forth herein. Current prevailing wage data is furnished by the Industrial Statistician. 15 1.2 Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages. The Contractor on or before the date of commencement of work, shall complete, file and pay for a statement under oath with the Owner and with the Director of Labor and Industries certifying the rate of hourly wage paid and to be paid each classification of laborers, workmen or mechanics employed upon the work by the Contractor or Subcontractor which shall be not less than the prevailing rate of wage. (State Form LI 700 -29), State of Washington, Department of Labor and Industries, "Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages on Public Contract" form. Such statement and any subsequent statements shall be filed in accordance with the practices and procedures required by the Department of Labor and Industries. Therefore, the Contractor shall familiarize himself with this form and all its requirements. The Owner will not distribute any payments until all required certified copies of such forms are received. 15 1 3 It is the responsibility of the Contractor to require all his Subcontractors to complete and pay for `Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages forms, submit these documents to the Department of Labor and Industries for certification and forward certified copies to the Owner as proof that the prevailing wage requirements of RCW 39 12.040 have been satisfied. Additional forms may be obtained from the Department of Labor and Industries, Industrial Relations Division, General Administration Building, Olympia, Washington 98504 and from all 15 service locations of the Department of Labor and Industries. Clallam County 3`d Street Building Level 1 Renovation Division 00- General Conditions Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities October 20 2009 DIVISION ZERO General Conditions of the Contract Section 00600 15 1 4 Each voucher claim submitted by a Contractor for payment on a project estimate shall state that prevailing wages have been paid in accordance with the pre -filed statement or statements of intent on file with the Department of Labor and Industrial Statistician. 15 1 5 The Contractor and Subcontractors shall further certify that: a. He has not employed or retained any company or person (other than a full -time bona fide employee working solely for the offer or to solicit or receive this Contract and b He has not paid or agreed to pay any company or person (other than a full -time bona fide employee working solely for the offer or) any fee, commission percentage or brokerage fee contingent upon or resulting from the award of this Contract; and c. He has not been asked or otherwise coerced either expressed or implied into contributing funds, for any purpose as a condition to doing business with the Owner and d. He agrees to furnish information relating to items 1,2 and 3 as requested by the contracting officer 15 1 6 It is further agreed that in case any dispute arises as to what are the prevailing wages for the work of a similar nature and such dispute cannot be adjusted by the parties involved, the matter shall be referred for arbitration to the Director of the Department of Labor and Industries of the State, and his decision therein shall be final, binding and conclusive on all parties involved in the dispute. 15 1 7 Upon completion of a Public Works Project, the Contractor for himself and on behalf of all Subcontractors, shall file Affidavit of Wages Paid' forms. Forms properly executed by the Contractor and all Subcontractors shall be submitted with proper payment to Department of Labor and Industries, Industrial Insurance Division, Underwriting Section, General Administration Building, Olympia, WA 98504 Each Affidavit of Wages' must be certified by the Industrial Statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries before it is submitted to the Owner Copies of all required statements must be on file with the Owner before the retained percentage is released. 15 1 8 Upon completion of a Public Works project, the Contractor shall file a `Release for the Protection of Property Owner and General Contractor" form (LI 206 -83 release 1 -67) with the Department of Labor and Industries. The Owner will not disburse final payment or the Retainage to the Contractor until a release has been issued by the Department of Labor and Industries. Contractor shall pay for all costs of obtaining and filing all Labor and Industries forms. ARTICLE 16 OFFSHORE ITEMS 16 1 1 In compliance with RCW 39.25 the Contractor shall furnish the Owner a certified statement setting forth the nature and source to Offshore items in excess of $2,500 which have been utilized under each prime contract in the performance of the work. `Offshore Items" are those items procured from sources beyond the territorial boundaries of the United States including Alaska and Hawaii. This certified statement is mandatory and shall be received before final payment is made on the contract. ARTICLE 17 PREVENTION OF ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION AND PRESERVATION OF PUBLIC NATURAL RESOURCES Clallam County 3 Street Building Level 1 Renovation Division 00- General Conditions Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities October 20 2009 DIVISION ZERO General Conditions of the Contract Section 00600 17 1 1 Pursuant to Chapter 62, Laws of 1973 1st Ex. Session, those provisions of federal, state and local statutes, ordinances, and regulations dealing with the prevention of environmental pollution and the preservation of public natural resources that affect, or are affected by the herein described project are, to the extent they are reasonably obtainable, as follows: RCW 43.21 030 RCW 90 58 140 RCW 90 58 320; and RCW 70 94 152. Conform with the provisions thereof ARTICLE 18 DISCRIMINATION 18 1 1 The Contractor by entering this contract, agrees that Discrimination in all phases of employment is prohibited by Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 Presidential Executive Order 11375 the Washington State Law Against Discrimination, Chapter 49 60 RCW and by Gubernatorial Executive Orders 66 -1 and 70 -01 among other laws and regulations. 18.1.2 During the performance of this Contract, the Contractor agrees as follows: 1 The Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, creed, color national origin, sex, sexual orientation, age marital status, or the presence of any physical, sensory or mental handicap nor shall the Contractor commit any of the other unfair practices defined in RCW 79 60 the Washington State Law Against Discrimination. 2. The Contractor will, in all solicitation or advertisements for employees placed by on without regard to race, creed, color national origin, sex, sexual orientation, age, marital status, or the presence of any physical, sensory or mental disability 3. The Contractor will send to each labor union, employment agency or representative of workers with which the Contractor has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice advising the labor union, employment agency or workers representative of the Contractor's commitments under this contract and RCW 49 60 the Washington State Law Against Discrimination. 4 The Contractor will permit access to its books, records and accounts, and to its premises by the Owner or the Washington State Human Rights Commission for the purpose of investigation to ascertain compliance with these specifications. 5 The Contractor will include the provisions of clauses, 1 through 4 above in every Subcontract or purchase order so that such provisions will be upon each Subcontractor or vendor ARTICLE 19 COUNTY /CONTRACTOR RELATIONSHIP 19 1 1 In the event that either the state or federal government determines that an employer employee relationship exists, rather than an independent contractor relationship, such that Clallam County is deemed responsible for federal withholding, social security contributions and the like, the Contractor agrees to reimburse Clallam County for any payments made or required to be made by Clallam County Should any payments be due to the Contractor pursuant to this agreement, the Contractor agrees that reimbursement may be made by deducting from such future payments a pro rata share of the amount to be reimbursed based upon the following formula: Total amount to be reimbursed Deduction from payment Number of payments remaining. Clallam County 3` Street Building Level 1 Renovation Division 00- General Conditions Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities October 20, 2009 DIVISION ZERO General Conditions of the Contract Section 00600 Notwithstanding a determination by the state or federal government that employer employee relationship exists, the Contractor its officers, employees and agents, shall not be entitled to any benefits which Clallam County provides to its employees, including, but not limited to vacation and medical benefits 19 1.2 The status of the Contractor hereunder is that of an independent contractor and the Contractor shall not be construed to be an employee of Clallam County As an independent contractor the Contractor is not entitled to any benefits available to employees of Clallam County and the Contractor is responsible for withholding any moneys required to be withheld from the Contractor's employees pursuant to local state, or federal law including, but not limited to worker's compensation, social security and taxes. END OF SECTION 00600 Clallam County 3` Street Building Level 1 Renovation Division 00- General Conditions Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities October 20 2009 DIVISION ZERO List of Drawings Section 00860 LIST OF DRAWINGS SHEET NUMBER SHEET CONTENTS A0.00 COVER SHEET A1.01 SITE PLAN A2.01 DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN A2.02 FLOOR PLAN A2.02E ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLAN (DESIGN BUILD) A2.02F FLOOR FINISH PLAN A2.03 SCHEDULES NOTES A2.04 WALL TYPES A2.05 WALL TYPES A4.01 DEMOLITION CEILING PLAN A4.02 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A9.01 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A9.02 CABINETRY DETAILS A9.03 CABINETRY DETAILS A9.04 DOOR WINDOW TYPES DETAILS A9.05 DETAILS A9.06 DETAILS END OF SECTION 00860 Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 1 Renovation October 20, 2009 Division 00- List of Drawings Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities DIVISION ONE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS General Reauirements Section 01001 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Contract Description 1 Work includes, but is not limited to see Section 01100 Summary for Description. B. The Contractor is responsible for verifying all systems, assemblies and details of construction prepared by the Owner as being appropriate to and within the standard practices of the building trades involved. The Contractor and all of his subcontractors and sub subcontractors shall have reviewed all documents thoroughly and shall report all discrepancies, irregularities, and items that differ from standard practices during the bidding phase. The Contractor shall also be responsible to ensure proper coordination between all trades and all the corresponding documentation directing those trades. The Contractor shall also be responsible for confirmation of all manufacturers instructions and special requirements of the use and application of their products. 2. WORK NOT IN CONTRACT A. NIC' (Not in Contract) items are as follows: 1 As noted in Drawings, if any 3. CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. The Contractor shall have access only to the areas where the new work is to be executed. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner for staging, construction and parking during construction, which will be limited to the area of Work. Work times and dates shall be scheduled and approved by the Owner prior to start of work. B Contractor shall not access the upper level of facility for any reason. If access is required it must first be approved by Owner a minimum of three (3) days in advance. 4. CUTTING AND PATCHING A. The Contractor shall execute all cutting and patching of existing conditions with the same skilled workmen, with the same material supplies, and with the same equipment as required for new work of the same type. 1 The cut and patched areas shall be left so that when the work of this Project is completed, all evidence of the cutting and patching is removed. 2. Texture, finish and color of new or patched areas shall match that of the existing /adjacent construction. 5. UNIT PRICING A. Provide unit pricing for the following items: 1 None. Clallam County 3 Street Building Level 1 Renovation October 20 2009 Division 00- General Requirements Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities DIVISION ONE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS General Reauirements Section 01001 6. ALTERNATES A. Reference "Bid Proposal Form" "Specification Section 01230 Alternates" 7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various sections of specification to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements with a minimum of public service disruption. B. Verify utility requirement characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. C Coordinate space requirements and installation of electrical work, which is indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for conduit and wiring as closely as practicable. D In finished areas, conceal pipes and wiring within the construction. 8. EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work. Submission of Bid means acceptance of existing conditions. 9. PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer sealer or conditioner prior to applying new material or substance in contact or bond. 10. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. See Section 01330 Submittal Procedures. B Submittal form to identify Project, Contractor Subcontractor or supplier and pertinent Contract Document references. C Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed, certifying that review verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents, prior to submitting the submittal for review by the Owner or Owner's representative Architect. D Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations, which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. E. Revise and submit submittals as required; identify all changes made since previous submittal. 11 QUALITY ASSURANCE CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. See Section 01400 Quality Requirements. Clallam County 3` Street Building Level 1 Renovation October 20, 2009 Division 00- General Requirements Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities DIVISION ONE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS General Reauirements Section 01001 B Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers products, services, site conditions, and workmanship to produce Work of specified quality or when no level of quality is specified perform Work as would be standard for a custom installation C Comply with manufacturers instructions. D Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. 12. TOLERANCES A. Monitor tolerance control of installed Products over suppliers, manufacturers Products, site conditions, and workmanship to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply fully with manufacturers tolerances. 13. REFERENCES A. Conform to reference standards applicable for each system, product, or assembly as commonly applied to each trade or discipline for this type of work and level of quality specified or implied, by date of issue current as of date of Contract Documents. B. Should specified reference standard conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Owner before proceeding. 14. ELECTRICITY A. See Section 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls and Section 16000 General Electrical Provisions. B. Contractor shall be responsible for Electrical Permit and inspections as required. 15. LIGHTING FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES A. See Section 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls. B Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations. 16. WATER A. See Section 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls. 17 SANITARY FACILITIES A. See Section 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls. B. Building facilities may not be used by Contractor 18. ENCLOSURES Clallam County 3 Street Building Level 1 Renovation October 20 2009 Division 00- General Requirements Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities DIVISION ONE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS General Reauirements Section 01001 A. See Section 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls. B Provide temporary enclosures for protection of adjacent existing conditions, and barriers to protect the adjacent room from construction dust and fumes. Provide adequate fencing to secure site from public users. 19 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. See Section 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls. B Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. 20. SECURITY A. See Section 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls. B Provide security and facilities to protect Work and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry vandalism, or theft. 21 PROGRESS CLEANING AND WASTE REMOVAL A. See Section 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls. B Collect and maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain construction area in a clean and orderly condition. Contractor responsible for all costs involved in waste removal. 22. REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. See Section 01770 Closeout Procedures. B Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities and materials, prior to Final Completion review C Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. B Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 23. PRODUCTS A. See Section 01600 Product Requirements. B Products: means new material, machinery components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the Work, but does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the work. Products may also include existing materials or components specifically identified for reuse C Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically identified or allowed by the Contract Documents. Clallam County 3 1.4 Street Buildmg Level 1 Renovation Division 00- General Requirements Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities October 20 2009 DIVISION ONE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS General Requirements Section 01001 D Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacture for components being replaced and /or added in addition to existing components, e.g. lighting switches, receptacles, etc. 24. TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING, STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Transport, handle, store, and protect Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 25. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. See Section 01770 Closeout Procedures. B Submit written certification the Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with the General Conditions and the Contract Documents and ready for Owner inspection. C Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum /Price previous payments, and amount remaining due. D Complete and submit all required documentation, covered in this Project Manual and the drawings. 26. FINAL CLEANING A. See Section 01770 Closeout Procedures. B Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection. C Thoroughly clean interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view D Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site. 27 ADJUSTING A. See Section 01770 Closeout Procedures. B Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 28. WARRANTIES A. See Section 01770 Closeout Procedures. B Provide duplicate notarized copies. C Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. D Submit prior to final Application for Payment. END OF SECTION 01001 Clallam County 3rd Street Building Level 1 Renovation Division 00- General Requirements Clallam County Parks, Fair Facilities October 20, 2009 SECTION 01100 SUMMARY PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 Work covered by the Contract Documents. 2. Type of the Contract. 3 Use of premises. 4 Owner's occupancy requirements. 5 Work restrictions. 6 Specification formats and conventions. 1 3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project Identification. Clallam County 3` Street Building, Level 1 Renovation. 1 Project Location: 111 East Third St. Port Angeles, Washington 98362. B Owner Clallam County 223 East Forth St. Port Angeles, Washington 98362. 1 Owner's Representative. Joel Winborn, 223 East Fourth St. Suite Washington 98362. C Architect: Michael Beaman, Beaman Architecture, Ltd. P 0 Box 86038 97286 D The Work consists of the following: 1 The Work includes Tenant Improvements. 1 4 TYPE OF CONTRACT A. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1 5 USE OF PREMISES CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 7 Port Angeles, Portland, Oregon A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Level 1 for construction operations, including partial use of Project site, during construction period Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. SUMMARY 01100 1 1 7 WORK RESTRICTIONS CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION B Use of Site. Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1 Owner Occupancy Allow for Owner occupancy of Project site and use by the public. 2. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on -site. C Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weather tight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its occupants during construction period. 1 6 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS A. Partial Owner Occupancy Owner and Owner's Tenants will occupy the premises during entire construction period, with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated. 1 Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. B Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction. Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1 Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy 2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner occupancy 3 Before partial Owner occupancy mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed On occupancy Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of building. 4 On occupancy Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of building. A. On -Site Work Hours: Work shall be generally performed inside the existing building during normal business working hours of TOO a.m. to 5 p m. Monday through Friday except otherwise indicated. 1 Weekend Hours: 7 00 a.m. to 5 00 p m. SUMMARY 01100 2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 2. Early Morning Hours. Verify with authorities having jurisdiction for restrictions on noisy work. 3 Hours for Utility Shutdowns. Coordinate with Owner 4 Hours for Core Drilling or Concrete Saw- Cutting: Verify with authorities having jurisdiction for restrictions on noisy work. B Existing Utility Interruptions. Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1 Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission. 1 8 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16- division format and the CSI /CSC 'Master Format' numbering system. 1 Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help cross referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers are not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents. 2. Division 1 Sections in Division 1 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. B Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1 Abbreviated Language. Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate Words implied but not stated, shall be inferred, as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor Occasionally the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. a. The words 'shall, 'shall be, or 'shall comply with, depending on the context, are implied where a colon is used within a sentence or phrase. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01100 SUMMARY 01100 3 SECTION 01230 ALTERNATES PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SUMMARY CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 13 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate. An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1 The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 14 PROCEDURES A. Coordination. Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1 Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B Notification. Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved in writing of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted rejected or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. C Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. D Schedule* A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. ALTERNATES 01230 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES' A. Alternate No. 1 Base Bid: No fire alarm system. END OF SECTION 01230 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION Alternate Bid: Install a fully functioning fire alarm system as described in specification Section 16720 'Fire Alarm System' Installed system to be expandable to Level 2. ALTERNATES 01230 2 ARCHITECT'S SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS ALL DOCUMENT G (Instructions on reverse side) PROJECT (name, address) TO (Contractor) Description.: Attachments: (Here insert listing of dru-umen that support rfescriptiari.) ISSUED BY Architect AIA ARCHITECT'S SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTION NO- OWNER DATE OF ISSUANCE. ARCHITECT CONTRACT FOR. ARCHITECTS PROJECT N0• Owner Architect Consultant Contractor Field Other CONTRACT DATED. The Work shall be carried out in accordance with the following supplemental instructions issued in accordance with the Contract Documents without change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. Proceeding with the Work in accordance with these instructions indicates your acknowledgement that there will be no change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. CAUTION: You should sign an original AIA document which has this caution printed in red. An original assures that changes will not be obscured as may occur when documents are reproduced. AIA DOCUMENT. G71O ARCHITECTS SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS 1992 EDU1Ov. ALAS G1992 THE AMERICAN LNSPITUTE OF AtctirrtCr I'35 NEW YORK AVENUE, NW 'Vt'ASIiUNOTON, DC. Z0006.5209 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright lava and wW subject the violator to legal prosecution. G710 -1992 TECHNICAL Permit (D2 Address 111 Project description .Level 1 (gasekner,+ rexmod,edl. Me_ N�.;1� D�� office c. w• ►1 .relo care_ ore. the permit was finaled (1- lQ Number of technical pages 367 S 0 e_ci O Zooms I vas P\cx\s PROJECT (Name and address): TO 'CONTRACTOR (Name and address): A Contract Administration G701 Change Order (Instructions on the reverse side) CHANGE ORDER NUMBER: DATE. ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NUMBER CONTRACT DATE. CONTRACT FOR: THE CONTRACT IS CHANGED AS FOLLOWS: (Include where applicable, any Undisputed amount attributable. to previously executed Construction Change Directives): NOT VALID UNTIL SIGNED BY THE ARCHITECT, CONTRACTOR AND OWNER. S S. days ARCHITECT (Firm. halite) CONTRACTOR (Firm name) OWNER ('Firm name) ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS Distribution List: Owner Architect Contractor Field Other The original (Contract Sum) (Guaranteed' Maximum Pricti).was The net change by previously authorized Change.Orders The (Contract Sum) (Guaranteed Maximum Price) prior to this Change Order was The (Contract Sum) (Guaranteed Maximum Price) will be (increased) (decreased) (unchanged) by this Change Order in the amount of: The iietiv (Contract Sum) (Guaranteed Maximum Price) including this Change Order will be The Contract Time will be (increased) (decreased)_ (unchanged) by The date of Substantial Completion as of the date of this Change Order therefore is NOTE. This Change Dater does not include changes in the Contract Stint, ContractTirhe or Guaranteed Maximum Price which have been authorized by Construction Change. Directive Until the cost and time have been agreed'upon by both the Owner and :Contractor° in Which case a Change Order is: executed to supersede the Construction Change Directive. BY (Signature) BY (Signature) BY (Signature) (Typed name) (Typed name) (Typed name) DATE DATE DATE CAU,TIOR' You should sign an original AIA Cont -:act Document on which this text appears in RED. An original assures changes 'ill not be obscured, Alik Document G701 Change Order 9 2001 The American Institute of Architects Washington, DC www.ataorg WARhrtNG: Reproduction, unlicensed .phatocop}ing or substantial quotation a! the.rnateriat.herein without .written permission of the AIA .rialates the copyright laws.at the United States and v, II subject the violator to legal prosecution. TO report copyright violations Of AlA Contract Documents, e-mail The American Institute of Arcitects' legal counsel, copyright Ca' aia. org. CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 01250 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B Related Sections include the following 1 Division 1 Section 'Product Requirements' for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award. 1 3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on Architect's Supplemental Instructions form included at end of Part 3 1 4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner- Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications 1 Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change 2. Within 20 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change including, but not limited to changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION B Contractor Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to the Architect. 1 Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4 Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5 Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6 Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section 'Product Requirements' if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. 7 Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect for Proposal Requests. 1 5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on Architect's form included at end of Section. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01250 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250 2 ON OM IN MN ON UM SOW MS MS OS NM Mit OM MI Mt 11111111 MI NB 1ININ :APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATE :FOR :PAYMENT ,\i'\ D(.)( UMENTI 6 nwuctions on reverse side) PAt ()Nt: Ot; Pm: Es Ti) OWNER, -PROj T FROM ONTRAt TOR. VIA A RCI IITE. T 1.0R. CONTRACTOR'S. APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT Application is made lot: payment as shown. below in :(;onneetion Continuation 5heet, AlA Document 6 is attached I ORIGINAL CONTRACT SUM 2 Net change by Change Orders 3 CONTRACT SUM TO PATE (Line I 2) I TOTAL COMPLETED STORED TO- (Column C on (70i) 5 .RETAINAGE. of Completed Work 3 (Columns 1) F On of Stored Material (Column 1: on O3) ibtal Retainage (Line Sa Sb or in Column 1. of 6 6 'TOTAL. EARNED LESS RETAINAGE (Line i less Lint_ 5 Ib(al) 7 LESS PREVIOUS CERTIFICATES FOR 'PAYMENT .(1,ine from prior Certificate) 5 4 r: S S S CURRENT PAYMENT .DUE. BALANCE TO FINISH, INCLUDING RETAINAGE (line 3 less Lint 0) CII ANC& ORDER Si MM AR\ T ADDITiONS Total. changes .ippo.)%cd in prey km: months by Owner 'iota, appto‘t.u. this l\4tntth 177 i.. TC)TALs NET CHANCE' by c.hange (.)rder S with the -Contract DinucTioNs The Undersigned Contractor cenifies.that to the best-Of the Contractor's knowledge,•infor "nation and belief the Work covered by this A pplkation for Payment has been•completed itr aceordance with the Contract Documents. that all amounts have been paid by. the Contractor for Work for which previous Certificates for Payment were issued and pa), Tnents received from the Owner, and that current payment shown herein is now due (.0NTRAC State of County of Subscribed and sworn to heront toe this day of Notary Publit. My Commission expires: APpLIC.AT1ON 'N(*) PERIOD- TO PROJECT NOS CONTRACT DATE AIA DOCUMENT G702 APPLicivrtoN AND t:orrivit.ivry FOR PAYMENT I99Z .■IA )19 II AMERICAN itstsTro Tr OF ,ARt .1.11TECFS. r 3 NEW Y1.31il■ WEN! It IN 1.),C .),!)4g!6 ,20, WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates US. copyright laws and will subject. the violator to legal prosecution. Date ARCHITECT'S CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT Distribution to Cl.owNER 113 Actium."' 0 CONTRACTOR Li Li In accordance with the Contract Documents, based on on site observations and tht..-data coniprising this application, the Architect certifies to the Owner that tai du.. best of the Architect s knowledge information and belief ht..Work has progressed as indicated, the quality of the Work is in accordanct, with the:Contract I )ocuimmts, and the con( actor is entitled to payment of tfic.AMOI. NT CFRTIFID AMOUNT CERTIFIED S (mod) exptanation.if amount certified tltffers iron, the antonnt applied for Initial all figures on ibis Ipplii.atton and oil the continuation Sheet that are client Red fe conform 2 the amount certified ARCHITECT thy Date This certificate is not negotiable The AMOUNT CERTi 11.. I 1 is payable only to the Con- tractor named herein. Issuance payment and acceptance of payment aft withOtIl preilldiCe to any rights of Ilk Owner Or Contractor under this Contract G702 1992 CAUTION You should use an original AlA document which has this caution printed in red. An original assures that changes will not be obscured as may occur when documents are reproduced. as am ON I Il is r MI s Mr it MI Mr MI NM M .MI CONTINUATION SHEET AlA E)itcun)cnt '(I2 APPLICATION AND CERTIFICa1'lE FOR PMME\U c+:)nlaiiling C,omrActor s gigne.d C,crtitication, is attached. In tabulations below amounts arc stated: to the nearest dollar. Use Column 1. on Contracts when. variable retainage for line. items. may apply. A. ITEM NC). DESCRIPTION OF 'WORK sciiF,[: a .E D VA1.U`f. .A.IA1)()CI..MEN G 7 03 (Instructions on. reverse silk) D I P WORK'(.Ovli'I.1 EL) FROM' PRFVIOV'S APPl:IC,ATION (D E) 'r11IS PERIOD Al 'P1.ICATION NO. AI'Pt,ICATION I.)AFE PERIOI). TO ARCHITECT'S PR(:)It :C,T NO F MAT'ERL11S (,)TAI. 'PRESENTLY COMi,I.ET'ED STORED AND STORED (NOT IN TO DATE D OR 1') (L) +E E) AIA DOCUMENT G703 CON'I'lN( 4TtUN SHliF:I nt t.1)2 i°92 EDITION AIA' 19t)2 ..Ill' AmEK1t \N INSrr.1.TE 01 ARCI TS. 1 NEW YORK AVFNt!t'. NYC WASlilS(,1ON, 1).(. 5292 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. C.) It BALANCE 1.(') FINISH (C. -.C.t) PAGE F RETAINA( F (IF VARIABLE) RATE) G703 -1992 CAUTION: You should use an original AIA document which has this caution printed in red. An original assures that changes will not be obscured as may occur when documents are reproduced. CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B Related Sections include the following: 1 Division 1 Section 'Contract Modification Procedures' for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation' for administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule. 13 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values. A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1 4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination. Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1 Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule. c. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to the Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. B Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1 Identification. Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION b Name of Architect. c. County's project number d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal 2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator e. Name of supplier f Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value. 1 5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 3 Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. Include separate line items under required principal subcontracts for operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project Record Documents, and demonstration and training in the amount of 5 percent of the Contract Sum. 4 Round amounts to nearest whole dollar total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5 Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on -site and items stored off -site. Include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing, if required. 6 Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 7 Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance. Show line -item value of unit -cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. 8. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work -in -place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 9 Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1 Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor The period of construction Work, covered by each Application for Payment, is the period indicated in the Agreement. C Payment Application Times. Progress payments shall be submitted to Architect, prior to the last day of each calendar month The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month. D Payment Application Forms. Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment. E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1 Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. F Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to the Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1 Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. G Waivers of Mechanic's Lien. With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application. 1 Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application before deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3 Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4 Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application that is lawfully entitled to a lien. 5. Waiver Forms. Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following 1 List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3 Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final) 4 Products list. 5 Schedule of unit prices. 6 Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final) 7 List of Contractor's staff assignments. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 8. Copies of building permits. 9 Initial progress report. 10 Report of pre construction conference. 11 Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 12. Performance and payment bonds. 13. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion. After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1 Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. J Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1 Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4 AIA Document G706 'Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims. 5 AIA Document G706A, 'Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens. 6 AIA Document G707 'Consent of Surety to Final Payment. 7 Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 4 REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION PROJECT Clallam County 3 `d Street Building Level 1 Renovation CONTRACTOR. DOCUMENT REFERENCE. DESCRIPTION REQUEST REPLY REQUIRED BY SIGNED REPLY CONTRACTOR NAME CONTRACTOR ADDRESS SIGNED DATE. RFI NO DATE. CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to the following. 1 Coordination Drawings. 2. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 3. Project meetings. 4 Requests for Interpretation (RFIs) B Related Sections include the following 1 Division 1 Section 'Construction Progress Documentation' for preparing and submitting Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Division 1 Section 'Closeout Procedures' for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 13 DEFINITIONS A. RFI. Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents. 14 COORDINATION A. Coordination. Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1 Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components before or after its own installation. 2. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 3. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical. B Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 -1 15 SUBMITTALS CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION C Administrative Procedures. Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to the following: 1 Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3 Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4 Delivery and processing of submittals. 5 Progress meetings. 6 Pre installation conferences. 7 Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 9 Project closeout activities. D Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy water and materials. 1 Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of but not actually incorporated into the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. 1 Content: Project- specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. b. Indicate required installation sequences. c. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to the Architect for resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. 2. Sheet Size: At least 8 -1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 22 by 34 inches. 3. Number of Copies: Submit two opaque copies of each submittal. Architect will return one copy a. Submit five copies where Coordination Drawings are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain one copy remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Drawing 4 Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those Sections. B Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1 Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times. 1 6 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL A. General. In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work. 1 Include special personnel required for coordination of operations with other contractors. 1 7 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated. 1 Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda. Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3 Minutes. Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting B Pre construction Conference. Schedule a pre construction conference before starting construction at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 1 Attendees. Authorized representatives of Owner Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors, suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing and long -lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f Procedures for RFIs. g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. i. Distribution of the Contract Documents. j. Submittal procedures. k. Preparation of Record Documents. I. Use of the premises. m. Work restrictions. n. Owner's occupancy requirements. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION o. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. p Construction waste management and recycling. q. Parking availability r Office, work, and storage areas s. Equipment deliveries and priorities. t. First aid. u. Security v Progress cleaning. w Working hours. 3. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes. C Pre installation Conferences. Conduct a pre installation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1 Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. The Contract Documents. b Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Possible conflicts. i. Compatibility problems. j. Time schedules. k. Weather limitations. I. Manufacturer's written recommendations. m. Warranty requirements. n. Compatibility of materials. o Acceptability of substrates. p. Temporary facilities and controls. q. Space and access limitations. r Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. s. Testing and inspecting requirements. t. Installation procedures. u. Coordination with other work. v Required performance results. w Protection of adjacent work. x. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4 Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION D Progress Meetings. Conduct progress meetings at bi- weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 1 Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner each contractor subcontractor supplier and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule. Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries 5) Off -site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Status of correction of deficient items. 14) Field observations. 15) RFIs. 16) Status of proposal requests. 17) Pending changes. 18) Status of Change Orders. 19) Pending claims and disputes. 20) Documentation of information for payment requests. 3. Minutes: Record the meeting minutes. 4 Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 5 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1 8 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs) A. Procedure Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified 1 RFIs shall originate with Contractor RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will be returned with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following: 1 Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Contractor 4 Name of Architect. 5 RFI number numbered sequentially 6 Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 7 Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 9 Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI 10 Contractor's signature. 11 Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions, thickness, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments. C Hard -Copy RFIs: Hard -Copy RFIs are not allowed. D Software- Generated RFIs: Sample Form at End of this Section. 1 Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number 2. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. 3 All RFIs are to be submitted electronically via email E. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI determine action required, and return it. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI RFIs received after 1 p m. will be considered as received the following working day 1 The following RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 6 PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01310 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information in which case Architect's time for response will start again 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 1 Section 'Contract Modification Procedures. a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response. F On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response. G RFI Log Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number Submit log weekly Software log with not less than the following 1 Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor 3 Name and address of Architect. 4 RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5 RFI description. 6 Date the RFI was submitted 7 Date Architect's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate 9 Identification of related Field Order Work Change Directive and Proposal Request, as appropriate. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 7 ELECTRONIC MEDIA RELEASE This release for electronic media is dated the between the Contractor and Beaman Architecture, Ltd. It is understood that the Contractor has requested to have Beaman Architecture Ltd supply to the Contractor electronic media containing information on the Clallam County 3 Street Building Level 1 Renovation (hereinafter referred to as the Project) for use by the Contractor or others as the Contractor deems appropriate. Therefore, the Contractor and Beaman Architecture Ltd. agree as follows: The electronic files provided to the Contractor by Beaman Architecture, Ltd. for the Project may be used by the Contractor for the processing of submittals for the Project. If the Contractor chooses to use or alter in any way in whole or in part, the electronic files provided for the Project, the Contractor agrees that such use shall be without liability or legal exposure to Beaman Architecture, Ltd. Because information and data provided electronically may be altered, whether inadvertently or otherwise, the electronic files are provided solely as a convenience to the Contractor by Beaman Architecture, Ltd. and shall NOT be considered "Drawings of Record' or as 'Construction Documents. All documents considered Drawings of Record' or 'Construction Documents shall be HARDCOPY and shall be accompanied by a professional's stamp and signature. The HARDCOPY shall be referred to and shall govern in the event of any inconsistency between the HARDCOPY and the information provided electronically All identification (such as logo surveyor's seal, etc.) reflecting the involvement of Beaman Architecture, Ltd. in their preparation shall be removed from the electronic data. The Contractor is advised to check all electronic media for computer viruses before loading the files. The Contractor is fully responsible for intercepting and disabling viruses, if any that may be inadvertently transmitted with the electronic files and hereby agrees, to indemnify and hold Beaman Architecture, Ltd. harmless, from and against all claims, of any type or nature asserted by the Contractor or any party as a result of viruses inadvertently transmitted with the electronic files. Files distributed electronically are subject to data erosion erasure alteration, and /or systems and software become obsolete in time By accepting these electronic files, the Contractor acknowledges these risks and agrees to waive all claims against Beaman Architecture, Ltd should erosion, erasure and or alteration of these electronic files occurs. Signed: Signed: Beaman Architecture, Ltd. Title. Company Date: Title. Job No Date ELECTRONIC MEDIA RELEASE 01315 (FORM) CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 01315 ELECTRONIC MEDIA PROVISIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and other Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for electronic media on the Project including but not limited to the following 1 Use of electronic communications. 2. Electronic media. 1 3 USE OF ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATIONS A. Provide for electronic communications with the Architect utilizing computer hardware and soft- ware as approved by the Architect, including the following: 1 Word Processing: Microsoft Word (Latest Version) (MS Word) 2. Spread Sheets. Microsoft Excel (MS Excel). 3 E -Mail: Any standard service provider offering transmittal of E -Mail messages and MS Word, MS Excel, txt, bmp, of pic, and similar files as attachments. 4 Computer Aided Design (CAD) If used by the Contractor the software must, in some conventionally manageable way be compatible with AutoCad V2002. B Unless otherwise provided for communications between the Contractor and the Architect should utilize electronic communications for the following: 1 Request for Interpretation (RFI) 2. Modification Proposal Request. 3 Submittals. 4 Other as directed. 1 4 ELECTRONIC MEDIA A. Standard forms: Standard forms required by the Contract Documents will be provided in elec- tronic media to the Contractor B Construction Documents (Specifications and Drawings) 1 All requests for copies of the Construction Documents will be made through the Contrac tor requests by subcontractors or vendors will not be acknowledged. The Contractor will be responsible for the distribution of electronic media to the Contractor's subcontractors and suppliers. ELECTRONIC MEDIA PROVISIONS 01315 1 2. Copies of the Construction Documents will be made available to the Contractor subject to the following. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Electronic record drawings for all disciplines, except where specifically required in specifications (i.e. Control Systems Fire Protection Systems, etc.) are to be completed by Contractor from Contractor's redline as -built drawings. Contractor is required to complete both as- built, and record drawings as defined in Section 01770 "Closeout Procedures PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01315 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION a. Release. The Contractor will sign and return to the Architect, the Electronic Media Release Form included as part of this Section, and will reimburse the Architect the designated fee before any electronic media is released. b. Documents are AutoCad Version 2002 and will not be modified by the Architect for Contractor's use. ELECTRONIC MEDIA PROVISIONS 01315 2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1 Preliminary Construction Schedule. 2. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3 Submittals Schedule. 4 Construction reports. 5 Field condition reports. 6 Special reports. B Related Sections include the following 1 Division 1 Section 'Payment Procedures for submitting the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 1 Section 'Project Management and Coordination' for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes 3 Division 1 Section 'Submittal Procedures' for submitting schedules and reports. 4 Division 1 Section 'Quality Requirements' for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 13 DEFINITIONS A. Activity A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1 Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3 Successor Activity An activity that follows another activity in the network. B Cost Loading: The allocation of the Schedule of Values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum, unless otherwise approved by Architect. C CPM Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION D Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity F Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity 1 Float time belongs to Owner 2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity 3 Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. G Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for greater detail H. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element. I. Milestone A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement. J Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing activities and activity relationships. K. Resource Loading The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled. 14 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant. B Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format: 1 Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3 Submittal category (action or informational). 4 Name of subcontractor 5 Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. C Preliminary Construction Schedule. Submit two opaque copies. 1 Approval of cost loaded preliminary construction schedule will not constitute approval of Schedule of Values for cost- loaded activities. D Contractor's Construction Schedule. Submit two opaque copies of initial schedule, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. 1 Submit an electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, on CD -R, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (Initial or Updated) and date on label. E. Construction Reports: Submit two copies at weekly intervals. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION F Field Condition Reports. Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing conditions. G Special Reports. Submit two copies at time of unusual event. 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and reporting, with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of Architect's request. 16 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1 Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review re- submittal ordering manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. 1 Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Initial Submittal Submit concurrently with preliminary bar -chart schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead -time for manufacture or fabrication. a. At Contractor's option, show submittals on the Preliminary Construction Schedule, instead of tabulating them separately 3 Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Procedures. Comply with procedures contained in the AGC 'Construction Planning Scheduling. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION B Time Frame. Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed, to date of Final Completion 1 Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order C Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1 Activity Duration. Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities. Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery 3 Submittal Review Time. Include review and re- submittal times indicated in Division 1 Section 'Submittal Procedures' in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. 4 Startup and Testing Time. Include not less than 21 days for startup and testing 5 Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. D Constraints. Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1 Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. 3 Work by Owner Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner 4 Products Ordered in Advance. Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 1 Section 'Summary Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 5. Owner Furnished Products. Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 1 Section 'Summary Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 6 Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. c. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions. f Provisions for future construction. g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control. 7 Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to the following: a. Subcontract awards. b Submittals. c. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f Sample testing. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 4 1 Microsoft Project. CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION g. Deliveries. h. Installation i. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. k. Curing. I. Startup and placement into final use and operation. 8 Area Separations. Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following: a. Structural completion. b Permanent space enclosure. c. Completion of mechanical installation. d. Completion of electrical installation. e. Substantial Completion. E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion. F Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. G Computer Software. Prepare schedules using a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. 2.3 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar -Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar chart-type construction schedule within seven days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. B Preparation Indicate each significant construction activity separately Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line Outline significant construction activities for first 60 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. 2.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE) A. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a computerized, time scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. 1 Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. 2. Use 'one workday' as the unit of time. Include list of nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule. B CPM Schedule Preparation. Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the preliminary network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 5 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1 Activities. Indicate the estimated time duration sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: 2.5 REPORTS a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. c. Purchase of materials. d. Delivery e. Fabrication. f Utility interruptions. g. Installation. h. Testing. 2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. 3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer drawn, time scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 4 Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. C Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1 Identification of activities that have changed 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4 Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6 Changes in total float or slack time. 7 Changes in the Contract Time. A. Construction Reports: Prepare a weekly construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site. 1 List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3 Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4 Equipment at Project site. 5 Material deliveries. 6 High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. 7 Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9 Unusual events (refer to special reports). 10 Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11 Emergency procedures. 12. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 13 Change Orders received and implemented. 14 Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 15 Services connected and disconnected. 16 Equipment or system tests and startups. 17 Partial Completions and occupancies. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 6 18 Substantial Completions authorized. B Field Condition Reports. Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for interpretation. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 2.6 SPECIAL REPORTS B Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, responses by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable. A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. PART 3 EXECUTION CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 3 1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting using CPM scheduling. 1 In -House Option: Owner may waive the requirement to retain a consultant if Contractor employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques. Submit qualifications. 2. Meetings. Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings related to Project progress alleged delays, and time impact. B Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1 Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change including, but not limited to changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3 As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity C Distribution. Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need -to -know schedule responsibility 1 Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 7 END OF SECTION 01320 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 8 1 AIA Contract Administration G810 Transmittal Leiter (instructions on the reverse side) PROJECT (Name and address): TO (Name and address): FROM (Name and address): I WE TRANSMIT: ;J Attached ,J Under separate cover VIA. 3 Overnight del! ter; J Mail 3 E -mail 3 Courier 3 .Fax J Other FOR: 3 Approval t Action 3 Information 3 Use as requested I 0 Comment 3 Distribution J Other THE FOLLOWING: 3 Dravir 3 Specirications 3 Digital tiles 3 Submitta:s 3 Omer NO OF COPIES DATE FORMAT 1 DESCRIPTION 1 1 REMARKS. 1 BY COPIES TO' 1 MA Document G810 Transmittal Leiter e 20C1.The American institute of Architects Washington, PC .www asa.on1 WARPING: Reproduction, unlicensed photocopying or substantial quotation of the material herein without written perinission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and wits subject the violator to legal prosecution. Tc report copyright violations of A!A Contract Documents. e mail me American Institute of Architects legal counsel copyngtt rd'ara.ar .tw Contract. Administration G805 List of Subcontractors PROJECT (Marne a, address)' TO (Architec'): ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NUMBER: Work/Firm Name tstructions on the reverse side) FROM 'Conrracior): CONTRACTOR'S PROJECT NUMBER: (List Subcontractors and others proposed to be emp:oved on the above Project as required by the bidding documents) Page Date: Address/Phone Superintendent NA Document G805 List of Subcontractors R 2001 The American Institute of Architects Washington. DC uww.eia.org WARNING: Reproduction, unlicensed photocopying or substantial quotation of the material herein without written permission of the ALA violates the copyright laws of the United States and vritl subject the violator to legal prosecution. To report copyright violations of ALA Contract Documents, e.maii The American Institute of Architects legal counsel eopyrigr' @'eia. erg. CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B Related Sections include the following: 1 Division 1 Section 'Payment Procedures' for submitting Applications for Payment and the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 1 Section 'Project Management and Coordination' for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes and for submitting Coordination Drawings. 3 Division 1 Section 'Construction Progress Documentation' for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. 4 Division 1 Section 'Quality Requirements' for submitting test and inspection reports and for mockup requirements. 5 Division 1 Section 'Closeout Procedures' for submitting warranties Project Record Documents and maintenance manuals. 6 Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for submittals in those Sections. 13 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. B Informational Submittals. Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1 4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will be provided by the Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. Contractor is to reimburse Architect for all costs associated with handling, processing, delivery etc. of Contractor's request. B Coordination. Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1 Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing testing, delivery other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION C Submittals Schedule. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section 'Construction Progress Documentation' for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. D Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review including time for re- submittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. 1 Initial Review Allow 5 days for initial review of each submittal. AIIow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Concurrent Review Where concurrent review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner or other parties is required allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. 3 Direct Transmittal to Consultant: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted directly to Architect's consultants provide duplicate copy of transmittal to Architect. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor 4 Concurrent Consultant Review Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 15 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be retumed to Architect before being returned to Contractor 5 If intermediate submittal is necessary process it in the same manner as initial submittal. 6 AIIow 15 days for processing each re- submittal. 7 No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing. E. Identification. Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1 Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor e. Name and address of subcontractor f Name and address of supplier g. Name of manufacturer h. Unique identifier including revision number i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed as appropriate. I. Other necessary identification. F Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. G. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor 1 Transmittal Form: Use facsimile of sample form at end of Section 2. Include the following information. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION a. Project name. b Date. c. Destination (To d. Source (From:) e. Names of subcontractor manufacturer and supplier f Category and type of submittal. g. Submittal purpose and description. h. Specification Section number and title. i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. k. Remarks. I. Signature of transmitter H Distribution. Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. Use for Construction. Use only final submittals with mark indicating 'action' taken by Architect in connection with construction. 1 5 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S CAD FILES A. General: At Contractor's written request, copies of Architect's CAD files will be provided to Contractor for Contractor's use in connection with Project, subject to the conditions listed in Section 01315 and 1 4.A. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. 1 Number of Copies: Submit three copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. 2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal, as follows, unless otherwise indicated: a. Initial Submittal: Submit a preliminary single copy of each submittal where selection of options, color pattern, texture or similar characteristics is required Architect will return submittal with options selected. b. Final Submittal: Submit three copies, unless copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit five copies where copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain one copy' remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one retumed copy as a Project Record Document. B Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1 If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 3 Include the following information, as applicable. a. Manufacturers written recommendations. b Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f Wiring diagrams showing factory- installed wiring. g. Printed performance curves. h. Operational range diagrams. i. Mill reports. j. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals. k. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. I. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. m. Application of testing agency labels and seals. n. Notation of coordination requirements. C Shop Drawings. Prepare Project specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1 Preparation. Include the following information, as applicable. a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing -in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field installed wiring, including power signal, and control wiring. f Shop -work manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Design calculations. j. Compliance with specified standards. k. Notation of coordination requirements. I. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. m. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. n. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. o. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer installed and field- installed wiring. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full -size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8 -1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 24 by 36 inches. 3 Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal, as follows: a. Initial Submittal: Submit two blue- or black -line prints. Architect will return one print. b Final Submittal: Submit three black -line prints, unless prints are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit five prints where prints are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain one print; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned print as a Project Record Drawing D Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section 'Project Management and Coordination. E. Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following: SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 R13 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1 Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section 'Quality Requirements' for mockups. 2. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available 3 Samples for Verification. Submit full -size units or Samples of size indicated prepared from the same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified and physically identical with the product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected Samples include, but are not limited to the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, small cuts or containers of materials, complete units of repetitively used materials, swatches showing color texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. 4 Preparation. Mount, display or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architect's sample where so indicated. Attach label on unexposed side that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name or name of manufacturer c. Sample source 5 Additional Information. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead provide the following: a. Size limitations. b. Compliance with recognized standards. c. Availability d. Delivery time. 6 Submit Samples for review of kind, color pattern, and texture for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. a. If variation in color pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of the variations. b Refer to individual Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship fabrication techniques, details of assembly connections, operation, and similar construction characteristics. 7 Number of Samples for Initial Selection. Submit one full set of available choices where color pattern, texture, or similar characteristics, are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 8 Number of Samples for Verification: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample set; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a Project Record Sample. a. Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 9 Disposition. Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality- control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property are the property of Contractor SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 5 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION F Product Schedule or List: Prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1 Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product. 2. Number and name of room or space. 3 Location within room or space. G Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section 'Construction Progress Documentation' for Construction Manager's action. H Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section 'Construction Progress Documentation. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section 'Payment Procedures. J Schedule of Values. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section 'Payment Procedures. K. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Use form at end of Section. 1 Number of Copies: Submit three copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will retum two copies. a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. 2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1 Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not retum copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of Contractor testing agency or design professional responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of the company 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section 'Quality Requirements. B Contractor's Construction Schedule. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section 'Construction Progress Documentation. C Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. D Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 6 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION E. Installer Certificates. Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this specific Project. F Manufacturer Certificates. Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. G. Product Certificates. Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements. H. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements. J Product Test Reports. Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency K. Maintenance Data. Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section. L. Manufacturer's Instructions. Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer Include the following as applicable 1 Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3 Sequence of installation or erection. 4 Required installation tolerances. 5 Required adjustments. 6 Recommendations for cleaning and protection. M Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable 1 Name, address, and telephone number of factory- authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4 Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6 Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty 7 Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. N. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage amounts of deductibles, if any and term of the coverage SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 7 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW O Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS's). Submit information directly to Owner If submitted to Architect, Architect will not review this information and will retum it with no action taken. CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp Include Project name and location, submittal number Specification Section title and number name of reviewer date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: NO EXCEPTIONS NOTED IMPLEMENT EXCEPTIONS NOTED REVISE AND RESUBMIT REJECTED This conditional review is limited in scope and not detailed and is only for conformance with design concept and general compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for confirming quantities, verifying dimensions, selecting fabrication procedures, construction techniques, coordinating and safely performing the Work. The Architect has not reviewed and is not responsible for substitutions to or deviations from the Contract Documents not clearly noted by the Contractor and specifically accepted by the Architect in writing or by the Architect's issuance of a Field Order By Date. BEAMAN ARCHITECTURE, LTD C Informational Submittals. Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party D Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered non responsive, and will be returned without review SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 8 END OF SECTION 01330 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 9 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1 Specific quality- assurance and control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality assurance and control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3 Requirements for Contractor to provide quality- assurance and control services required by Architect, Owner or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. C Related Sections include the following: 1 Division 1 Section 'Construction Progress Documentation' for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections. 2. Division 1 Section 'Cutting and Patching' for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by testing and inspecting activities. 3 Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 13 DEFINITIONS A. Quality- Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality- Control Services. Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C Pre construction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION D Product Testing Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. E. Source Quality Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e. plant, mill, factory or shop. F Field Quality- Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on -site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. G. Testing Agency An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency H. Installer /Applicator /Erector Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor or Sub subcontractor to perform a particular construction operation including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1 Using a term such as 'carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as 'carpenter It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to trades people of the corresponding generic name. Experienced: When used with an entity 'experienced' means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1 4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in- service performance. C Manufacturer Qualifications. A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION D Fabricator Qualifications. A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. F Specialists. Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1 Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing the Work. G Testing Agency Qualifications. An NRTL, an NVLAP or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548' and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections, and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1 NRTL. A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910 7 2. NVLAP A testing agency accredited according to the NIST National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. H Factory- Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. Pre construction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform pre- construction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: 1 Contractor responsibilities include the following' a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements. d. Build site- assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project. e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. f When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups' do not reuse products on Project. 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities. Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality- assurance service to the Architect, with copy to Contractor Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 3 1 6 QUALITY CONTROL CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Owner Responsibilities Where quality- control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1 Owner will fumish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as authorized by Change Orders. 3 Costs for retesting and re- inspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order B Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality- control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality- control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 1 Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality- control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner unless agreed to in writing by Owner 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3 Where quality- control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality- control service. 4 Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility 5 Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect field assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 1 Section 'Submittal Procedures. D Re- testing /Re- inspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility provide quality- control services, including retesting and re- inspecting for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1 Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in -situ tests are conducted. 3 Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4 Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality- control service through Contractor QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 5 Do not release, revoke alter or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6 Do not perform any duties of Contractor F Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1 Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4 Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency 7 Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. G Coordination. Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality assurance and control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1 Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples and similar activities H Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. 1 Distribution. Distribute schedule to Owner Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. 1 7 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner and as follows: 1 Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality control service to the Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4 Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5 Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and re- inspecting corrected work. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 5 PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1 Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4 Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1 Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. 2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section 'Cutting and Patching B Protect construction exposed by or for quality- control service activities. C Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality control services. END OF SECTION 01400 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 6 SECTION 01420 REFERENCES PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1 3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B Approved' When used to convey Architects action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, 'approved' is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C 'Directed' A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including 'requested, 'authorized, 'selected, 'approved, 'required, and 'permitted' have the same meaning as 'directed. D 'Indicated' Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including 'shown, 'noted," 'scheduled, and 'specified' have the same meaning as 'indicated. E. 'Regulations' Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F 'Furnish' Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly installation, and similar operations. G. 'Install' Operations at Project site including unloading temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring applying working to dimension, finishing curing, protecting cleaning, and similar operations. H. 'Provide' Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. 'Project Site' Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference REFERENCES 01420 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1 Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity obtain copies directly from publication source. D Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations. Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web -site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up -to -date as of the date of the Contract Documents. ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from Access Board www.access-board.gov FED -STD Federal Standard (See FS) NES (Formerly' National Evaluation Service) (See ICC -ES) UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards Available from Access Board www.access-board.gov 1 4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS (800) 872 -2253 (202) 272 -0080 (800) 872 -2253 (202) 272 -0080 A. Industry Organizations. Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web -site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to -date as of the date of the Contract Documents. AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (202) 862 -5100 www.aluminum.org AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216) 241 7333 www aaadm.com AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737 -0202 www aabchq.com AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303 -5664 www aamanet.org AASHTO American Association of State Highway and (202) 624 -5800 Transportation Officials www transportation.org REFERENCES 01420 2 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) (919) 549 -8141 www.aatcc.org ACI ACI International (248) 848 -3700 (American Concrete Institute) www.aci int.org ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506 -7216 www concrete pipe.org AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257 2530 www aeic.org AF &PA American Forest Paper Association (800) 878 -8878 www afandpa.org (202) 463 -2700 AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548 -3118 www.agc.org Al Asphalt Institute (859) 288 -4960 www.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242 -3837 www.aia.org (202) 626 -7300 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644 -2400 www aisc.org (312) 670 -2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452 -7100 www steel.org AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792 9559 www.aitc glulam.org ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972 1700 www alsc.org AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394 -0150 www.amca.org ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293 -8020 www.ansi.org APA APA The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565 -6600 www.apawood.org ARI Air Conditioning Refrigeration Institute (703) 524 -8800 www.ari.org ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548 -2723 www asce org (703) 295 -6300 ASHRAE American Society of Heating Refrigerating and (800) 527 -4723 Air Conditioning Engineers www.ashrae.org (404) 636 -8400 REFERENCES 01420 3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION ASME ASME International (800) 843 -2763 (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (212) 591 -7722 www.asme.org ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835 -3040 www asse- plumbing.org ASTM ASTM International (610) 832 -9585 (American Society for Testing and Materials International) www astm.org AWCI AWCI International (703) 534 -8300 (Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries International) www awci.org AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCSC) AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (800) 449 -8811 www awinet.org (703) 733 -0600 AWPA American Wood- Preservers' Association (334) 874 -9800 www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society (800) 443 -9353 www.aws.org (305) 443 -9353 AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926 -7337 www.awwa.org (303) 794 -7711 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297 -2122 www buildershardware.com CCC Carpet Cushion Council (203) 637 -1312 www carpetcushion.org w3 pwgsc.gc.ca/cgsb (819) 956 -0425 CISCA Ceilings Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584 -1919 www cisca.org CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892 -0137 www cispi.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596 -2583 www chainlinkinfo.org CRI Carpet Rug Institute (The) (800) 882 -8846 www carpet rug.com (706) 278 -3176 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517 1200 www crsi.org CSA CSA International (800) 463 -6727 (Formerly IAS International Approval Services) (416) 747 -4000 www csa- international.org REFERENCES 01420 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689 -2900 www csinet.org (703) 684 -0300 CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583 -4087 (Formerly Cooling Tower Institute) www cti.org DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222 2010 www dhi.org EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907 7500 www eia.org EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (800) 548 -2723 www asce.org (703) 295 -6300 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332 -0040 www ejma.org ESD ESD Association (315) 339 -6937 www esda.org FM Factory Mutual System (Now FMG) CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION FMG FM Global (401) 275 -3000 (Formerly FM Factory Mutual System) www fmglobal.com GA Gypsum Association (202) 289 -5440 www gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271 -0208 www glasswebsite.com GRI (Now GSI) GS Green Seal (202) 872 -6400 www greenseal org GSI Geosynthetic Institute (610) 522 -8440 www geosynthetic- institute.org HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (Part of NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood Veneer Association (703) 435 -2900 www hpva.org HPW H. P White Laboratory Inc. (410) 838 -6550 www hpwhite.com IAS International Approval Services (Now CSA International) REFERENCES 01420 5 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830 -0369 www icea.net ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827 -0830 www icri.org IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11 www iec.ch IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419 -7900 www ieee.org IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248 -5000 www iesna.org IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646 -2234 www igcc.org IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (The) (613) 233 -1510 www igmaonline.org ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11 www iso.ch ISSFA Intemational Solid Surface Fabricators Association (702) 567 -8150 www issfa.net ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11 www itu.int/home LMA Laminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA) LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488 -6864 www lightning.org (847) 577 -7200 MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241 -7333 www mbma.com MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (312) 644 -6610 www metalframingmfg.org MH Material Handling (Now MHIA) MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345 -1815 www mhia.org (704) 676 -1190 MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674 -8937 www paintinfo com MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and (703) 281 -6613 Fittings Industry Inc. www mss hq.com NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (312) 332 -0405 REFERENCES 01420 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 www naamm.org CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION NACE NACE International (281) 228 -6200 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) www nace.org NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737 2926 www nadca.com NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (The) (703) 684 -0084 www naima.org NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713 -1900 www ncma.org NCTA National Cable Telecommunications Association (202) 775 -3550 www ncta.com NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977 -3698 www nebb org NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657 3110 www necanet.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841 3200 www nema.org NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (303) 697 -8441 www netaworld.org NFPA NFPA (800) 344 -3555 (National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770 -3000 www nfpa.org NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589 -1776 www nfrc.org NGA National Glass Association (703) 442 -4890 www glass.org NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933 -0318 www natlhardwood.org (901) 377 -1818 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524 -2393 www nlga.org NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323 -9545 www nrca.net (847) 299 -9070 NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846 -7622 www nrmca.org (301) 587 1400 NSF NSF International (800) 673 -6275 (National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769 -8010 www nsf org REFERENCES 01420 7 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION NSSGA National Stone, Sand Gravel Association (800) 342 -1415 www nssga.org (703) 525 -8788 OPL Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. (800) 966 -5253 www opl.com (210) 635 -8100 PDCA Painting Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332 -7322 www pdca.com (314) 514 -7322 PDI Plumbing Drainage Institute (800) 589 -8956 www pdionline.org (978) 557 -0720 PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333 -3929 http://pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections (800) 644 -2400 www boltcouncil org (312) 670 -2400 RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (301) 340 -8580 www rfci.com SAE SAE International (724) 776 -4841 www sae.org SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 462 -1930 www.sdi.org SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899 -0010 www steeldoor org SEI Structural Engineering Institute (800) 548 -2723 www seinstitute.com (703) 295 -6195 SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646 -2234 www sgcc.org SIA Security Industry Association (703) 683 -2075 www siaonline.org SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (Now IGMA) SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626 -1995 www.steeljoist.org SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (703) 803 -2980 www smacna.org SPRI SPRI (781) 647 -7026 (Single Ply Roofing Institute) www.spri.org SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982 -0355 www ssina.com (202) 342 -8630 SSPC SSPC The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281 -7772 REFERENCES 01420 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION www sspc.org (412) 281 -2331 SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241 7333 www steelwindows.com SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, Restoration Institute (816) 472 -7974 www swrionline.org TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (864) 646 -8453 www tileusa.com TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association /Electronic (703) 907 7700 Industries Alliance www tiaonline.org TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939 -9700 www masonrysociety org UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (800) 285 -4476 www ul com (847) 272 -8800 UNI Uni -Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243 -3902 www uni- bell.org WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424 -2869 www wastec.org (202) 244 -4700 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283 -1486 www wclib org (503) 639 -0651 WMMPA Wood Molding Millwork Producers Association (800) 550 -7889 www wmmpa.com (530) 661 -9591 WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725 -0333 www wsrca.com (650) 548 -0112 WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224 -3930 www wwpa.org B. Code Agencies. Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web -site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to -date as of the date of the Contract Documents. BOCA BOCA International, Inc. (See ICC) CABO Council of American Building Officials (See ICC) IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472 -4100 www iapmo org ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (See ICC) REFERENCES 01420 9 ICBO ES ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. (See ICC -ES) ICC International Code Council (Formerly CABO Council of American Building Officials) www iccsafe.org ICC -ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423 -6587 www icc- es.org (562) 699 -0543 C Federal Govemment Agencies. Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web -site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up -to -date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CE Army Corps of Engineers www usace army mil CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission www cpsc.gov DOC Department of Commerce www commerce.gov DOD Department of Defense www dodssp daps.mil DOE Department of Energy www eren.doe.gov EPA Environmental Protection Agency www epa.gov FAA Federal Aviation Administration www faa.gov FCC Federal Communications Commission www fcc.gov CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION FDA Food and Drug Administration www fda.gov GSA General Services Administration www gsa.gov HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development www.hud.gov LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory www Ibl.gov NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) (703) 931 -4533 (800) 638 -2772 (301) 504 -6816 (202) 482 -2000 (215) 697 -6257 (202) 586 -9220 (202) 272 -0167 (202) 366 -4000 (888) 225 -5322 (888) 463 -6332 (800) 488 -3111 (202) 501 -1888 (202) 708 -1112 (510) 486 -4000 NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975 -6478 www nist.gov REFERENCES 01420 10 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION OSHA Occupational Safety Health Administration (800) 321 -6742 www osha.gov (202) 693 -1999 PBS Public Building Service (See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690 -7694 http. /phs.os.dhhs.gov RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720 -9540 (See USDA) SD State Department (202) 647 -4000 www state.gov TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334 -2934 www nas.edu /trb USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720 -2791 www usda.gov USPS Postal Service (202) 268 -2000 www usps.com PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01420 REFERENCES 01420 11 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 12 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B Related Sections include the following 1 Division 1 Section 'Summay for limitations on utility interruptions and other work restrictions. 2. Division 1 Section 'Submittal Procedures' for procedures for submitting copies of implementation and termination schedule and utility reports. 3 Division 1 Section 'Execution Requirements' for progress cleaning requirements. 4 Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation and humidity requirements for products in those Sections. 1 3 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B Water Service. Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. C Electric Power Service: Electric power from Owner's existing system is partially available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. For work outside of juvenile facility or for welding, Contractor is to provide electric generator as required. 14 SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan. Show temporary facilities, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10 6 the NECA 'Temporary Electrical Facilities, and NFPA 241 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1 Trade Jurisdictions. Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions. 1 6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities. Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Visqueen. 6 -mil, clear taped in place to prevent spread of dust and fumes to occupied areas and to protect existing floor finishes to remain. B Plywood wood framed, acoustically insulated security barriers with lockable doors. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated, with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. 1 Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a drip pan of suitable size to minimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly from pans. B Sanitary Facilities: Provide drinking water for use of construction personnel 1 Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet and wash facilities will not be permitted. Contractor to provide toilet and wash facilities acceptable to jurisdiction. C Heating and Cooling: Use of Owner's heating and cooling system will be permitted. D Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION E. Electric Power Service. Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted as long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner except for exterior work or for welding. F Electric Power Distribution Provide electric power distribution system of sufficient size capacity and power characteristics required for construction operations. 1 Install electric power distribution overhead, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner G Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations and inspections as required. H. Telephone Service Provide superintendent with cellular telephone for Project use. Electronic Communication Service Provide temporary electronic communication service including electronic mail. 3.2 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel, as coordinated with Owner B Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with Division 1 Section 'Execution Requirements' for progress cleaning requirements. C Lifts and Hoists. Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel D No smoking is allowed on Owner's property 3.3 OPERATION, TERMINATION AND REMOVAL A. Supervision. Enforce strict discipline in use bf temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B Maintenance. Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. C Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or if necessary restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1 Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor 2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 1 Section 'Closeout Procedures. END OF SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 3 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 01600 TO Beaman Architecture Ltd. PROJECT Clallam County 3' Street Building Level 1 Renovation SPECIFIED ITEM Section Page Paragraph Description PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION: Attach data that includes product description, specifications, drawings photographs, performance and test data that is adequate for evaluation of request including identification of applicable data portions. Identify all changes or modifications to Contract Documents that will result in installation of proposed substitutions, if any Undersigned certifies the following items are correct, unless clearly identified by attachments. 1 Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on drawings. 2. Undersigned will pay for any changes to building design, including engineering design, detailing and construction costs caused by proposed substitution. 3 Proposed substitution has no adverse effect on other trades, construction schedule or specified warranty requirements. 4 Maintenance and service parts are available locally or readily obtainable for proposed substitution Undersigned further certifies function appearance and quality of proposed substitution are equivalent or superior to specified item. Undersigned agrees to all terms and conditions that substitutions found in Contract Documents apply to this proposed substitution. Submitted by Name Signature Firm Name Street Address City State Zip Code Date General Contractor (if after award of Contract) For use by NE Accepted Accepted as noted Not Accepted Received too late By Date CLALLAM COUNTY 3 R1) STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products, special warranties, product substitutions and comparable products. B Related Sections include the following: 1 Division 1 Section 'References' for applicable industry standards for products specified. 2. Division 1 Section 'Closeout Procedures' for submitting warranties for Contract closeout. 3 Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted. 13 DEFINITIONS A. Products. Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term 'product' includes the terms 'material, equipment, 'system, and terms of similar intent. 1 Named Products. Items identified by manufacturer's product name including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products. Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility except that products consisting of recycled- content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3 Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in- service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor C Basis -of- Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words 'basis of design including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type function, dimension, in- service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 -1 14 SUBMITTALS CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product. 1 Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule 2. Form. Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings: a. Specification Section number and title. b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. c. Proprietary name, model number and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. f Installer's name and address. g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery date. 3. Initial Submittal: Within 15 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of initial product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. a. At Contractors option, initial submittal may be limited to product selections and designations that must be established early in Contract period. 4 Completed List: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. 5 Architect's Action. Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 5 days of receipt of completed product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architects response, or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement to comply with the Contract Documents. B Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1 Substitution Request Form. Use Form 01600 following this Section. 2. Documentation. Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following as applicable. a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION f List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. h. Research /evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer on manufacturer's letterhead stating lack of availability or delays in delivery j. Cost information including a proposal of change if any in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3 Architect's Action: If necessary Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later a. Form of Acceptance. Addenda (prior to Bid) or Change Order (post Award) b Use product specified, if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. C Comparable Product Requests. Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1 Architect's Action. If necessary Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later a. Form of Approval As specified in Division 1 Section 'Submittal Procedures. b Use product specified, if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. D Basis -of- Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section 'Submittal Procedures. Show compliance with requirements. 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1 6 PRODUCT DELIVERY STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturers written instructions. B Delivery and Handling: 1 Schedule delivery to minimize long -term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4 Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. C Storage: 1 Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weather tight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4 Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 5 Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 6 Comply with product manufacturers written instructions for temperature, humidity ventilation, and weather protection requirements for storage. 7 Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 8. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner 1 7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified iri other Sections shall be in addition to and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1 Manufacturer's Warranty Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner 2. Special Warranty Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner B Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 1 Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form. When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 4 B Product Selection Procedures. CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 3 Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C Submittal Time. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section 'Closeout Procedures PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. 1 Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products. If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3 Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4 Where products are accompanied by the term as selected, Architect will make selection. 5 Where products are accompanied by the term 'match sample, sample to be matched is Architect's. 6 Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish 'salient characteristics' of products. 7 Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term or equal' or 'or approved equal' or 'or approved, comply with provisions in Part 2 'Comparable Products' Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. 1 Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer provide the named product that complies with requirements. 2. Manufacturer /Source. Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. 3 Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that comply with requirements. 4 Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. 5 Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 'Comparable Products' Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 6 Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 'Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 7 Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 'Product Substitutions' Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system. 8. Basis -of- Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 5 2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 'Comparable Products' Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers. 9 Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 'Product Substitutions' Article for proposal of product. 10 Visual Selection Specification. Where Specifications include the phrase 'as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures' or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements. a. Standard Range. Where Specifications include the phrase 'standard range of colors, patterns, textures' or similar phrase, Architect will select color pattern, density or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. b. Full Range. Where Specifications include the phrase 'full range of colors, patterns, textures' or similar phrase, Architect will select color pattern, density or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 10 days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. B Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied Architect will retum requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1 Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner and similar considerations. 2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 4 Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5 Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6 Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. 7 Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8 Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 9 Requested substitution provides specified warranty 10 If requested substitution involves more than one contractor requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 6 2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements. 1 Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty 4 List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested 5 Samples, if requested. PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01600 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 7 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including but not limited to the following: 1 Construction layout. 2. General installation of products. 3 Progress cleaning. 4 Starting and adjusting. 5 Protection of installed construction. 6 Correction of the Work. B Related Sections include the following: 1 Division 1 Section 'Project Management and Coordination' for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities 2. Division 1 Section 'Submittal Procedures' for submitting surveys. 3. Division 1 Section 'Cutting and Patching' for procedural requirements for cutting and patching necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work. 4 Division 1 Section 'Closeout Procedures' for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions. The existence and location of construction indicated as existing is not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of systems and other construction affecting the Work. B Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1 Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION a. Description of the Work. b List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections. 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 3. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 4 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Field Measurements. Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. B Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. C Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for interpretation to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. See Section 01310 for form. 3 3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification. Before proceeding to layout the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly 3 4 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1 Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3 Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 4 Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet in spaces without a suspended ceiling. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 2 3 5 PROGRESS CLEANING CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels F Templates. Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. G Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1 Mounting Heights. Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction 3 Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. I Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint -use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly Dispose of materials lawfully 1 Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally according to regulations. B Site. Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1 Remove liquid spills promptly 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom -clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces. Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION F Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal. Burying or burning waste materials on -site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3 6 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. C Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D Manufacturer's Field Service If a factory- authorized service representative is required to inspect field assembled components and equipment installation comply with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section 'Quality Requirements. 3 7 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B Comply with manufacturers' written instructions for temperature and relative humidity 3 8 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section 'Cutting and Patching. 1 Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 4 D Repair components that do not operate properly Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION 01700 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 5 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B Related Sections include the following: 1 Division 1 Section 'Selective Demolition' for demolition of selected portions of the building. 2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 13 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting Removal of in -place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. B Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. 14 SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information 1 Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided. 2. Changes to In -Place Construction. Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements. 3 Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4 Dates. Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5 Utility Services and Mechanical /Electrical Systems: List services /systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services /systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services /systems will be disrupted 6. Structural Elements. Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 -1 7 Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work. 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Structural Elements. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their Toad- carrying capacity or Toad- deflection ratio. B Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety C Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their Toad- carrying capacity that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety D Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner 16 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B In -Place Materials: Use materials identical to in -place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in -place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1 If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in -place materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 31 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 2 33 PERFORMANCE CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1 Compatibility Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in -place finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B Protection Protect in -place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. D Existing Utility Services and Mechanical /Electrical Systems: Where existing services /systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services /systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas. A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay 1 Cut in -place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B Cutting: Cut in -place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1 In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding not hammering and chopping Cut holes and slots as small as possible neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3 Concrete. Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond -core drill. 4 Mechanical and Electrical Services. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 5 Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing closing up and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. 1 Inspection. Where feasible test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 3 END OF SECTION 01731 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3 Floors and Walls. Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color texture, and appearance. Remove in -place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4 Ceilings. Patch, repair or re -hang in -place ceilings as necessary to provide an even plane surface of uniform appearance. 5 Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weather -tight condition D Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar oils, putty and similar materials. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. B Related Sections include the following 1 Division 1 Section 'Summary' for use of premises and Owner occupancy requirements. 2. Division 1 Section 'Temporary Facilities and Controls' for temporary construction and environmental protection measures for selective demolition operations. 3 Division 1 Section tutting and Patching' for cutting and patching procedures. 13 DEFINITIONS A. Remove. Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off -site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B Remove and Reinstall Detach items from existing construction prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated. C Existing to Remain. Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 14 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For demolition firm. B Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities. Indicate the following: 1 Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity Ensure Owner's other tenants' on -site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff capping, and continuation of utility services. 4 Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. 5 Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste removal from building SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 1 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. C Standards: Comply with ANSI Al 0 6 and NFPA 241 1 6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted 1 Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section 'Summary B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. C Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1 If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb immediately notify Architect and Owner Owner will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on -site is not permitted. F Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION D Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. 3 2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAUELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services /Systems: Maintain services /systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1 Comply with requirements for existing services /systems interruptions specified in Division 1 Section 'Summary B Service /System Requirements. Locate identify disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical /electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished 1 Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services /systems when requested by Contractor 2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 3 If services /systems are required to -be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services /systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services /systems to other parts of building. 4 Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. 3 3 PREPARATION a. Where entire wall is to be removed, existing services /systems may be removed with removal of the wall. A. Site Access and Temporary Controls. Conduct selective demolition and debris removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1 Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 1 Section 'Temporary Facilities and Controls. B Temporary Facilities. Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1 Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3 Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4 Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Division 1 Section 'Temporary Facilities and Controls. C Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1 Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1 Neatly cut openings and holes plumb square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire- suppression devices during flame- cutting operations. 4 Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 5 Remove decayed, vermin infested or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off -site, after Owner approval. 6. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 7 Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly B Existing Items to Remain Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. 3 5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete Slabs -on- Grade. Saw -cut perimeter of area to be demolished then break up and remove. B Resilient Floor Coverings. Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI -WP and its Addendum. 1 Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the methods recommended by RFC! 3 6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA approved landfill. 1 Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on -site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 f 1 3 7 CLEANING END OF SECTION 01732 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION C Disposal Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 5 SIB MO Mlle 1•11 AIN 11111. OM SIMI NM MIS 1111111 AIN NI MI 1 111111 111111 1111111 CONTRACTOR'S PUNCH LIST WALLS ITEM ROOM ROOM NAME ITEM FLOOR BASE CEILING NORTH I EAST SOUTH WEST REMARKS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 DATE CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to the following: 1 Inspection procedures. 2. Project Record Documents. 3 Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 4 Warranties. 5. Final cleaning B Related Sections include the following. 1 Division 1 Section 'Payment Procedures' for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. 2. Division 1 Section 'Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site. 3 Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1 3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1 Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list) the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete and submit to the Architect. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3 Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4 Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5 Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, and similar final record information. 6 Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7 Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8 Complete startup testing of systems. 9 Submit test/adjust/balance records. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 -1 10 Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11 Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy use, operation, and maintenance. 13 Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14 Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION B. Inspection. Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect, will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1 Re- inspection: Request re- inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 1 4 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1 Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section 'Payment Procedures. 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list) endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3 Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4 Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1 Re- inspection. Request re- inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1 5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use form at end of Section. 1 Organize list of spaces in sequential order 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01770 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A 3 Include the following information at the top of each page. a. Project name. b Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor e. Page number 1 6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. B Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue- or black -line white prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1 Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally Require individual or entity that obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer subcontractor or similar entity to prepare the marked -up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be readily identified and recorded later b Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. d. Mark Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately Where Shop Drawings are marked, show cross reference on Contract Drawings. 2. Mark record sets with erasable red colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location. 3 Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 4 Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate numbers, and similar identification where applicable. 5 Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation 'PROJECT RECORD DRAWING' in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with durable paper cover sheets Include identification on cover sheets. 6 Contractor to hire a professional drafting firm to complete electronic record drawings of all changes noted on record prints. Record drawings are to be completed in AutoCAD V.2000 format based on backgrounds of Contract Documents provided by the Architect. Deliver (1) CD and (1) hardcopy to Architect, for review C Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1 Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3 Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, where applicable. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 3 D Record Product Data. Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal Mark one set to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data. 1 Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3 Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, where applicable. E. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. 1 7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows: 1 Operation Data: a. Emergency instructions and procedures. b. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards. c. Operating procedures, including startup shutdown, seasonal, and weekend operations. d. Description of controls and sequence of operations. e. Piping diagrams. 2. Maintenance Data: a. Manufacturer's information including list of spare parts. b Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier c. Maintenance procedures. d. Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance. e. Maintenance record forms. f Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials. g. Copies of maintenance service agreements. h. Copies of warranties and bonds. CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION B Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and index data in heavy -duty 3 -ring, vinyl- covered, loose -leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets Identify each binder on front and spine with the printed title 'OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL, Project name, and subject matter of contents. 18 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION B Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1 Bind warranties and bonds in heavy -duty 3 -ring, vinyl- covered, loose -leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8- 1/2 -by -11 inchpaper 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic- covered tabs for each separate warranty Mark tab to identify the product or installation Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer 3 Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title WARRANTIES Project name, and name of Contractor C Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents. Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B Cleaning Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturers written instructions. 1 Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter and other foreign substances. b Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f Clean exposed exterior and interior hard surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 5 END OF SECTION 01770 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap' shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. I. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over 'UL and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. q. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. r Clean Tight fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency Replace burned -out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. s. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy C Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 6 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 03301 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE (LIMITED APPLICATIONS) PART1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast -in -place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for non critical applications of concrete and for projects using small quantities of concrete. B Related Sections include the following 1 Division 2 Section 'Cement Concrete Pavement for concrete pavement and walks 13 SUBMITTALS A. General: In addition to the following comply with submittal requirements in ACI 301 B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. C Design Mixtures. For each concrete mixture. 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. B Source Limitations. Obtain each type of cement of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer C Comply with ACI 301 'Specification for Structural Concrete, including the following sections, unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1 'General Requirements. 2. 'Formwork and Formwork Accessories. 3. 'Reinforcement and Reinforcement Supports. 4 'Concrete Mixtures. 5 'Handling, Placing and Constructing. 6. 'Lightweight Concrete. D Comply with ACI 117 'Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE (LIMITED APPLICATIONS) 03301 -1 PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMWORK CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Furnish formwork and formwork accessories according to ACI 301 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 deformed. B. Plain -Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn. C Plain -Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185 fabricated from as -drawn steel wire into flat sheets. D Deformed -Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497 flat sheet. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type brand, and source throughout Project: 1 Portland Cement: ASTM C 150 Type I Supplement with the following: a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F B Normal- Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33 graded, 3/4 -inch nominal maximum aggregate size. C Water ASTM C 94/C 94M; potable. 2.4 ADMIXTURES A. Air Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260 2.5 RELATED MATERIALS A. Vapor Retarder Multi -ply reinforced polyethylene sheet, ASTM E 1745 Class C or polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397 not less than 10 mils thick. B Joint Filler Strips. ASTM D 1751 asphalt- saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self expanding cork. 2.6 CURING MATERIALS A. Moisture Retaining Cover ASTM C 171 polyethylene film or white burlap- polyethylene sheet. B Water Potable CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE (LIMITED APPLICATIONS) 03301 2 2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures. B Normal- Weight Concrete. Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 301 as follows: 1 Minimum Compressive Strength: 3500 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water Cementitious Materials Ratio' 0 50 3 Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus. 4 Air Content: Maintain within range permitted by ACI 301 Do not allow air content of floor slabs to receive troweled finishes to exceed 3 percent. 2.8 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and furnish batch ticket information. 1 When air temperature is above 90 deg F reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 EXECUTION 31 FORMWORK A. Design construct, erect, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301 3.2 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Install, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643 place sheets in position with longest dimension parallel with of pour 1 Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive or joint tape. 3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Comply with CRSI 'Manual of Standard Practice' for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. 1 Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete 3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Comply with ACI 301 for measuring, batching, mixing, transporting and placing concrete. B Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301 C Do not add water to concrete during delivery at Project site, or during placement. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE (LIMITED APPLICATIONS) 03301 3 3 5 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Smooth Formed Finish. As -cast concrete texture imparted by form facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch. 1 Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a covering material applied directly to concrete. CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION D Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. B Related Unformed Surfaces: At horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3 6 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES A. General. Comply with ACI 302.1 R for screeding, re- straightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on surface 1 Do not further disturb surfaces before starting finishing operations. C Trowel Finish: Apply a hard trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, or thin film- finish coating system. 3 7 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306 1 for cold- weather protection and with ACI 301 for hot weather protection during curing. B Evaporation Retarder Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 Ib /sq ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing C Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. D Curing Methods: Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by one or a combination of the following methods: 1 Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials. a. Water b. Continuous water -fog spray CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE (LIMITED APPLICATIONS) 03301 4 c. Absorptive cover water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12 -inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture retaining cover for curing concrete placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3 8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement according to requirements specified in this Article. B Tests: Perform according to ACI 301 3 9 REPAIRS CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1 Testing Frequency One composite sample shall be obtained for each day's pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cu. yd. but Tess than 25 cu. yd. plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof A. Remove and replace concrete that does not comply with requirements in this Section. END OF SECTION 03301 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE (LIMITED APPLICATIONS) 03301 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 03542 HYDRAULIC- CEMENT -BASED UNDERLAYMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. This Section includes hydraulic- cement -based underlayment for use in filling holes in concrete slabs -on- grade. B Related Sections include the following 1 Division 9 Sections for patching and leveling compounds applied with floor coverings. 13 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B Manufacturer Certificates. Signed by manufacturers of both underlayment and floor covering system certifying that products are compatible. C Qualification Data: For Installer 1 4 DELIVERY STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration from moisture or other detrimental effects. 1 5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature and humidity ventilation, and other conditions affecting underlayment performance. 1 Place hydraulic- cement -based underlayments only when ambient temperature and temperature of substrates are between 50 and 80 deg F HYDRAULIC- CEMENT -BASED UNDERLAYMENT 03542 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 HYDRAULIC- CEMENT -BASED UNDERLAYMENTS A. Underlayment: Hydraulic- cement- based, polymer modified, self leveling product that can be applied in minimum uniform thicknesses of 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1 Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following 2. Cement Binder ASTM C 150 Portland cement, or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined by ASTM C 219 3 Compressive Strength: Not Tess than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M B Aggregate: Well- graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch, or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer 1 Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for underlayment thickness required. C Water Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F D Primer Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate, conditions, and application indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 31 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance. 1 Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION a. Ardex; SD -F b. ChemRex; LevelPatch. c. Dependable Chemical Co Inc. Skimflow ES d. L &M Construction Chemicals Inc. Levelex. e. MAPEI Corporation, Planitop X. A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1 Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment. 2. Fill substrate voids. HYDRAULIC- CEMENT -BASED UNDERLAYMENT 03542 2 3 3 APPLICATION CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION B Concrete Substrates. Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer's written instructions, laitance glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond. A. General' Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written instructions. B Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. C Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes. D Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including areas that emit a 'hollow' sound when tapped. 3 4 PROTECTION A. Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling Toads for remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION 03542 HYDRAULIC- CEMENT -BASED UNDERLAYMENT 03542 3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 06105 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 Wood blocking and Hailers 2. Plywood backing panels. 13 DEFINITIONS A. Dimension Lumber Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but Tess than 5 inches nominal in least dimension. B Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1 NeLMA. Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association 2. NHLA. National Hardwood Lumber Association. 3 NLGA. National Lumber Grades Authority 4 SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA. Western Wood Products Association. 1 4 DELIVERY STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS GENERAL A. Lumber DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1 Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 1 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber 3 Provide dressed lumber S4S unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1 Blocking 2. Nailers. B For items of dimension lumber size, provide Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content of any species. C For blocking not used for attachment of other construction Utility Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. D For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. 2.3 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels. DOC PS 1 Exposure 1 C -D Plugged fire- retardant treated, in thickness indicated or if not indicated, not less than 1/2 -inch nominal thickness. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1 Where carpentry is exposed to weather in ground contact, pressure preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M B Nails, Brads, and Staples. ASTM F 1667 C Power Driven Fasteners. NES NER -272. D Wood Screws: ASME B18 6.1 E. Screws for Fastening to Cold- Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954 except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. F Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 G Expansion Anchors. Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the Toad imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the Toad imposed when installed in concrete as MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 2 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL PART 3 EXECUTION CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency 1 Material: Carbon -steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 Class Fe /Zn 5 2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594 Alloy Group 1 or 2. A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction B Framing Standard: Comply with the AF&PA 'Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated C Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1 Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o c. D Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. E Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1 NES NER -272 for power- driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304 9 1 'Fastening Schedule, in the ICC International Building Code F Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 3 END OF SECTION 06105 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 Plastic laminate cabinets. 2. Plastic laminate countertops. B Related Sections include the following: 1 Division 6 Section 'Rough Carpentry' for wood furring blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 13 DEFINITIONS A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 14 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated including high pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate, cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing materials and processes. B Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large -scale details, attachment devices, and other components 1 Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures and other items installed in architectural woodwork. C Samples for Verification. 1 Plastic laminates, 6 by 6 inches for each type, color pattern, and surface finish with 1 sample applied to core material and specified edge material applied to 1 edge 2. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 1 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION D Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer E. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates. AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. F Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator A. Fabricator Qualifications. Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI Quality Certification Program. B. Installer Qualifications. Certified participant in AWI Quality Certification Program. C Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards' for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1 Provide AWI Quality Certification Program labels and certificates indicating that woodwork including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified. D Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1 Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1 6 DELIVERY STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in 'Project Conditions' Article. 1 7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B Field Measurements. Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1 Locate concealed framing blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 2 18 COORDINATION CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. B Wood Products: Comply with the following 1 Plastic Laminate Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood) HPVA adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde. C High- Pressure Decorative Laminate. NEMA LD 3 grades as indicated or if required by woodwork quality standard 1 Manufacturer Subject to compliance with requirements, provid decorative laminates by one of the following: a. b c. Formica Corporation. Nevamar Company LLC Decorative Products Div Wlsonart International; Div of Premark International, Inc. HP -1 made with not indicated, as e high pressure 2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets. B Butt Hinges. 2 -3/4 -inch, 5- knuckle steel hinges made from 0 095 -inch thick metal, and as follows: 1 Semi concealed Hinges for Overlay Doors: BHMA A156.9 B01521 C Wire Pulls. Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long, 5/16 -inch in diameter D Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156 9 B03141 E. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156 9 B04013 metal. F Drawer Slides: BHMA A156 9 B05091 1 Heavy Duty (Grade 1 HD -100 and Grade 1 HD -200) Side mounted, full- over travel- extension type; zinc plated steel ball- bearing slides. 2. Box Drawer Slides. Grade 1 HD -100' for drawers not more than 6 inches high and 24 inches wide. 3 File Drawer Slides. Grade 1HD -200' for drawers more than 6 inches high or 24 inches wide INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 3 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 4 Pencil Drawer Slides: Grade 1 for drawers not more than 3 inches high and 24 wide. G Door Locks: BHMA A156 11 Best 5L Series Latch Bolt, 626 Finish. H. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156 11 Best 5L Series Latch Bolt, 626 Finish. I. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2 -inch OD black, molded plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. 1 Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 'SG series' by Doug Mockett Company Inc. unless noted otherwise. J Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1 Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base. K. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156 9 A. Furring Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips. Softwood or hardwood lumber kiln dried to Tess than 15 percent moisture content. B Anchors. Select material, type size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous -metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed -steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled -in -place anchors. C Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. D Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Resorcinol. 1 Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot -melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces. 2.4 FABRICATION GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade. Unless otherwise indicated, provide Custom -grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard. B Complete fabrication, including assembly finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1 Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION C Shop -cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 2.5 PLASTIC LAMINATE CABINETS A. Grade. Custom. B AWI Type of Cabinet Construction. Reveal overlay C Reveal Dimension 1/2 inch maximum. D Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces. High pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements: 1 Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops. Grade HGS 2. Vertical Surfaces. Grade HGS 3. Edges: Grade HGS E. Materials for Semi exposed Surfaces. 1 Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies. High pressure decorative laminate, Grade HGS a. Edges of Plastic- Laminate Shelves: High pressure decorative laminate, Grade HGS b For semi exposed backs of panels with exposed plastic laminate surfaces, provide surface of high pressure decorative laminate, Grade HGS 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: High pressure decorative laminate, Grade HGS 3 Drawer Bottoms: High pressure decorative laminate, Grade HGS F Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High pressure decorative laminate, Grade BKL. G. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1 As indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations, referenced in the Plastic Laminate and Solid Surface Color Schedule at the end of Part 3 H. Provide dust panels of 1/4 -inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers unless located directly under tops. 2.6 PLASTIC LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Grade: Custom. B High- Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS C Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 5 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1 As indicated by manufacturer's designations, referenced in the Plastic Laminate and Solid Surface Color Schedule at the end of Part 3 D Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. E. Core Material: Exterior -grade plywood. F Core Material at Sinks: Exterior -grade plywood. G. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate. PART 3 EXECUTION 31 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop fabricated work for completion and complete work as required including removal of packing and back priming 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade. Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved. B Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop. C Install woodwork level, plumb true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. D Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. E. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1 Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96 -inch sag, bow or other variation from a straight line. 2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 o.c. with No. 10 wafer -head screws sized for 1 -inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips or No 10 wafer -head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish. F Countertops. Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1 Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96 -inch sag, bow or other variation from a straight line. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 6 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING B Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 2. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 o c. and to walls with adhesive. 3 Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section Joint Sealants. A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible to eliminate functional and visual defects, where not possible to repair replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. C Clean woodwork on exposed and semi exposed surfaces. 3 4 PLASTIC LAMINATE AND SOLID SURFACE COLOR SCHEDULE A. Plastic Laminate PLAM Where this designation is indicated, provide plastic laminate complying with the following type /color /finish numbers: 1 PLAM -1 Nevamar #FS5001T Alpine Fissure Textured. 2. PLAM -2. Nevamar #S6001T Black' Textured END OF SECTION 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 7 SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SUMMARY 1 a. b c. d. B Related Sections include the following 1 3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. Other joints as indicated. 1 Division 8 Section Wood Windows' for glazing sealants. 2. Division 9 Section 'Gypsum Board' for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum board partitions to reduce sound transmission. 3 Division 9 Section Acoustical Panel Ceilings' for sealing edge moldings at perimeters of acoustical ceilings. A. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 14 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint sealant product indicated. B Samples for Initial Selection. Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view C Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required, with joint sealants in 1/2- inch -wide joints formed between two 6- inch -long matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. of cured sealants provide Samples strips of material D Product Certificates For each type of joint sealant and accessory signed by product manufacturer JOINT SEALANTS 07920 1 F Qualification Data. For Installer CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION E. SWRI Validation Certificate. For each elastomeric sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program. G. Pre construction Field Test Reports. Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on pre construction testing specified in 'Quality Assurance' Article. H. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer indicating the following: 1 Materials forming joint substrates and joint sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. Field Test Report Log: For each elastomeric sealant application. J Product Test Reports: Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed by a qualified testing agency indicating that sealants comply with requirements. 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications. Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project. B Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer C Pre construction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint sealant manufacturers for testing indicated below samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. 1 Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. 2. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 3 Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 4 For materials failing tests, obtain joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers. 5. Testing will not be required if joint sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data that are based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted D Product Testing: Obtain test results for 'Product Test Reports' Paragraph in 'Submittals' Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36- month period preceding the Notice to Proceed with the Work. 1 Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 2. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 and where applicable to other standard test methods. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 2 3 Test elastomeric joint sealants according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement, adhesion -in -peel, and indentation hardness. 4 Test other joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing standard specifications and test methods. 1 6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions. 1 When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3 Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4 Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products listed in other Part 2 articles 2.2 MATERIALS GENERAL CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Compatibility Provide joint sealants, backings and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience B VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59 Subpart D (EPA Method 24) 1 Sealants. 250 g /L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates. 250 g /L. 3 Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates. 775 g /L. C Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex Sealant (General Use Interior) Comply with ASTM C 834 Type P Grade NF B Available Products. 1 Bostik Findley* Chem -Calk 600 2. Pecora Corporation; AC -20+ 3 Schnee Morehead, Inc. SM 8200 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 4 Sonnebom, Division of ChemRex Inc. Sonolac. 5 Tremco; Tremflex 834 2.4 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints. Manufacturer's standard non -sag, paintable, non staining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following: 1 Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90 2. Available Products: a. Pecora Corporation; AC -20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b United States Gypsum Co SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2.5 PREFORMED TAPE SEALANTS A. Back Bedding Mastic Tape Sealant: Preformed, butyl -based elastomeric tape sealant with a solids content of 100 percent; non staining and non migrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below 1 AAMA 804 3 tape, where indicated 2. AAMA 806 3 tape, for applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 3 AAMA 807 3 tape, for applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. B Expanded Cellular Tape Sealant: Closed -cell, PVC foam tape sealant; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1 Type 1 for applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. Type 2, for applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. 2.6 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are non staining are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330 Type C (closed -cell material with a surface skin), O (open -cell material) B (bi -cellular material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: C Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056 nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F Provide products with low compression set and of size JOINT SEALANTS 07920 4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. D Bond Breaker Tape. Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self adhesive tape where applicable. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated as determined from pre- construction joint sealant- substrate tests and field tests. B Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C Masking Tape: Non staining nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint sealant performance. B Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints. Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements. 1 Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer) old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air Porous joint substrates include the following a. Concrete. b. Masonry 3 Remove Iaitance and form release agents from concrete. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 5 E. F 4 Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following a. b. c. CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION Metal Glass. Porcelain enamel. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer based on pre construction joint sealant- substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C Masking Tape Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply B Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. D Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability 1 Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before and replace them with dry materials. Install bond breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are sealants and backs of joints. sealant application not used between Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1 Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3 Produce uniform, cross sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability G Tooling of Non -sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 6 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1 Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated. a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. H Installation of Preformed Tapes: Install according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field- Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows. 1 Extent of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as follows. a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate. b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor per elevation. 2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab Method B Exposed Surface Finish Hand Pull Tab Method C Field Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Flap or Method D Water Immersion in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 as appropriate for type of joint sealant application indicated. a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately do this by extending cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. 3 Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration complying with specified requirements. Record results in a field- adhesion -test log. 4 Inspect tested joints and report on the following a. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled -out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field- adhesion hand -pull test criteria. b Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. c. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements 5 Record test results in a field- adhesion -test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions. 6 Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant. B Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other JOINT SEALANTS 07920 7 3 5 CLEANING 3 6 PROTECTION END OF SECTION 07920 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 8 111. MI IMF IIIIII 111111 111111 OW MI NM In INK um so gm as NO. 100A 100B 103A 105A 105B 107A 108A 109A 109B 110A 111A 112A 113A 114A 115A 116A 117A 118A 120A 121A 122A 123A 1 Mat'I Type C 1 WD 1 STN 1 3' -0' 1 7' -0' B 1 WD 1 STN 1 3' -0' 1 7' -0' B 1 WD 1 STN 1 3' -0' 1 7' -0' A A A A A A A A C A B RE -USE EXISTING DOOR RE -USE EXISTING DOOR RE -USE EXISTING DOOR WD WD WD WD WD WD WD WD WD WD WD STN STN STN STN STN STN STN STN STN STN STN RE -USE EXISTING DOOR A l WD 1 STN 1 3' -0" 1 7' -0" ABBREVIATIONS ALUM ALUMINUM FACP FACTORY PAINT HM HOLLOW METAL P -X PAINT COLOR STN STAINED AT FACTORY WD WOOD DOOR Fin. 1 DIMENSIONS Width 1 Height 3' -0' 3' -0' 3' -0' 3' -0' 3' -0' 3' -0' 2' -6' 3' -0' 3' -0' 3' -0' 3' -0' KEY NOTES 1 See Drawing Sheets A9 04 FOR DOOR and FRAME TYPES 2. Power- Assisted Door 3. Not Used 4 Existing door to be re- painted 5. Not Used DOOR SCHEDULE CLALLAM COUNTY E 3RD STREET BUILDING 7' -0' 7' -0' 7' -0' 7' -0' 7' -0' 7' -0' 7' -0' 7-0' 7' -0' 7' -0' 7' -0' Type 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 FRAME Mat'I Fin. DETAILS Head Jamb (L) Jamb (R) EXISTING DOOR TO REMAIN HM P 2 1/A9 04 2/A9 04 2/A9 04 HM P 2 1/A9 04 2/A9.04 2/A9 04 HM P -2 1/A9 04 2/A9 04 2/A9 04 EXISTING DOOR TO REMAIN HM P -2 1/A9.04 2/A9 04 2/A9 04 HM P -2 1/A9 04 2/A9 04 2/A9 04 HM P -2 1/A9.04 2/A9 04 2/A9 04 HM P -2 1/A9 04 2/A9 04 2/A9 04 HM P 2 1/A9 04 2/A9 04 2/A9 04 HM P 2 1/A9 04 2/A9 04 2/A9 04 HM P 2 1/A9 04 2/A9 04 2/A9 04 HM P 2 1/A9 04 2/A9 04 2/A9.04 HM P -2 1/A9.04 2/A9 04 2/A9 04 HM P -2 1/A9 04 2/A9 04 2/A9.04 HM P -2 1/A9 04 2/A9 04 2/A9 04 HM P 2 1/A9 04 2/A9 04 2/A9 04 HM P 2 1/A9 04 2/A9.04 2/A9.04 HM P 2 1/A9 04 2/A9 04 2/A9.04 EXISTING DOOR TO REMAIN HM P -2 1/A9.04 2/A9 04 2/A9 04 HM P 2 1/A9 04 2/A9.04 2/A9 04 Sill U.L. GLASS RT'G. TYPE TG TG TG 2 2 1 1 1 1, 4 1, 4 1, 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1, 4 1 1 GENERAL NOTES 1 Contractor to coordinate door and frame cut -outs with hardware specified. Verify all opening sizes prior to frame installation. 2. See Specification Section 08800 for Glass Types noted. 3. See Specification Section 09900 for paint color designations. 4 See Specification Section 08710 for Door Hardware Schedule. 5. Door Frame Details are noted as looking from inside the room. KEY NOTES DOOR SCHEDULE 08000 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 08111 STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 Standard hollow -metal steel frames. B Related Sections include the following: 1 Division 8 Sections for door hardware for flush wood doors. 2. Division 9 painting Sections for field painting standard steel frames. 13 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings. 14 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, and finishes for each type of steel frame specified. B Shop Drawings: In addition to requirements below provide a schedule of standard steel frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. 1 Elevations of each frame design. 2. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles. 3 Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware 4 Details of each different wall opening condition. 5 Details of anchorages, accessories, joints and connections. 6 Details of glazing frames and stops showing glazing. C Coordination Drawings. Drawings of each opening, including door and frame, drawn to scale and coordinating door hardware. Show elevations of each door design type, showing dimensions and locations of door hardware. D Samples for Verification. For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of not less than 3 by 5 inches. E. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 1 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications. An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer B Testing Agency Qualifications. An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. C Source Limitations. Obtain standard steel frames through one source from a single manufacturer 1 6 DELIVERY STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver frames palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project -site storage. Do not use non vented plastic. 1 Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory- finished frames. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C Store frames under cover at Project site. Place units in a vertical position with heads up spaced by blocking, on minimum 4- inch -high wood blocking Avoid using non vented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber 1 7 PROJECT CONDITIONS CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Field Measurements. Verify openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1 Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating standard steel frames without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions. STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 18 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for standard steel frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 1 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1 Amweld Building Products, LLC 2. CURRIES Company an ASSA ABLOY Group Company 3 Deansteel Manufacturing, Inc. 1 t 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2.2 MATERIALS CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 4 Fleming Door Products Ltd an ASSA ABLOY Group Company 5 Kewanee Corporation (The) 6 Mesker Door Inc. 7 Pioneer Industries, Inc. 8 Republic Builders Products Company 9 Steelcraft; an Ingersoll -Rand Company A. Cold Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M Commercial Steel (CS), Type B suitable for exposed applications. B Hot Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS) Type B free of scale pitting or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C Metallic- Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS) Type B with minimum A40zinc- iron -alloy (galvannealed) coating designation. D Supports and Anchors: After fabricating, galvanize units to be built into exterior walls or in locations noted according to ASTM A 153/A 153M Class B E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Provide items to be built into exterior walls, hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. F Powder Actuated Fasteners in Concrete. Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching standard steel door frames of type indicated. G Grout: Comply with ASTM C 476 with a slump of 4 inches for standard steel door frames noted to be fully grouted as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M H. Bituminous Coating. Cold- applied asphalt mastic, SSPC -Paint 12, compounded for 15 -mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type non corrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.3 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES A. General: Comply with ANSI A250 8 and with details indicated for type and profile. B Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated to comply with exterior frame requirements. 1 Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and welded face corners and seamless face joints. 2. Frames for Wood Doors. 0 053 inch -thick steel sheet. 3. Frames for Borrowed Lights: 0 053 inch -thick steel sheet. C Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcement plates from same material as frames to comply with the following minimum sizes: 1 Hinges: Minimum 0 123 -inch thick by 1 1/2 inches wide by 6 longer than hinge secured by not less than 6 spot welds. 2. Lock Face and Closers. Minimum 0 067 inch thick. STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 3. All Other Surface Mounted Hardware. Minimum 0 067 inch thick. D Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from electrolytic zinc coated or metallic- coated steel sheet. E. Jamb Anchors. 1 Stud -Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0 042 inch thick. F Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not Tess than 0 042 inch thick, and as follows. 1 Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip -type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. G. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot rolled steel sheet. 2.4 STOPS AND MOLDINGS A. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with standard steel frames, minimum 5/8 inch high unless otherwise indicated. B. Hospital Stops. On interior door frames, terminate stops 6 inches above finish floor with a 45- degree angle cut, and close open end of stop with steel sheet closure. Cover opening in extension of frame with welded -steel filler plate, with welds ground smooth and flush with frame. 1 Provide terminated stops unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate standard steel frames to be rigid and free of defects, warp or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B Standard Steel Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1 Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously grind, fill dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. 2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval -head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. 3 Floor Anchors. Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor 4 Jamb Anchors. Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Stud -Wall Type. Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o c. and as follows. 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches in height. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches in height. STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 4 2.6 STEEL FINISHES CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches in height. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof more than 96 in height. 5) Two anchors per head for frames, more than 42 inches wide and mounted in metal -stud partitions. 5 Door Silencers. Except on weather stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Provide plastic plugs to keep holes clear during construction. a. Single -Door Frames. Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. C Hardware Preparation. Factory prepare standard steel doors and frames to receive templated mortised hardware, include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 8 Section 'Door Hardware. 1 Reinforce doors and frames to receive non templated mortised and surface mounted door hardware. 2. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250 6 and ANSI /DHI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or if not indicated, according to ANSI A250 8 A. General: Comply with NAAMM's 'Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products' for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1 Finish standard steel door and frames after assembly B Metallic- Coated Steel Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with non petroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it. Clean welds mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTM A 780 1 Galvanizing Repair Paint: High- zinc dust content paint for re- galvanizing welds in steel complying with SSPC -Paint 20 C Steel Surface Preparation. Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC -SP 1 'Solvent Cleaning' remove dirt, oil, grease or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, comply with SSPC -SP 3, 'Power Tool Cleaning, or SSPC -SP 6 /NACE No 3 'Commercial Blast Cleaning. D Factory Priming for Field- Painted Finish: Apply shop primer specified below immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Apply a smooth coat of even consistency to provide a uniform dry film thickness of not Tess than 0.7 mils 1 Shop Primer Manufacturer's standard, fast curing lead- and chromate -free primer complying with ANSI A250 10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field applied finish paint system indicated; and providing a sound foundation for field- applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 5 2.7 GROUT CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Portland Cement: Slump to allow grouting of frames prior to installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of standard steel doors and frames. 1 For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded -in shipping spreaders installed at factory B Prior to installation and with installation spreaders in place, adjust and securely brace standard steel door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances. 1 Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. 2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. 3 Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face comers of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 4 Plumbness. Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor C Drill and tap frames to receive non templated mortised and surface mounted door hardware. 3 3 INSTALLATION A. General Provide frames of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated. Install standard steel frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place, comply with Drawings and manufacturers written instructions. B Standard Steel Frames: Install standard steel frames for doors and other openings, of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI 105. 1 Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. b. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 6 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION c. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured d. Check plumb squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. e. Apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with mortar or grout. 2. Floor Anchors. Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor and secure with post installed expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with powder- actuated fasteners instead of post installed expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3 Metal -Stud Partitions. Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and partition with grout; grout frames prior to erection with a Portland cement -based grout product (Use 1 part masonry cement and 2 1/2 to 4 parts sand if not using a factory pre -mixed product) gypsum -based grouts are not allowed 4 Installation Tolerances Adjust standard steel door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances. 3 4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments. Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including standard steel doors or frames that are warped, bowed or otherwise unacceptable. B Clean grout and other bonding material off standard steel doors and frames immediately after installation. C Prime -Coat Touchup Immediately after erection sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat, and apply touchup of compatible, air -drying primer D Galvannealed Surfaces. Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 08111 a. Squareness. Plus or minus 1/16 inch measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness. Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 7 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 Solid -core doors with wood veneer faces. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. B Related Sections include the following: 1 Division 8 Section 'Standard Steel Doors and Frames for hollow metal doorframes. 2. Division 8 Section 'Glazing' for glass view panels in flush wood doors 13 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. Include factory- finishing specifications. B Shop Drawings. Indicate location, size, and hand of each door elevation of each kind of door construction details not covered in Product Data, location and extent of hardware blocking, and other pertinent data. 1 Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3 Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 4 Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. C Samples for Initial Selection. Color charts consisting of actual materials in small sections for the following: 1 Faces of Factory- Finished Doors. Show the full range of colors available for stained finishes. D Samples for Verification: 1 Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in the finished work. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 -1 2. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and edgings representing typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid lumber required. Finish sample with same materials proposed for factory- finished doors. 3. Frames for Tight openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required. 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer B Quality Standard: Comply with the AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated 1 Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels or an AWI letter of licensing for Project indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified. 1 5 DELIVERY STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting. C Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1 6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations. Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period. 17 WARRANTY CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Special Warranty Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer Installer and Contractor in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship, have warped (bow cup or twist) more than 1/4 inchin a 42- by-84- inch section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0 01 inch in a 3 -inch span. 1 Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial Completion. a. Solid -Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 1 Flush Wood Doors. CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Available Manufacturers. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Algoma Hardwoods Inc. b Chappell Door Co. c. Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division. d. GRAHAM Manufacturing Corp e. Haley Brothers, Inc. f Ideal Wood Products, Inc. g. Lambton Doors. h. Marshfield Door Systems. i. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc. j. Oshkosh Architectural Door Co k. Vancouver Door Company Inc. I. VT Industries Inc. 2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL A. Adhesives. Do not use adhesives containing urea formaldehyde. B Doors for Transparent Finish. 1 Grade. Premium, with Grade A faces. 2. Species and Cut: White ash, plain sliced. 3 Match between Veneer Leaves. Book match. 4 Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Center balance match. 5. Pair and Set Match Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by mullions. 6 Room Match. Match door faces within each separate room or area of building Corridor door faces do not need to match where they are separated by 10 feet or more. 7 Stiles: Same species as faces or a compatible species. 2.3 SOLID -CORE DOORS A. Particleboard Cores: Comply with the following requirements. 1 Particleboard: ANSI A208.1 Grade LD -1 a. Use particleboard made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde resin. 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard -core doors as follows: a. 5 -inch top -rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers. b. 5 -inch bottom -rail blocking in exterior doors and doors indicated to have kick, mop, or armor plates. c. 5 -inch mid -rail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 3 B Interior Veneer -Faced Doors: 1 Core. Particleboard. 2. Construction: Five plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. 2.4 LIGHT FRAMES A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: 1 Wood Species. Same species as door faces. 2. Profile. Manufacturer's standard shape. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors in sizes indicated for Project -site fitting. B Factory fit doors to suit frame -opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated: 1 Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire -rated doors. C Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI WDHS -3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115 -W series standards, and hardware templates. 1 Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. D Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kind(s) of door(s) required. 1 Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2.6 FACTORY FINISHING A. General Comply with AWI's Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated' for factory finishing. B Finish doors at factory C Transparent Finish: CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1 Grade: Premium. 2. Finish. Manufacturer's standard finish with performance comparable to AWI System TR- 6 catalyzed polyurethane. 3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4 Effect: Semi -filled finish. 5. Sheen. Semi gloss. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 4 PART 3 EXECUTION 31 EXAMINATION END OF SECTION 08211 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Examine doors and installed doorframes before hanging doors. 1 Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section 'Door Hardware. B Manufacturer's Written Instructions. Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1 Install fire -rated doors in corresponding fire -rated frames according to NFPA 80 C Job -Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. 1 Clearances. Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold. 2. Bevel non -fire -rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. D Factory- Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3 3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely B Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 5 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 08462 SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOOR OPERATORS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes exterior and interior swinging, automatic entrance door assemblies. B Related Sections include the following: 1 Division 16 Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for automatic entrance doors. 13 DEFINITIONS A. Activation Device. Device that, when actuated, sends an electrical signal to the door operator to open the door B Safety Device: Device that prevents a door from opening or closing. 1 4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Opening -Force Requirements. 1 Power Operated Egress Doors: Not more than 50 Ibf required to manually set door in motion if power fails, and not more than 15 Ibf required to open door to minimum required width. 2. Low Energy Power Operated Egress Doors: Not more than 30 Ibf required to manually set door in motion if power fails and not more than 15 Ibf required to open door to minimum required width. 3 Accessible Interior Doors. Not more than 5 Ibf B Closing -Force Requirements. 1 Power Operated Swinging Doors: Not more than 40 Ibf required to, prevent door from closing 2. Low Energy Power Operated Doors: Not more than 15 Ibf required to, prevent door from closing 15 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for automatic entrance door operators. SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOOR OPERATORS 08462 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION B Shop Drawings. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware mounting heights, and attachments to other work. 1 Wiring Diagrams. Power signal, and control wiring. C Product Certificates. For each type of emergency -exit automatic entrance door signed by product manufacturer D Product Test Reports. Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for automatic entrance door assemblies. E. Maintenance Data. For door operators and control systems to include in maintenance manuals. F Warranty Special warranty specified in this Section. 1 6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project and who employs a certified inspector 1 Maintenance Proximity Not more than two hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site. B Manufacturer Qualifications. A qualified manufacturer with company certificate issued by AAADM C Certified Inspector Certified by AAADM D Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. E. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic entrance door assemblies through one source from a single manufacturer F Product Options: Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of automatic entrance door assemblies and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section 'Product Requirements. 1 Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review G. Power Operated Door Standard: BHMA A156.10 H. Low Energy Power Operated Door Standard: BHMA A156 19 I. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 Article 100 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. J Emergency -Exit Door Requirements. Comply with IBC code requirements for automatic entrance doors serving as a required means of egress. SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOOR OPERATORS 08462 2 1 7 PROJECT CONDITIONS 18 COORDINATION 19 WARRANTY 1 10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Field Measurements. Verify openings to receive automatic entrance door assemblies by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1 Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating automatic entrance door assemblies without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions. A. Templates. Obtain and distribute, to the parties involved, templates for operators and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing automatic entrance doors. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing automatic entrance doors to comply with indicated requirements. B Electrical System Roughing -in. Coordinate layout and installation of automatic entrance door assemblies with connections to power supplies and security access control system A. Special Finish Warranty Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering. 1 Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. A. Initial Maintenance Service. Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full maintenance by skilled employees of automatic entrance door assembly Installer Include quarterly preventive maintenance repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper automatic entrance door assembly operation at rated speed and capacity Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. 1 Engage a certified inspector to perform safety inspection after each adjustment or repair and at end of maintenance period. Submit completed inspection form to Owner 2. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working hours. 3 Include 24- hour per -day 7- day per -week emergency callback service. A. Available Manufacturers. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOOR OPERATORS 08462 3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1 Besam Automated Entrance Systems, Inc. 2. DORMA Automatics, Div of DORMA Group North America. 3 Dor- O- Matic, Inc. an Ingersoll -Rand Company 4 Horton Automatics, Div of Overhead Door Corporation. 5 Nabco Entrances Inc. 6 Stanley Access Technologies; Div of The Stanley Works. 2.2 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOOR ASSEMBLIES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard automatic entrance door operators, activation and safety devices, and accessories required for a complete installation with existing doors and framing. B Swinging Automatic Entrance Door 1 Door Operator Surface mounted, drop head, low energy power operated. 2. Activation Device: Push Pull to activate. 3 Safety Devices: Two photoelectric beams mounted in guide rails to detect pedestrians in presence zone and to prevent door from closing. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high- strength aluminum with non- staining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. B Fasteners and Accessories. Manufacturer's standard corrosion resistant, non staining, non bleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 2.4 DOOR OPERATORS A. General: Provide door operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and movement; for condition of exposure, and for long -term, maintenance -free operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated. 1 Door Operator Performance: Provide door operators that will open and close doors and maintain them in fully closed position when subjected to Project's design wind pressures. B Electromechanical Operators: Self- contained overhead unit powered by fractional- horsepower permanent- magnet dc motor with closing speed controlled mechanically by gear train and dynamically by braking action of electric motor with solid -state microprocessor controller UL 325 and with manual operation including spring closing with power off 1 Operation: Power opening and spring closing. 2. Features: a. Adjustable opening and closing speeds. b. Adjustable back check and latching. c. Adjustable hold -open time between 0 and 30 seconds. d. Obstruction re- cycle. e. Automatic door re -open if stopped while closing. f On- off /hold -open switch to control electric power to operator SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOOR OPERATORS 08462 4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 3 Mounting: Surface mounted, drop head 2.5 ACTIVATION AND SAFETY DEVICES A. Photoelectric Beams Pulsed infrared sender receiver assembly for recessed mounting. Beams shall not be active when doors are fully closed. B Key Switch: Recess mounted, door control switch with key controlled actuator enclosed in 2- by-4 -inch junction box. Provide faceplate engraved with letters indicating switch functions. 1 Face Plate Material Painted metal 2. Functions. Two -way automatic, hold open, one -way exit, off full open, and partial open. 3 Mounting: As indicated on Drawings. C Electrical Interlocks: Unless units are equipped with self protecting devices or circuits, provide electrical interlocks to prevent activation of operator when door is locked latched, or bolted. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Guide Rails. Fabricated from anodized aluminum bars or tubing minimum 30 inches high projecting from face of door jamb for distance not less than width of widest door leaf with filler panel; BHMA A156 10 1 Filler Panel: Clear polycarbonate plastic. 2. Provide intermediate guide rail suitable for supporting photoelectric beams. 3 Mounting: Jamb and floor 2.7 FABRICATION A. General: Factory- fabricate automatic entrance door assembly components to designs, sizes, and thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards. B Door Operators: Factory fabricated and installed on headers, including adjusting and testing. C Activation and Safety Devices: Factory install devices on doors and headers. 1 Install photoelectric beams in sides of guide rails, with dimension above finished floor not less than 24 inches. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. General: Comply with the NAAMM 'Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products' for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C High- Performance Organic Finish (3 -Coat Fluoropolymer) AA- C12C40R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals, Chemical Finish. conversion coatings; Organic Coating manufacturer's standard 3 -coat, thermo -cured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer fluoropolymer color coat, and clear fluoropolymer topcoat, with both color coat SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOOR OPERATORS 08462 5 and clear topcoat containing not Tess than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight) Prepare pre- treat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with AAMA 2605 and with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, header support, and other conditions affecting performance of automatic entrance doors. 1 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure non movement joints. Seal joints watertight. 1 Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. B Door Operators: Connect door operators to electrical power distribution system as specified in Division 16 Sections. C Activation and Safety Devices. Adjust devices to provide detection field and functions indicated. D Guide Rails: Install rails according to BHMA A156 10 including Appendix A and manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated. E. Signage. Provide caution signs on each automatic entrance door visible from both sides of door Mount caution signs and signs indicated below with centerline 58 inches above finished floor 1 Swinging Doors: Provide arrow sign visible to approach side of each door and do -not- enter sign visible on side of each door that swings toward pedestrians traveling in the wrong direction. 3 3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspector Engage Installer's certified inspector to test and inspect automatic entrance doors and prepare test and inspection reports. B Testing Services. Certified inspector shall test and inspect each automatic entrance door to determine compliance of installed assemblies with applicable BHMA standards. 1 Inspection Report: Certified inspector shall submit report in writing to the Architect and Contractor within 24 hours after inspection. SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOOR OPERATORS 08462 6 3 4 ADJUSTING CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION C Repair or remove work where test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. D Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. A. Adjust door operators, controls, and hardware for smooth and safe operation for weather -tight closure, and complying with requirements in BHMA A156 19 for low- energy power- operated doors. B Lubricate operating hardware and other moving parts. C Readjust door operators and controls after repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to 3 days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles) Lubricate hardware, operating equipment, and other moving parts. D Occupancy Adjustment: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on -site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 3 5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean glass and aluminum surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Repair damaged finish to match original finish 3 6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a certified inspector to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic entrance doors and door operators. Refer to Division 1 Section 'Closeout Procedures. END OF SECTION 08462 SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOOR OPERATORS 08462 7 SECTION 08550 WOOD WINDOWS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2. SUMMARY A. This Section includes fixed wood framed windows of the following type. 1 Primed 13 DEFINITIONS A. Performance class designations according to AAMANVDMA 101/1 S.2/NAFS 1 AW Architectural B Performance grade number according to AAMA/WDMA 101 /I.S.2 /NAFS 1 Design pressure number in pounds force per square foot used to determine the structural test pressure and water test pressure. C Structural Test Pressure For uniform Toad structural test, is equivalent to 150 percent of the design pressure. D Minimum Test Size. Smallest size permitted for performance class (gateway test size) Products must be tested at minimum test size or at a size larger than minimum test size to comply with requirements for performance class. 1 4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide wood windows capable of complying with performance requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified, and that are of test size indicated below 1 Size. Verify for installation in existing door opening. 15 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating instructions for each type of wood window indicated. WOOD WINDOWS 08550 -1 B Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other work, operational clearances, installation details, and the following: 1 Mullion details, including reinforcement and stiffeners. 2. Joinery details. 3. Expansion provisions. 4 Flashing and drainage details. 5 Weather- stripping details. 6 Thermal -break details. 7 Glazing details. 8 Window cleaning provisions. C Product Test Reports. Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed within the last four years by a qualified testing agency for each type, class, grade, and size of wood window Test results based on use of downsized test units will not be accepted. D Maintenance Data: For operable window sash, operating hardware, weather stripping and finishes to include in maintenance manuals. E. Warranty Special warranty specified in this Section. 1 6 QUALITY ASSURANCE CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Manufacturer Qualifications. A manufacturer capable of fabricating wood windows that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion in lists and by labels, test reports, and calculations. B Source Limitations: Obtain wood windows through one source from a single manufacturer C Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of wood windows and are based on the specific system indicated Refer to Division 1 Section 'Product Requirements. Do not modify size and dimensional requirements. 1 Do not modify intended aesthetic effects as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review D Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/1 S.2 /NAFS 'North American Fenestration Standard Voluntary Performance Specification for Windows, Skylights and Glass Doors, for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1 Provide AAMA- certified wood windows with an attached label E. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and with GANA 'Glazing Manual' unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1 7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements. Verify wood window openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. WOOD WINDOWS 08550 2 18 WARRANTY 2. Warranty Period' PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 1 Wood Windows: 2.2 MATERIALS CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1 Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating wood windows without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions. A. Special Warranty Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace wood windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1 Failures include but are not limited to the following' a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or condensation. c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. d. Deterioration of wood, metals, vinyl, other materials, and finishes beyond normal weathering. e. Failure of insulating glass. a. Window Three years from date of Substantial Completion. b Glazing. 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Marvin Windows Stationary Window or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Pella Corporation b Weather Shield Mfg Inc. A. Wood: Clear ponderosa pine or another suitable fine- grained lumber kiln dried to a moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication; free of visible finger joints, blue stain, knots, pitch pockets, and surface checks larger than 1/32 inch deep by 2 inches wide, water repellent preservative treated. B Wood Frame Extensions. Material and finish to match frame members. C Fasteners. Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be non corrosive and compatible with wood window members, cladding, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components. WOOD WINDOWS 08550 3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1 Exposed Fasteners: Unless unavoidable for applying hardware do not use exposed fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate. D Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. E. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, or nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel /chrome plated steel complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions, provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. F Compression -Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping designed for permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action and for complete concealment when wood window is closed 1 Weather- Stripping Material: Manufacturer's standard system and materials complying with AAMAWDMA 101/1 S.2/NAFS G Replaceable Weather Seals: Comply with AAMA 701/702. 2.3 WINDOW A. Window Type: Stationary to match existing. B AAMA/WDMA Performance Requirements: Provide wood windows of performance indicated that comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/1 S.2 /NAFS unless more stringent performance requirements are indicated. 1 Performance Class and Grade. AW 45 C Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF) Provide wood windows tested for thermal performance according to AAMA 1503 showing a CRF of 52. D Thermal Transmittance: Provide wood windows with a whole- window U- factor maximum indicated at 15 -mph exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperatures when tested according to ASTM E 1423 1 U- Factor 0 35 Btu /sq. ft. x h x deg F or less. E. Solar Heat -Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Provide wood windows with a whole- window SHGC maximum of 0 40 determined according to NFRC 200 procedures. F Air Infiltration. Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according to AAMA/WDMA 101 /I.S.2/NAFS Air Infiltration Test. 1 Maximum Rate: 0 3 cfm /sq. ft. of area at an inward test pressure of 1 57 lbf/sq. ft. G. Water Resistance: No water leakage as defined in AAMA/WDMA referenced test methods at a water test pressure equaling that indicated, when tested according to AAMA/WDMA 101 /I.S.2/NAFS Water Resistance Test. WOOD WINDOWS 08550 4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1 Test Pressure. 15 percent of positive design pressure, but not less than 2.86 lbf/sq. ft. or more than 15 lbf/sq. ft. H. Life -Cycle Testing Test according to AAMA 910 and comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/1 S.2 /NAFS I Operating Force and Auxiliary (Durability) Tests. Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/1 S.2 /NAFS for operating window types indicated. 2.4 GLAZING A. Glass: Clear insulating -glass units, with low -E coating pyrolytic on second surface or sputtered on second or third surface complying with Division 8 Section 'Glazing. B Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory- glazing system that produces weather -tight seal. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate wood windows in sizes required. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows. B Fabricate wood windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing. C Factory machine windows for openings and for hardware that is not surface applied. D Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design loads of window units. E. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Except for light sizes in excess of 100 united inches glaze wood windows in the factory where practical and possible for applications indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section 'Glazing' and with AAMA/WDMA 101/1 S.2/NAFS F Glazing Stops: Provide nailed or snap -on glazing stops coordinated with glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator frames. G Complete fabrication, assembly finishing, hardware application and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Allow for scribing, trimming, and fitting at Project site. 2.6 WOOD FINISHES A. Factory- Finished Primed Windows. Provide manufacturer's standard factory prime finish complying with WDMA T M. 12. Apply finish to exposed interior and exterior wood surfaces. WOOD WINDOWS 08550 5 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 3.2 INSTALLATION CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions and levelness of sill. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built -in components to ensure a coordinated, weather -tight window installation. 1 Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar sand, and other construction debris. 2. Wood Frame Walls: Dry clean, sound well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3 inches of opening. 3 Metal Surfaces: Dry clean, free of grease, oil dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag; without sharp edges or offsets at joints. 4 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. B. Install windows level, plumb square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. C Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weather -tight construction. D Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. 3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. B Clean factory- glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturers written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. C Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. D Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturers written recommendations. WOOD WINDOWS 08550 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 08710 -01 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE NOTES 1 Locks Latches: Manufacturer Best L1 Classroom Lock: 9K- 2- 3/4- 7- R -15 -S3 -626 L2 Storeroom Lock: 9K- 2- 3/4- 7- D -15 -S3 -626 L3 Entry Office Lock: 9K- 2- 3/4- 7- AB- 15- S3-626 L4 Privacy Lock: 9K- 2- 3/4 -7 -L 15- S3-626 L5 Passage Lock: 9K- 2- 3/4- 7- N- 15- S3-626 L6 Deadbolt: Not Used L7 Cylinder Not Used 2. Hinges: Manufacturer McKinney H1 HT2714 -4.5 X 4.5 (1.5 pair) Manufacturer Markar H2 HG306 -626 3. Exit Devices: Manufacturer ED -1 Not Used 4. Closers: Manufacturer Norton C1 7705MST -689 5. Stop Holders: Manufacturer Trimco Glynn- Johnson HS1 Wall Bumper 1270CX (Trimco) HS2 Overhead Stop GJ450S series (Glynn-Johnson) 6. Weatherstripping: Manufacturer Pemko WS1 Not Used WS2 S88BL (At head and jamb) WS3 192A (Threshold) WS4 411 ARL (automatic door bottom) WS5 S773 (sound gasket) 7 Push Pulls: Manufacturer Hager P1 122L (Push pull set) 8. Miscellaneous: Manufacturer As Noted M1 Kick Plate 194S -US32D (Hager) M2 Not Used M3 Silencers 1229A (Trimco) M4 Door Safety Guard LCN 700 (push side) Alum. M5 Door Safety Guard LCN 750 (pull side) Alum. DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION DOOR LOCK I HINGE I EXIT DEVICE I CLOSER HO DER I PUSH PULL STRIPPING I NO. MISC. COMMENTS 100A L3 1008 103A 105A 105B 107A 108A 109A 109B 110A 111A 112A 113A 114A 115A 116A 117A L3 H1 L3 1 H1 L3 H1 L3 L2 H1 L2 H1 L2 H1 L2 H1 L1 H1 L1 H1 L1 H1 L1 H1 L1 H1 L5 H1 L1 H1 L3 H1 C1 C1 C1 HS1 HS2 HS2 HS2 HS2 HS2 HS2 HS2 HS2 HS2 HS1 HS2 HS2 WS1 WS1 M1, M3 M3 M3 M3 M3 M3 M3 M3, M4, M5 M3, M4, M5 M3, M4, M5 M3, M4, M5 M3, M4, M5 M3, M4, M5 M3, M4, M5 Automatic entrance door operator specified under Section 08462 Kick Plate push side only DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE 08710 -01 1 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION STOP WEATHER NO. DOOR LOCK HINGE I EXIT DEVICE I CLOSER HOLDER PUSH I PULL STRIPPING MISC. COMMENTS 118A L4 H1 I I C1 WS4, WS5 M1 M M5' M4 I Kick Plate on push side only 120A L2 H1 1 1 C1 HS1 1 1 M3 1 121A L3 H1 1 1 C1 HS1 1 1 M3 1 122A L5 H1 1 1 HS2 1 1 M3 1 123A L4 H1 I C1 WS4 WS5 I M1 M3 M4, I Kick Plate on push side only DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE 08710 -01 2 SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 12 SUMMARY CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. This Section includes the following: 1 Commercial door hardware for the following: a. Swinging doors. B Related Sections include the following: 1 Division 7 Section Joint Sealants' for sealants provided as part of door hardware installation. 2. Division 8 Section 'Standard Steel Doors and Frames' 3 Division 8 Section 'Flush Wood Doors' 4 Division 8 Section 'Swinging Automatic Entrance Door Operators' for powered entrance door hardware. C Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following. Coordinating, purchasing delivering, and scheduling remain requirements of this Section. 1 Hardware specified in other Sections 2. Permanent cores to be installed by Owner 13 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B Samples for Initial Selection. For each finish, color and texture required for each type of door hardware indicated C Samples for Verification: Submit minimum 2 -by-4 -inch plate Samples of each type of finish required, except primed finish. D Qualification Data. For Installer and Architectural Hardware Consultant. E. Product Test Reports. Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency for locks, latches and closers. F Maintenance Data. For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. Include final hardware and keying schedule DOOR HARDWARE 08710 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION G. Warranty Special warranty specified in this Section. H. Other Action Submittals: 1 Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the supervision of Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final door hardware sets with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. a. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the Contract Documents. b Content: Include the following information. c. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final door hardware sets at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the door hardware sets must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the door hardware sets. 2. Keying Schedule. Prepared by or under the supervision of Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations. 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1) Identification number location, hand fire rating, and material of each door and frame. 2) Type style, function, size, quantity and finish of each door hardware item. Include description and function of each lockset and exit device. 3) Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening including name and manufacturer 4) Fastenings and other pertinent information. 5) Location, of each door hardware set, cross referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. 6) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. 7) Mounting locations for door hardware. 8) Door and frame sizes and materials. 9) List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame. A. Installer Qualifications. An employer of workers trained and approved by lock manufacturer 1 Installer's responsibilities include supplying and installing door hardware and providing a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. 2. Installer shall have warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity 3 Scheduling Responsibility Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. B Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by DHI as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 2 C Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. D Keying Conference. Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section 'Project Management and Coordination. In addition to Owner Contractor and Architect, conference participants shall also include Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to the following: 1 Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion. 2. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. 3 Requirements for key control system. 4 Address for delivery of keys. 1 5 DELIVERY STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock -up for door hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final door hardware sets, and include basic installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package. C Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service, address will be provided by Owner following issuance of Notice to Proceed. 16 COORDINATION A. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B Existing Openings. Where new hardware components are scheduled for application to existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide for proper operation. 17 WARRANTY CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Special Warranty Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1 Failures include but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. b. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, except as follows. a. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1 8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. B Maintenance Service. Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door hardware operation. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original products. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3. 1 Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity item, size, finish or color indicated and named manufacturers' products or products equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products and products complying with BHMA standard referenced 2. Sequence of Operation. Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated. B Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3 Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 1 Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. 2. References to BHMA Standards. Provide products complying with these standards and requirements for description, quality and function. C In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection. 1 Available Manufacturers. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 HINGES GENERAL A. Quantity Provide the following unless otherwise indicated: 1 Two Hinges. For doors with heights up to 60 inches. 2. Three Hinges. For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 4 2.3 HINGES CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 3 Four Hinges. For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. 4 For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges plus 1 hinge for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches. B Template Requirements: Except for hinges to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template produced units. C Fasteners: Comply with the following: 1 Machine Screws. For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes. 2. Wood Screws. For wood doors. 3 Threaded -to- the -Head Wood Screws. For fire -rated wood doors. 4 Screws. Phillips flat head Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges. A. Butts and Hinges. BHMA A156 1 Listed under Category A in the BHMA 'Certified Product Directory B Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA A156 7 C Available Manufacturers: 1 Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH) 2. Bommer Industries, Inc. (BI) 3 Cal -Royal Products, Inc. (CRP) 4 Hager Companies (HAG) 5 Lawrence Brothers, Inc. (LB) 6 McKinney Products Company* an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MCK) 7 PBB Inc. (PBB) 8 Stanley Commercial Hardware, Div of The Stanley Works (STH) 2.4 CONTINUOUS HINGES A. Standard: BHMA A156.26 Grade 1 1 Listed under Category N in the BHMA 'Certified Product Directory B General: Minimum 0 120 -inch- thick, hinge leaves with minimum overall width of 4 inches, fabricated to full height of door and frame and to template screw locations, with components finished after milling and drilling are complete. C Continuous, Barrel -Type Hinges. Hinge with knuckles formed around a pin that extends entire length of hinge. 1 Base Metal for Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel. 2. Available Manufacturers. a. Hager Companies (HAG). b. Markar Architectural Products, Inc. a Subsidiary of Adams Rite Manufacturing Co (MP) c. McKinney Products Company* an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MCK) d. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div of The Stanley Works (STH) DOOR HARDWARE 08710 5 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION e. Zero International (ZRO). 2.5 LOCKS AND LATCHES GENERAL A. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with the U S Architectural Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)' accessibility requirements. 1 Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf B Latches and Locks for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101 Latches shall not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key tool, or special knowledge for operation. C Lock Throw Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors, and as follows: 1 Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2 -inch latch bolt throw 2. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4 -inch latch bolt throw 3 Deadbolts. Minimum 1 -inch bolt throw D Backset: 2 -3/4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. E. Strikes. Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch bolt or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, and as follows: 1 Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches. BHMA A156 13 2.6 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in door hardware sets comply with the following: 1 Mortise Locks. BHMA A156 13. B Mortise Locks. Stamped steel case with steel or brass parts, BHMA A156 13 Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated; Series 1000 Listed under Category F in the BHMA 'Certified Product Directory 1 Available Manufacturers. a. Best Access Systems; Div of The Stanley Works (BAS) b. Owner accepted equal. 2.7 LOCK CYLINDERS A. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156 5 Grade 1 unless Grade 1A is indicated. B Cylinders. Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver and complying with the following DOOR HARDWARE 08710 6 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1 Number of Pins: Seven. 2. Mortise Type. Threaded cylinders with rings and straight- or clover -type cam. 3 Rim Type. Cylinders with back plate flat -type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring. C Permanent Cores. Manufacturer's standard finish face to match lockset; complying with the following: 1 Interchangeable Cores. Core insert, removable by use of a special key usable with other manufacturers' cylinders. D Construction Keying Comply with the following. 1 Construction Cores. Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys. 1 a. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Owner E. Manufacturer Same manufacturer as for locks and latches. F Available Manufacturers: 1 Best Access Systems, Div of The Stanley Works (BAS) 2. Owner accepted equal 2.8 KEYING A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28 Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference, and as follows: 1 Existing System: Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system. 1 B Keys Nickel silver 1 Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation. a. Notation. Information to be furnished by Owner 1 2. Quantity In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following: a. Cylinder Change Keys. Three b. Master Keys. Five. c. Grand Master Keys: Five. d. Great -Grand Master Keys: Five. 2.9 CLOSERS A. Accessibility Requirements. Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devices are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U S Architectural Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)' DOOR HARDWARE 08710 7 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1 Comply with the following maximum opening -force requirements: 1 a. Interior Non Fire -Rated Hinged Doors. 5 Ibf applied perpendicular to door 1 B Door Closers for Means of 'Egress Doors. Comply with NFPA 101 Door closers shall not require more than 30 Ibf to set door in motion and not more than 15 Ibf to open door to minimum 1 required width. C Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door exposure to weather and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. D Surface Closers. BHMA A156 4 Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated. Listed under Category C 1 in the BHMA 'Certified Product Directory Provide type of arm required for closer to be located on non-public side of door unless otherwise indicated. 1 Available Manufacturers. 1 a. Arrow USA, an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ARW) b Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware, an ASSA ABLOY Group company (CR) c. DORMA Architectural Hardware, Member of The DORMA Group North America (DAH) d. Dor- O- Matic; an Ingersoll -Rand Company (DOR) e. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll -Rand Company (LCN) f Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (NDC) g. Rixson Specialty Door Controls, an ASSA ABLOY Group company (RIX) h. SARGENT Manufacturing Company an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT) i. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware, an ASSA ABLOY Group company (YAL). 2.10 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS A. Size. 1 -1/2 inches Tess than door width on push side and 1/2 inch less than door width on pull 1 side, by height specified in door hardware sets. B Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard machine or self- tapping screws. C Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156 6 beveled top and 2 sides; fabricated from material indicated in door hardware sets. 1 Available Manufacturers: 1 a. American Floor Products Co. Inc. (AFP) b Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH). c. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated (BM) d. Don -Jo Mfg. Inc. (DJO). e. Hager Companies (HAG). f Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA) g. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems, Inc. Div of InPro Corporation (IPC) h. IVES Hardware, an Ingersoll -Rand Company (IVS) i. Pawling Corporation (PAW) j. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM) k. Trimco (TBM) 1 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 8 1 2.11 STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Stops and Bumpers. BHMA A156 16 Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated 1 Provide wall stops for doors unless another type of stop is scheduled or indicated. Where wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders. B Combination Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA A156 8 Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated. C Silencers for Metal Door Frames. BHMA A156 16 Grade 1 neoprene or rubber minimum diameter 1/2 inch, fabricated for drilled -in application to frame. D Available Manufacturers: CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1 Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg. Inc. (ABH) 2. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH) 3 Burns Manufacturing Incorporated (BM) 4 Cal -Royal Products Inc. (CRP) 5 Don -Jo Mfg. Inc. (DJO) 6 Door Controls International (DCI) 7 DORMA Architectural Hardware Member of The DORMA Group North America (DAH) 8 Dor- O- Matic; an Ingersoll -Rand Company (DOR) 9 Glynn- Johnson an Ingersoll -Rand Company (GJ) 10 Hager Companies (HAG). 11 HES Inc. an ASSA ABLOY Group company (HES) 12. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA) 13 IVES Hardware an Ingersoll -Rand Company (IVS). 14 Rixson Specialty Door Controls an ASSA ABLOY Group company (RIX) 15 Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM) 16 SARGENT Manufacturing Company' an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT) 17 Stanley Commercial Hardware' Div of The Stanley Works (STH) 18 Trimco (TBM) 2.12 DOOR GASKETING A. Standard: BHMA A156.22. Listed under Category J in the BHMA 'Certified Product Directory B General Provide continuous weather -strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide non corrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. 1 Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. 2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. 3 Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door forming seal with threshold when door is closed. C Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0 50 cfm per foot of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283 D Sound -Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency for sound ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1408 E. Replaceable Seal Strips. Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer DOOR HARDWARE 08710 9 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION F Gasketing Materials: ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 7011702. G. Available Manufacturers: 1 Hager Companies (HAG) 2. M -D Building Products, Inc. (MD) 3 National Guard Products (NGP). 4 Pemko Manufacturing Co (PEM). 5 Reese Enterprises (RE) 6 Sealeze, a unit of Jason Incorporated (SEL) 7 Zero International (ZRO) 2.13 MISCELLANEOUS DOOR HARDWARE A. Auxiliary Hardware: BHMA A156 16 Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated. 1 Available Manufacturers. 2.14 FABRICATION a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH) b. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. (CRP) c. Don -Jo Mfg Inc. (DJO) d. Hager Companies (HAG) e. Lawrence Brothers, Inc. (LB) f Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM) g. Stanley Commercial Hardware, Div of The Stanley Works (STH) h. Trimco (TBM) A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire -rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect. 1 Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only B Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated using manufacturer's standard metal alloy composition, temper and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18 Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard. C Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat -head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1 Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2. Steel Machine or Wood Screws. For the following fire -rated applications DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -10 PART 3 EXECUTION 31 EXAMINATION 3.2 PREPARATION 3 3 INSTALLATION CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION a. Mortise hinges to doors. b Strike plates to frames. c. Closers to doors and frames. 3 Steel Through Bolts. Not allowed. 4 Spacers or Sex Bolts. For through bolting of hollow -metal doors. 5 Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2, 'Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors. 2.15 FINISHES A. Standard: BHMA A156 18 as indicated in door hardware sets. B Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable temporary protective covering before shipping. C Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one -half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction and other conditions affecting performance B Examine roughing -in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation C Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. A. Steel Frames. Comply with DHI A115 Series. 1 Surface- Applied Door Hardware. Drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI A250 6 B Wood Doors. Comply with DHI A115 -W Series. A. Mounting Heights. Mount door hardware units at heights indicated as follows unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 11 1 Standard Steel Frames: The DHI 'Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors ar Frames. 2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS 3, 'Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors. CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION B. Install each door hardware item; to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes havejbeen completed on substrates involved. 1 Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. 3 4 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1 Door Closers: Unless oth rwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch measured to the leading edge of the door B Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust, including adjusting operating forces, each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3 6 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Refer to the attached Door Hardware Schedule. END OF SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 12 OM OM NE MN M- MO MI i MI NB MN MN N MI ABBREVIATIONS GENERAL NOTES AFF ABOVE FINISH FLOOR LIN -X LINOLEUM TYPE COLOR 1 SEE DRAWINGS FOR SPECIFIC FINISH PATTERNS LOCATIONS AM ATHLETIC MATS P -X PAINT COLOR KEY NOTES EM ENTRY MAT PLYWD PLYWOOD 1 PROVIDE LATEX -BASED EPDXY PAINT ON ALL SURFACES TO BE PAINTED EXP STRUCT EXPOSED TO STRUCTURE RB -X 4' HIGH RESILIENT BASE U.N.O. 2. FRP FROM TOP OF BASE TO 54' AFF FRP FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC SAT SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE 3. INSTALL 3/4' EXTERIOR GRADE PLYWD ON ALL WALLS FROM 4' AFF TO 96' AFF PANELS SEAL SEALED CONCRETE 4. ALL LINOLEUM FLOORCOVERING SEAMS TO BE HEAT WELDED 5. AM FROM FINISH FLOOR TO 72' AFF 6. INSTALL FRP ON NORTH, EAST AND SOUTH WALLS IN JANITOR'S AREA ONLY ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION CEILING WALLS ROOM ROOM NAME .FLOOR BASE CEILING HEIGHT AFF NORTH 1 EAST 1 SOUTH 1 WEST NOTES EM P -3 SAT 8' 100 PUBLIC WAITING LIN -1A, B, C RB -1 P -1 7' -6' P -1 P -1 P 1 SAT 8' -0' 101 RECEPTION LIN -1A RB -1 P -1 7' -6' P 1 P -1 P -1 P 1 P -3 102 OPEN OFFICE LIN -1A RB -1 SAT 8' -0' P 1 P -1 P 1 P -1 P -3 103 OFFICE LIN -1A, B, C RB -1 SAT 8' -0' P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 104 NOT USED P-3 105 CONFERENCE LIN -1A, B, C RB -1 SAT 8' -0' P -1 P -1 P -1 P 1 P -3 106 AISLE LIN -1A, B, C RB -1 SAT 8' -0' P 1 P 1 P -1 P 1 P -3 P 1 P -1 P 1 P 1 107 HAZMAT LIN -2A RB -1 SAT 8' -0' FRP FRP FRP FRP 1, 2, 4 P -3 P1 P1 P1 108 STORAGE JANITOR LIN -2A RB -1 SAT 8' -0' FRP FRP FRP P 1 1, 2, 4, 6 EXP 109 TELECOM LIN -1A RB -1 STRUCT P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 3 P -3 110 EXAM LIN -2A RB -1 SAT 8' -0' P 1 P -1 P 1 P 1 1, 4 INTERIOR FINISH SCHEDULE 09000 1 ABBREVIATIONS GENERAL NOTES AFF ABOVE FINISH FLOOR LIN -X LINOLEUM TYPE COLOR 1 SEE DRAWINGS FOR SPECIFIC FINISH PATTERNS LOCATIONS AM ATHLETIC MATS P -X PAINT 1 COLOR KEY NOTES EM ENTRY MAT PLYWD PLYWOOD 1 PROVIDE LATEX -BASED EPDXY PAINT ON ALL SURFACES TO BE PAINTED EXP STRUCT EXPOSED TO STRUCTURE RB -X 4' HIGH RESILIENT BASE U.N.O 2. FRP FROM TOP OF BASE TO 54' AFF FRP FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC SAT SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE 3. INSTALL 3/4' EXTERIOR GRADE PLYWD ON ALL WALLS FROM 4' AFF TO 96' AFF PANELS SEAL SEALED CONCRETE 4. ALL LINOLEUM FLOORCOVERING SEAMS TO BE HEAT WELDED 5. AM FROM FINISH FLOOR TO 72' AFF 6. INSTALL FRP ON NORTH, EAST AND SOUTH WALLS IN JANITOR'S AREA ONLY ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION CEILING WALLS ROOM ROOM NAME FLOOR BASE CEILING HEIGHT AFF NORTH 1 EAST 1 SOUTH 1 WEST NOTES P -3 111 EXAM LIN -2A RB -1 SAT 8' -0' P -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 1, 4 P -3 112 WIC LIN -2A RB -1 SAT 8' -0' P 1 P -1 P 1 P -1 1, 4 P -3 113 WIC LIN -2A RB -1 SAT 8' -0' P 1 P -1 P 1 P -1 1, 4 P -3 114 INTERVIEW LIN -1A, B, C RB -1 SAT 8' -0' P -1 P 1 P 1 P 1 115 STORAGE LIN -1A RB -1 SAT 8' -0' P -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 P -3 116 INTERVIEW LIN -1A, B, C RB -1 SAT 8' -0' P 1 P -1 P -1 P -1 P -3 117 OFFICE LIN -1A, B, C RB -1 SAT 8' -0' P -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 P -3 118 PATIENT TOILET LIN -2A RB -1 SAT 8' -0' P -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 1, 4 P -1 P 1 P -1 119 PLAY AREA AM SAT 8' -0' AM AM -AM 5 120 FILE LIN -1A RB -1 SAT 8' -0' P -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 121 HALLWAY LIN -1A, B, C RB -1 SAT 8' -0' P -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 INTERIOR FINISH SCHEDULE 09000 2 mos EN no im me m Ns ow so EN or we gm Nu um ow ow ow ABBREVIATIONS GENERAL NOTES AFF ABOVE FINISH FLOOR LIN -X LINOLEUM TYPE COLOR 1 SEE DRAWINGS FOR SPECIFIC FINISH PATTERNS LOCATIONS AM ATHLETIC MATS P -X PAINT COLOR KEY NOTES EM ENTRY MAT PLYWD PLYWOOD 1 PROVIDE LATEX -BASED EPDXY PAINT ON ALL SURFACES TO BE PAINTED EXP STRUCT EXPOSED TO STRUCTURE RB -X 4' HIGH RESILIENT BASE U.N.O 2. FRP FROM TOP OF BASE TO 54' AFF FRP FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC SAT SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE 3. INSTALL 3/4' EXTERIOR GRADE PLYWD ON ALL WALLS FROM 4' AFF TO 96' AFF PANELS SEAL SEALED CONCRETE 4 ALL LINOLEUM FLOORCOVERING SEAMS TO BE HEAT WELDED 5. AM FROM FINISH FLOOR TO 72' AFF 6. INSTALL FRP ON NORTH, EAST AND SOUTH WALLS IN JANITOR'S AREA ONLY ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION CEILING 1 WALLS ROOM ROOM NAME FLOOR BASE CEILING HEIGHT AFF 1 NORTH 1 EAST 1 SOUTH 1 WEST NOTES EXP 122 CLOSET LIN -1A RB -1 STRUCT P -1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P -3 123 STAFF TOILET LIN -2A RB -1 SAT 8' -0' P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 1, 4 P -3 124 AISLE LIN -1A, B, C RB -1 SAT 8' -0' P 1 P -1 P 1 P -1 INTERIOR FINISH SCHEDULE 09000 3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 09111 NON LOAD BEARING STEEL FRAMING PART1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes non -load- bearing steel framing members for the following applications: 1 Interior framing systems (e.g. supports for partition walls, framed soffits furring, etc.) 2. Interior suspension systems (e.g supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.) 13 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. STC -Rated Assemblies. For STC -rated assemblies provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 NON LOAD BEARING STEEL FRAMING GENERAL A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1 Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M G40 hot -dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Tie Wire. ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating soft temper 0 0625 inch diameter wire, or double strand of 0 0475 inch diameter wire. B Wire Hangers ASTM A 641/A 641M Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper 0 162 -inch diameter C Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated. NON LOAD BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 1 A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION D Carrying Channels: Cold- rolled, commercial -steel sheet with a base -metal thickness of 0 0538 inch and minimum 1/2- inch -wide flanges. 1 Depth: 2 -1/2 inches. E. Furring Channels (Furring Members) 1 Cold Rolled Channels: 0 0538 -inch bare -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2- inch -wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep. 2. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645 a. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness. 0 0312 inch. b. Depth: 1 5/8 inches. 3. Hat Shaped Rigid Furring Channels. ASTM C 645 7/8 inch deep a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0 0312 inch. F Grid Suspension System for Ceilings. ASTM C 645 direct -hung system composed of main beams and cross furring members that interlock. 1 Available Products. Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Drywall Grid Systems. b Chicago Metallic Corporation, 640 -C Drywall Furring System. c. USG Corporation, Drywall Suspension System. 2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES 1 Minimum Base -Metal Thickness. 0 0312 inch. 2. Depth. As indicated on Drawings. B Slip -Type Head Joints. Where indicated, provide one of the following: 1 Single Long -Leg Runner System. ASTM C 645 top runner with 2- inch -deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inchesof the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. 2. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above, in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Available Products. Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD Series. 2) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT) C Flat Strap and Backing Plate. Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. NON LOAD BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 2 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1 Minimum Base -Metal Thickness. 0 0312 inch. D Cold Rolled Channel Bridging: 0 0538 -inch bare -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2- inch -wide flanges. 1 Depth. 1 1/2 inches. 2. Clip Angle. Not less than 1 1/2 by 1 1/2- inches, 0 068 inch thick, galvanized steel. E. Hat Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645 1 Minimum Base Metal Thickness. 0 0312 inch. 2. Depth. 1 -1/2 inches. F Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2- inch -deep steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1 Configuration. Asymmetrical. G. Cold- Rolled Furring Channels: 0 0538 -inch bare -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2- inch -wide flanges. 1 Depth. 3/4 inch. 2. Furring Brackets. Adjustable, corrugated -edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare steel thickness of 0 0312 inch. 3 Tie Wire. ASTM A 641/A 641 M Class 1 zinc coating soft temper 0 0625 inch diameter wire, or double strand of 0 0475 inch diameter wire. H. Z- Shaped Furring: With slotted or non slotted web face flange of 1 1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum bare -metal thickness of 0 0179 inch and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1 Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size corrosion resistance holding power and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates B Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls. Provide one of the following. 1 Foam Gasket: Adhesive backed closed -cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size. PART 3 EXECUTION 31 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow -metal frames, cast -in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. NON LOAD BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 3 3.2 PREPARATION CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength 3.3 INSTALLATION GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754 except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated. 1 Gypsum Board Assemblies Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. 3 4 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components indicated. B Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C Suspend hangers from building structure as follows. 1 Install hangers plumb and free from contact with objects within ceiling space that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counter- splaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards or L/360 which ever is more restrictive. 3 Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4 Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5 Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. NON LOAD BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 4 1 D Grid Suspension Systems. Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. 3 5 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. 8 Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. 1 Space studs as follows. a. Single -Layer Application. 16 inches o c. unless otherwise indicated. C Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1 Slip -Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames, install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. b Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2 -inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3 Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4 Sound -Rated Partitions. Install framing to comply with sound -rated assembly indicated or if not indicated assume a minimum STC rating of 40 wherever acoustical insulation is installed in partitions. D Direct Furring: 1 Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder- driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o c. E. Z- Furring Members: NON LOAD BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 5 END OF SECTION 09111 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1 Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. 2. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner on adjacent wall surface, screw -attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit. F Installation Tolerance. Install each framing member so fastening surfaces, vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. NON LOAD BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD PART1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following 1 Interior gypsum board. B Related Sections include the following: 1 Division 6 Section 'Rough Carpentry for wood framing and furring that supports gypsum board. 2. Division 9 Section 'Non- Load Bearing Steel Framing' for non structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board. 3. Division 9 painting Sections for primers applied to gypsum board surfaces. 13 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For the following products. 1 Trim Accessories: Full -size Sample in 12- inch -long length for each trim accessory indicated. 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. STC -Rated Assemblies. For STC -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency 1 5 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather condensation direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging. GYPSUM BOARD 09250 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1 6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1 A. Environmental Limitations. Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturers' written recommendations whichever are more stringent. II B Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned C Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1 Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELS GENERAL A. Size. Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. 1 Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B Type X. a. American Gypsum Co b BPB America Inc. c. G -P Gypsum. d. Lafarge North America Inc. e. National Gypsum Company f PABCO Gypsum. g. Temple. h. USG Corporation 1 Thickness. 5/8 inch, as required by fire- resistance -rated assembly indicated on Drawings. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. C Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular -type gypsum board. 1 Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. D Moisture- and Mold- Resistant Type. With moisture- and mold- resistant core and surfaces. Install at toilet shower areas on surfaces where ceramic tile is not specified GYPSUM BOARD 09250 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 l 1 1 1 A 1 Core. 5/8 inch, Type X. 2. Long Edges. Tapered. 2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1 Material: Galvanized or aluminum- coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b L -Bead: L- shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. U -Bead J- shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. d. Expansion (control) joint. 2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B Joint Tape. 1 Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper C Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1 Pre filling: At open joints, and damaged surface areas, use setting -type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying -type, all- purpose compound. 3 Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying -type, all- purpose compound. 4 Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting -type, sandable topping compound 5 Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting -type, sandable topping compound. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General. Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B Steel Drill Screws. ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated 1 Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0 033 to 0 112 inch thick. C Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. D Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section Joint Sealants. E. Thermal Insulation. As specified in Division 7 Section 'Building Insulation. GYPSUM BOARD 09250 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 31 EXAMINATION CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow -metal frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840 B Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member C Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally 1 Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. G Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non -load- bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2- inch -wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing with floating intemal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide dimension lumber including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members, or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. J STC -Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with GYPSUM BOARD 09250 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 w CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION manufacturers written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. 3 3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations. 1 Type X. Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Ceiling Type. Ceiling and soffit surfaces. B Single -Layer Application 1 On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall /partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions /walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire- resistance -rated assembly and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. 3 On Z- furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 4 Fastening Methods. Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. 3 4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturers written instructions. 8 Control Joints. Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. C Interior Trim: Install in the following locations. 1 Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. L -Bead: Use where indicated. 3 U -Bead. Use where indicated. 3 5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required, to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. C Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: GYPSUM BOARD 09250 5 3 6 PROTECTION CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1 Level 1 Concealed areas and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile and where indicated on Drawings. 3 Level 3: Where indicated on Drawings. 4 Level 4 At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections. 5 Level 5 At all toilet areas and exam rooms not scheduled to receive ceramic tile. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections. A. Protect installed products from damage from weather condensation direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period B Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1 Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD 09250 6 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. 13 DEFINITIONS A. AC Articulation Class. B CAC Ceiling Attenuation Class. C LR. Light Reflectance coefficient. D NRC Noise Reduction Coefficient. 14 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B Coordination Drawings. Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other based on input from installers of the items involved. 1 Ceiling suspension system members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. a. Furnish layouts for cast -in -place anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices whose installation is specified in other Sections. 3 Ceiling- mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. 4 Minimum Drawing Scale. 1/8 inch 1 foot. C Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory- applied color finishes. D Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below 1 Acoustical Panel: Set of 6- inch square Samples of each type color pattern, and texture 2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12- inch -long Samples of each type finish and color ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION E. Qualification Data: For testing agency F Field quality control test reports. G. Product Test Reports. Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for each acoustical panel ceiling. H. Research /Evaluation Reports. For each acoustical panel ceiling and components and anchor and fastener type. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory or an NVLAP- accredited laboratory with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated NVLAP accredited laboratories must document accreditation, based on a 'Certificate of Accreditation' and a 'Scope of Accreditation' listing the test methods specified. B Source Limitations: 1 Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer C Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension system through one source from a single manufacturer D Fire Test Response Characteristics. Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements: 1 Surface- Burning Characteristics. Provide acoustical panels with the following surface burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 a. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or Tess. E. Seismic Standard: Provide acoustical panel ceilings designed and installed to withstand the effects of earthquake motions according to the following: 1 Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with ASTM E 580 F Mockups. Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1 Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1 6 DELIVERY STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION will be protected against damage from moisture humidity temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination and other causes. B Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way 1 7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof wet work in spaces is complete and dry work above ceilings is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 18 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including Tight fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire- suppression system, and partition assemblies. 1 9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1 Acoustical Ceiling Panels. Full -size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension System Components. Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS GENERAL A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns acoustical ratings, and Tight reflectances unless otherwise indicated. 1 Mounting Method for Measuring NRC Type E-400 plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15 -3/4 inches away from test surface per ASTM E 795 B Broad Spectrum Anti microbial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard anti microbial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew and gram positive and gram- negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING AC1 A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong Dune Tegular Fine Texture #1776 or a comparable product by one of the following: 1 BPB USA. 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 3 Ecophon CertainTeed, Inc. 4 Tectum Inc. 5. USG Interiors, Inc. B Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows: 1 Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish, Form 2, water felted. 2. Pattern: CE (perforated, small holes and lightly textured) C Color White. D LR. Not Tess than 0 80 E. NRC Not less than 0 50 F CAC Not less than 35 G Edge /Joint Detail: Beveled, kerfed and rabbeted long edges and square, butt-on short edges. H. Thickness. 5/8 inch. Modular Size: 24 by 48 inches. J Anti microbial Treatment: Broad spectrum fungicide and bactericide based. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING AC2 A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong "Dune Second Look" Scored Tegular Fine Texture, #2711 or a comparable product by one of the following: 1 BPB USA. 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 3. Ecophon CertainTeed, Inc. 4 Tectum Inc. 5. USG Interiors, Inc. B Classification: Provide fire- resistance -rated panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattem as follows. 1 Type and Form: Type III mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted. 2. Pattern: CE (perforated, small holes and lightly textured) K (surface scored) C Color White. D LR. Not Tess than 0 80 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION E. NRC• Not less than 0 50 F CAC* Not Tess than 35 G Edge /Joint Detail: Beveled kerfed and rabbeted long edges and square, butt -on short edges. H. Thickness: 3/4 inch Modular Size. 24 by 48 inches. J Anti microbial Treatment: Broad spectrum fungicide and bactericide based. 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS GENERAL A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct -hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635 B Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with The NAAMM 'Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products' for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory- applied finish for type of system indicated. C Attachment Devices. Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635 Table 1 'Direct Hung, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. D Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties. Provide wires complying with the following requirements. 1 Zinc Coated, Carbon -Steel Wire. ASTM A 641/A 641 M Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper 2. Stainless -Steel Wire. ASTM A 580/A 580M Type 304 nonmagnetic. 3 Nickel- Copper -Alloy Wire. ASTM B 164 nickel- copper -alloy UNS No N04400 4 Size. Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design Toad (ASTM C 635 Table 1 'Direct Hung will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0 106 -inch- diameter wire. E. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust inhibitive paint. F Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to accommodate seismic forces. G Seismic Struts. Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic forces. H. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical panels in- place. 2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING AC1 AND AC2 A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong 15/16 inch 'Prelude or a comparable product by one of the following 1 BPB USA. 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 5 3. Ecophon CertainTeed, Inc. 4 USG Interiors, Inc. CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION B Wide -Face Capped, Double -Web, Fire -Rated Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold rolled steel sheet, pre painted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating designation, with pre finished 15/16- inch -wide metal caps on flanges. 1 Structural Classification: Intermediate -duty system. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners. Override (stepped) or butt-edge type. 3. Face Design. Flat, flush. 4 Cap Material: Steel cold rolled sheet. 5 Cap Finish. Painted white. 2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong "Prelude or a comparable product by one of the following: 1 BPB USA. 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 3 Fry Reglet Corporation. 4 Gordon, Inc. 5 USG Interiors, Inc. B Roll- Formed Sheet -Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements, formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 1 Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners, unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1 Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: a. Pecora Corporation; AC -20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. c. Architect accepted equal. 2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: a. OSI Sealants, Inc. Pro Series SC -175 Rubber Base Sound Sealant. b. Pecora Corporation, BA -98. c. Tremco Inc. Tremco Acoustical Sealant. d. Architect accepted equal. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 6 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, .areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. 1 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling Avoid using less- than half -width panels at borders and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3 3 INSTALLATION CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. General Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and The CISCA 'Ceiling Systems Handbook. B Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows. 1 Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions, offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counter splaying or other equally effective means 3 Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4 Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5 Do not support ceilings directly from ceiling deck. 6 When framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 7 Space hangers not more than 48 inches o c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member 8 Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling Toads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. C Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 7 3 4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION D Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1 Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets; on moldings and trim. E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another Remove and replace dented bent, or kinked members. F Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1 Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows. a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. 2. For square -edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings. 3 For reveal -edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 4 Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation, match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer 5 Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire resistance -rated assembly A. Testing Agency Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B Tests and Inspections. Testing and inspecting of completed installations of acoustical panel ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners shall take place in successive stages, in areas of extent and using methods as follows. Do not proceed with installations of acoustical panel ceiling hangers for the next area until test results for previously completed installations of acoustical panel ceiling hangers show compliance with requirements. 1 Extent of Each Test Area: When installation of ceiling suspension systems on each floor has reached 20 percent completion but no panels have been installed. a. Within each test area, testing agency will select 1 of every 10 power- actuated fasteners and post installed anchors used to attach hangers to concrete and will test them for of tension; it will also select one of every 2 post installed anchors used to attach bracing wires to concrete and will test them for 440 Ibf of tension. b. When testing discovers fasteners and anchors that do not comply with requirements, testing agency will test those anchors not previously tested until 20 pass consecutively and then will resume initial testing frequency ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 8 3 5 CLEANING END OF SECTION 09511 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION C Remove and replace acoustical panel ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified above. A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 9 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes. 1 Resilient base. 2. Resilient molding accessories. B Related Sections: 1 Division 9 Section 'Resilient Sports -Floor Coverings' for resilient floor coverings for use in athletic activity or support areas. 2. Division 9 Section 'Linoleum Floor Coverings' for linoleum floor coverings. 13 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. For each type of product indicated. B Samples for Verification. For each type of product indicated in manufacturer's standard -size Samples but not less than 6 inches long, of each resilient product color texture, and pattern required C Product Schedule. For resilient products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Test Response Characteristics. As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency 1 Critical Radiant Flux Classification. Class I not less than 0 45 W /sq. cm. 1 5 DELIVERY STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 1 1 6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. A. Resilient Base: CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer but not Tess than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods. B Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F C Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed 1 7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1 Furnish not Tess than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof of each type, color pattern, and size of resilient product installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT BASE RB -1 1 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Burke Mercer Flooring Products, Division of Burke Industries, Inc. b. Flexco, Inc. c. Roppe Corporation, USA. B Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861 1 Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber vulcanized thermoset) 2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous) 3 Style: Cove (base with toe) C Minimum Thickness: 0 125 inch. D Height: 4 inches or 6 inches as indicated on Drawings and Room Finish Schedule. E. Lengths. Coils in manufacturer's standard length. F Outside Corners. Job formed. RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 2 G Inside Corners. Job formed. H. Finish Manufacturer's standard low luster finish. I. Colors and Patterns. As indicated by manufacturer's designations in Resilient Wall Base and Accessories Color Schedule at the end of Part 3 2.2 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY A. Resilient Molding Accessory* a. Burke Mercer Flooring Products, Division of Burke Industries, Inc. b. Flexco, Inc. c. Roppe Corporation, USA. CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: B Description Transition strips C Material Rubber D Profile and Dimensions. As required. E. Colors and Patterns. As indicated by manufacturer's designations in Resilient Wall Base and Accessories Color Schedule at the end of Part 3 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex modified, Portland cement based or blended hydraulic- cement -based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B Adhesives. Water- resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. 1 Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59 Subpart D (EPA Method 24) a. Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g /L. PART 3 EXECUTION 31 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 3 B Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. C Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate C Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1 Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. D Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material G. Job Formed Comers. 1 Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. 3 4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 4 END OF SECTION 09653 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION B Resilient Molding Accessories Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece Install reducer strips at edges of resilient floor covering that would otherwise be exposed 3 5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturers written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products. B Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation. 1 Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly 3 Damp -mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion. 3 6 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES COLOR SCHEDULE A. RB -1 Flexco Flextones, 01 Black Dahlia B Rubber Transition Strips. Flexco Flextones, 01 'Black Dahlia RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 5 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 09654 LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS PART1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes linoleum floor tile and sheet floor coverings. B Related Sections include the following 1 Division 9 Section 'Resilient Wall Base and Accessories' for resilient wall base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with linoleum floor coverings. 13 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. For each type of product indicated. B Shop Drawings: 1 Show locations of seams, edges, columns doorways, enclosing partitions, built -in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts. 2. Show details of special patterns. C Samples for Verification. In manufacturer's standard size but not less than 6 -by -9 inch sections of each color and pattern of linoleum floor covering required. 1 Heat Welding Bead: Include manufacturer's standard -size Samples but not less than 9 inches long of each color required D Heat Welded Seam Samples. For each flooring product and welding bead color and pattern combination required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 6 -by -9 inch Sample applied to rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project. E. Qualification Data: For Installer F Maintenance Data: For linoleum floor coverings to include in maintenance manuals. 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project that are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation indicated. 1 Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project that are trained or certified by floor covering manufacturer for installation techniques required. LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS 09654 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION B. Fire Test Response Characteristics. Provide products identical to those tested for fire- exposure behavior per test method indicated by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C Mockups: Install mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. 1 Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. D Moisture testing: Employ a certified testing agency to provide moisture testing and monitoring of existing concrete slabs -on -grade prior to installation of new flooring materials as follows: 1 Floor /Substrate Preparation: Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of floor coverings and accessories. Proceed with installation only when the substrates pass testing for moisture, alkalinity and adhesion. a. The General Contractor shall provide a clean and dry slab free of curing or parting agents, paint, dirt, adhesive(s) oils, taping mud and other contaminants that interfere with the bonding of the adhesive. b. When powdery or porous surface exists a primer /sealer compatible with adhesives is to be used to insure proper adhesion. c. Where lightweight or acoustical concrete is used refer to the manufacturer's recommendations for the proper primer to be used before floor covering is installed. d. Substrate is to include all required work to prepare substrate for installation of the products as specified in this document. Substrate shall meet all conditions as specified in the manufacturer's installation requirements. e. Substrate repair materials shall be recommended by the adhesive and flooring covering manufacturer's specified in this document. Cracks and depressions shall be filled with a cementitious patching material suitable for the depth of crack or depression such as Ardex. f Project conditions shall include those specified in the floor covering manufacturer's installation instructions and include area heat, light and power required for effective and efficient working conditions. 2. Substrate Moisture Profile Based On: ASTM F2170 -02 standard for Internal Relative Humidity in situ probes. a. The General Contractor is to contract with a qualified independent testing company to develop an internal relative humidity profile of the substrate commencing at start of work. Contact ABW Construction Inc. Harold Fleming (206) 719 -0447 b Initially a minimum of 10 -test locations for Level 1 will be selected to develop a moisture profile. First 1000 square feet of test area will receive 3 -test sites and one test site for each additional 1000 square feet for the remaining locations. c. Each test location will have 2- penetrations 1 at a depth equal to 40% of the substrate thickness, 2 penetration at the depth of 1 inch, a total of 20 penetrations. (Additional test locations maybe required predicated on test data from the original locations) d. Monitor and record results of each penetration 3 -days after penetrations were made and weekly until test results meet specifications set by the floor covering manufacturer's usually 75% to 85% depending on floor covering. e. Test results will be reviewed with the owner by architect and general contractor weekly LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS 09654 2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION f The flooring contractor is required to submit in writing that the test results meet the standards set by the materials manufacturer for the locations tested prior to installation. 3 Alkalinity pH Testing using Test Kit Manufacturer Recommendations: a. Two (2) pH alkalinity tests should be performed for each moisture test procedure. b Clean floor to remove all oil, dirt, dust and any foreign materials. If the surface has a primer sealer or old adhesive it must be removed by lightly grinding and or sanding the test area prior to testing. c. High pH readings can be exacerbated or caused by the presents of high moisture emissions, lowering moisture emissions should be the first remedied and once moisture levels are within specification Re -test for pH to see if further action is required. d. Concrete substrate with a surface alkalinity higher than pH 9 must be corrected: Start by rinsing the concrete with pure water wet vacuum immediately and allow to dry 24 hours, Re -test for pH If the test fails. Rinse the concrete with Club Soda (Carbonic acid) not soda water wet vacuum and rinse with pure water allow the concrete to dry Re -test: If the test fails then a pH blocker must be used. Note care must be taken not to over wet the slab or a longer drying time may be required to dry to the recommended level especially on a slab over one year old The substrate must be dry of surface moisture prior to the installation of floor covering materials. 4 Temperature and Humidity a. The environment in which floor covering is to be installed must be controlled with the temperature between 65° F and 95° F and the relative humidity between 10% and 65% If installing over concrete the slab temperature should not be less than 65° F These conditions must be maintained for at least 48 hours before, during, and 48 hours after the installation. Check with the manufacturer's recommendation to assure the above meet their requirements. b Floor covering materials shall be installed when acclimated for 48 hours prior to installation at room temperature between 65 °F and 95 °F 5 Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: a. Do not install floor coverings until space is completed and nominally dry work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy 6 Ventilation. a. Provide adequate ventilation as required to provide a safe work environment and to meet code and agency requirements. 1 5 DELIVERY STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store floor coverings and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer but not less than 50 deg For more than 90 deg F 1 Floor Tile Store on flat surfaces. LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS 09654 3 1 6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1 72 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3 72 hours after installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 2. Sheet Floor Covering: Store rolls upright. A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer but not Tess than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: B After post installation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F C Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. D Close spaces to traffic for 72 hours after floor covering installation. E. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1 7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1 Floor Tile. Furnish one box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof of each type, color and pattem of floor tile installed. 2. Sheet Floor Covering: Fumish not less than 10 linear feet in full roll width for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof in roll form and in full roll width, of each different type, color and pattern of sheet floor covering installed. 2.1 LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERING LIN -1 AND LIN -2 A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 Forbo Industries, Inc. Marmoleum Composition Tile 'MCT' and Marmoleum 'Real' 2. Architect accepted equal. B Color and Pattern: As indicated by manufacturer's designation, in the Linoleum Floor Coverings Color Schedule at the End of Part 3 C Tile. Solidified mixture of linoleum cement binder (linseed oil and pine, fossil or other resins or rosins, or equivalent oxidized oleoresinous binder) and ground cork, wood flour mineral fillers, and pigments bonded to a fibrous or other suitable backing so that backing is partially embedded in mixture. Patterns and colors extend through entire wear -layer thickness. 1 Nominal Tile Size. 13 by 13 inches. LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS 09654 4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION D Sheet Floor Covering ASTM F 2034 1 Roll Size. In manufacturer's standard length by not less than 78 inches wide. E. Seaming Method: Standard and Heat welded in Janitor Storage 118 F Thickness. 0 08 inch and 0 10 inch. G Fire- Test Response Characteristics. 1 Critical Radiant Flux Classification. Class I not less than 0 45 W /sq. cm per ASTM E 648. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds. Latex modified, Portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer for applications indicated. B Adhesives: Water- resistant type recommended by floor covering manufacturer for products and substrate conditions indicated C Heat Welding Bead. Solid- strand product of floor covering manufacturer 1 Color As indicated by manufacturer's designation in the Linoleum Floor Coverings Color Schedule at the End of Part 3 D Integral Flash- Cove -Base Accessories: 1 Cove Strip 1 -inch radius provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer 2. Cove -Base Cap Strip Square rubber cap provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance. 1 Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor coverings. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of floor coverings. B Concrete Substrates. Prepare according to ASTM F 710 LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS 09654 5 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1 Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 3. Moisture Testing: a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869 Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture- vapor- emission rate of 3 lbs. of water /1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. b. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. C Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with floor covering adhesives and that contain soap wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer Do not use solvents. D Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes and depressions in substrates. E. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 72 hours in advance of installation. 1 Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. F Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built -in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. B. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. C Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor coverings as marked on sub -floor Use chalk or other non permanent marking device. D Install floor coverings on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of floor coverings installed on covers. Tightly adhere floor covering edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. E. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. F Heat Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and use welding bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering surfaces. LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS 09654 6 3 4 TILE INSTALLATION CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. 1 Lay tiles square with room axis in pattern indicated. B Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked chipped, or deformed tiles. 1 Lay tiles with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles (basket -weave pattern) in pattern of colors and sizes indicated. 3 5 SHEET FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION A. Unroll sheet floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting B Lay out sheet floor coverings as follows: 1 Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction. 2. Minimize number of seams, place seams in inconspicuous and low- traffic areas, at least 6 inches away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates. 3 Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams. 4 Avoid cross seams. 5 Eliminate deformations that result from hanging method used during drying process (stove bar marks) C Integral Flash Cove Base. Cove floor coverings 6 inches up vertical surfaces. Support floor coverings at horizontal and vertical junction with cove strip Butt at top against cap strip 3 6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing floor coverings: 1 Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes from floor covering surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum floor coverings thoroughly 3 Damp -mop floor coverings to remove marks and soil. a. Do not wash floor coverings until after time period recommended by manufacturer B. Protect floor coverings against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by manufacturer 1 Apply protective floor polish to surfaces that are free of soil, visible adhesive and surface blemishes. a. Seal linoleum as recommended by manufacturer b Use commercially available product acceptable to manufacturer c. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service. LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS 09654 7 END OF SECTION 09654 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 2. Cover linoleum floor coverings with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for Substantial Completion. a. Allow drying room film (yellow film caused by linseed oil oxidation) to disappear before Substantial Completion. 3. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over floor covering surfaces. Place plywood or hardboard panels over floor coverings and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. 3 7 LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS COLOR SCHEDULE A. Linoleum Floor Tile colors are to match as follows: 1 LIN -1A. Marmoleum Composition Tile 'MCT' with Topshield #3120 Rosato 2. LIN -1B Marmoleum Composition Tile `MCT' with Topshield, #562, Apricot" 3. LIN -1C Marmoleum Composition Tile "MCT" with Topshield, #621 'Dove Grey" B Linoleum Sheet Flooring color is to match as follows. 1 LIN -2A. Marmoleum 'Real" #3120 Rosato C Heat Welding Bead color is to match Marmoleum 'Real" #3120 'Rosato LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS 09654 8 SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following: 1 Exposed interior items and surfaces. 2. Surface preparation, priming and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1 Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding) hangers, exposed steel and ironwork, and primed metal surfaces of me- chanical and electrical equipment. C Do not paint pre finished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. D Related Sections include the following: 1 Division 8 Section 'Standard Steel Doors and Frames' for shop priming steel frames. 2. Division 9 Section 'Gypsum Board' for surface preparation for gypsum board. 3 Divisions 15 and 16: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is specified in Divisions 15 and 16 respectively 13 DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 1 Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85- degree meter 2. Eggshell refers to low -sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a 60- degree meter 3 Satin refers to low -sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60- degree meter 4 Semi -gloss refers to medium -sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured at a 60- degree meter PAINTING 09900 -1 14 SUBMITTALS CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 5 Full gloss refers to high -sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a 60- degree meter A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers. 1 Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate, each ma- terial and cross reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information. Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material pro- posed for use. 3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). B Samples for Verification: Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate ac- tual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. 1 Submit Samples, defining each separate coat, including primers. Use representative col- ors when preparing Samples for review Resubmit until required sheen, color and tex- ture, are achieved. 2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each sample. Label each sample for location and application. C Qualification Data. For firms and persons specified in the 'Quality Assurance' Article to demon- strate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information speci- fied. 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting sys- tem applications similar in material, and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain primers and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. C Benchmark Samples (Mockups) Provide a full -coat benchmark finish sample of each type of coating and substrate required on the Project. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5 Duplicate finish of approved prepared samples. 1 The Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for each type of coating and substrate to be painted. a. Wall Surfaces. Provide samples on at least 100 sq ft. of wall surface. b. Small Areas and Items: The Architect will designate an item or area as required. 2. After permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated, apply coatings in this room or to each surface according to the Schedule or as specified. Pro- vide required sheen, color and texture on each surface. PAINTING 09900 2 a. After finishes are accepted, the Architect will use the room or surface to evaluate coating systems of a similar nature 3 Final approval of colors will be from job applied samples. 1 6 DELIVERY STORAGE, AND HANDLING CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original unopened packages and con- tainers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information 1 Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type) 3 Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4 Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5 Thinning instructions. 6 Application instructions. 7 Color name and number 8 VOC content. B Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1 Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly Remove oily rags and waste daily Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing and application 1 7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply water -based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F B Apply solvent- thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surround- ing air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F 1 8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied in the quan- tities described below Package, paint materials in un- opened, factory- sealed containers for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to the Owner 1 Quantity Furnish the Owner with an additional 2 percent, but not Tess than 1 gallon or 1 case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products in the paint schedules. PAINTING 09900 3 1 Miller Paint Co. (Miller). 2. PPG Industries, Inc. (PPG) 3 Pratt Lambert, Inc. (P L). 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS GENERAL CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION B Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the paint schedules by use of shortened versions of their names, which are shown in parentheses. A. Material Compatibility Provide primers, undercoats, and finish -coat materials that are compati- ble with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B Material Quality Provide manufacturer's best quality paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1 Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. C Colors: Match colors indicated by reference to manufacturer's color designations in the Paint Color Schedule at the end of part 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 31 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. 1 Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and sur- faces receiving paint are thoroughly dry 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and condi- tions within a particular area. B Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compati- bility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteris- tics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1 Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over sub- strates primed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fix tures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface applied protection before surface preparation and painting. PAINTING 09900 4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1 After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B Cleaning Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1 Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. C Surface Preparation. Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturers writ- ten instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1 Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and re -prime 2. Ferrous Metals. Clean un- galvanized ferrous -metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances Use sol- vent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations. D Materials Preparation. Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written in- structions. 1 Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary remove surface film and strain material before using. 3 Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. E. Tinting: Tint each under -coat, a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when mul- tiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3 3 APPLICATION a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and ac cording to requirements of SSPC -SP 10 b Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. c. Touch up bare areas and shop applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire -brush clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. A. General. Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied 1 Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detri- mental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4 The term 'exposed surfaces' includes areas visible when permanent, or built -in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned -tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. PAINTING 09900 5 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed sur faces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only 6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, non specular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. 7 Paint backside of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed sur- faces. 8 Finish exterior doors on interior faces, tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exte- rior faces. 9 Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. B Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or other- wise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent sur- face deterioration. 1 The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of applica- tion method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recom- mended by the manufacturer If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions and sand between applications. 2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, comers, crevices, welds and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thick- ness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4 Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not re -coat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. C Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller spray or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1 Brushes. Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appro- priate size for the surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high -pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. D Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommend- ed spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and in occupied spaces. F Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Re -coat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other de- fects due to insufficient sealing. G Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holi- days, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be accept- able. PAINTING 09900 6 3 4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL a. b c. d. e. f 9- h. j• k. m. 3 5 CLEANING A. Cleanup At the end of each workday paint materials from the site. 1 After completing painting clean paint by washing and scraping. surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION H Completed Work: Match approved samples for color texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied: 1 The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor 2. The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as re- quired by the Owner Quantitative material analysis. Abrasion resistance. Apparent reflectivity Flexibility Washability Absorption. Accelerated weathering. Dry opacity Accelerated yellowness. Re- coating. Skinning. Color retention Alkali and mildew resistance 3 The Owner may direct the Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements. The Contractor shall remove non- complying paint from the site pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the rejected paint. If necessary the Contractor may be required to remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if on repainting with specified paint, the 2 coatings are incompatible. remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded glass and paint- spattered surfaces. Remove spattered Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting Correct damage by cleaning repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. B Provide 'Wet Paint' signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. PAINTING 09900 7 3.7 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1 At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1 A. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: 1 Semi gloss, Acrylic Enamel Finish. 2 finish coats over a primer a. Primer Latex based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 1) Miller 6440 Acro Pure Interior Primer 2) Architect accepted equal b. First and Second Coats: Semi -gloss acrylic latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thick- ness of not Tess than 2.6 mils. 1) Miller 2850 Series Acro Pure Semi -Gloss Ultra- Low -VOC 2) Architect accepted equal. 2. Semi gloss, Waterborne -Epoxy Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer a. Primer Premium, 100 percent acrylic, penetrating pigmented primer /sealer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2 mils. 1) Miller #6040 White, Kril Primer Sealer 2) PPG 6-603 Speedhide Interior /Exterior Acrylic Latex Alkali Resistant Pri- mer 3) P L. ZIF 1001 Suprime 1 100 Percent Acrylic Multi- Purpose Primer b First and Second Coats: Odorless, semi gloss, waterborne epoxy applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thick- ness of not less than 3 mils per coat. 1) Miller #4200 Waterbome Epoxy Coating. 2) PPG Aquapon 35 Polyamide Epoxy Coating. 3) PPG Pitt-Glaze WB Water -Borne Acrylic Epoxy B Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal. 1 Semi gloss, Acrylic Enamel Finish One finish coat over an enamel undercoat and a pri- mer a. Primer Quick- drying, rust inhibitive, alkyd -based or epoxy -metal primer as rec- ommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate rec- ommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1 5 mils. 1) Miller 5000 Acrimetal DTM Primer /Finish. 2) PPG. 6 -208 Speedhide Interior /Exterior Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer 3) P L. S 4551 Tech -Gard High Performance Rust Inhibitor Primer PAINTING 09900 8 END OF SECTION 09900 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION b Undercoat: Alkyd interior enamel undercoat or semi gloss, acrylic latex, interior enamel, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thick ness of not less than 1 3 mils. 1) Miller 5000 Acrimetal DTM Primer /Finish. 2) PPG 6 -6 Speedhide Interior Quick -Drying Enamel Undercoat. 3) P L. Z/F 4100 Series Accolade Interior Semi Gloss. c. Finish Coat: Semi gloss, acrylic latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1 3 mils. 1) Miller 5500 Series Kril Semi Gloss. 2) PPG. 88 -110 Satinhide Interior Enamel Wall Trim Lo- Lustre Semi -Gloss Latex. 3) P L. Z/F 4100 Series Accolade Interior Semi Gloss. 3 8 PAINT COLOR SCHEDULE A. P -1 Color to Match Color Guild #3857 `Linen White B P 2: Color to Match Color Guild #8772W `Siberian Ice C P 3 Color to Match Color Guild #AC144N `Black Deco PAINTING 09900 9 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 10265 IMPACT RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION PART1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 Corner guards. 2. Impact- resistant wall coverings. B Related Sections include the following 1 Division 8 Section 'Door Hardware' for metal armor kick, mop and push plates. 13 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions impact strength, fire -test- response characteristics, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each impact- resistant wall protection unit. B Shop Drawings. For each impact- resistant wall protection unit showing locations and extent. Include sections, details, and attachments to other work. C Samples for Initial Selection. For each type of impact- resistant wall protection unit indicated. 1 Include similar Samples of accent strips and accessories involving color selection D Samples for Verification. For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below 1 Corner Guards. 6 inches long. Include examples of joinery corners, top caps, and field splices. 2. Impact- Resistant Wall Covering 3 by 3 inches square. E. Qualification Data: For Installer F Material Test Reports: For each impact- resistant plastic material. G. Material Certificates: For each impact- resistant plastic material, signed by manufacturer H. Maintenance Data: For each impact- resistant wall protection unit to include in maintenance manuals. IMPACT RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION 10265 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1 Include recommended methods and frequency of maintenance for maintaining optimum condition of plastic covers under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include precautions against using cleaning materials and methods that may be detrimental to plastic finishes and performance. Warranty Special warranty specified in this Section. 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer B Source Limitations: Obtain impact- resistant wall protection units through one source from a single manufacturer C Product Options: Drawings indicate size profiles, and dimensional requirements of impact resistant wall protection units and are based on the specific system indicated Refer to Division 1 Section 'Product Requirements. 1 Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review D Fire Test Response Characteristics: Provide impact- resistant, plastic wall protection units with surface burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 NFPA 255 or UL 723 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1 5 DELIVERY STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store impact- resistant wall protection units in original undamaged packages and containers inside well ventilated area protected from weather moisture, soiling extreme temperatures, and humidity 1 Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F during the period plastic materials are stored. 2. Keep plastic sheet material out of direct sunlight. 3. Store plastic wall protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until plastic material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F a. Store corner -guard covers in a vertical position. 1 6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install impact- resistant wall protection units until building is enclosed and weatherproof wet work is complete and dry and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature at 70 deg F for not less than 72 hours before beginning installation and for the remainder of the construction period. IMPACT RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION 10265 2 17 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of impact- resistant wall protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1 Failures include but are not limited to the following: a. Deterioration of plastic and other materials beyond normal use. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 1 8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1 Corner -Guard Covers: Full -size plastic covers of maximum length equal to 2 percent of each type, color and texture of units installed, but no fewer than two 4- foot -long units. B Include mounting and accessory components. Replacement materials shall be from same production run as installed units. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection 1 Basis -of- Design Product: The design for each impact- resistant wall protection unit is based on the product named Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 2.2 MATERIALS CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Extruded Rigid Plastic: ASTM D 1784 Class 1 textured, chemical- and stain resistant, high impact- resistant acrylic modified vinyl plastic with integral color throughout; thickness as indicated. 1 Impact Resistance. Minimum 25 4 ft- Ibf /in of notch when tested according to ASTM D 256 Test Method A. 2. Chemical and Stain Resistance: Tested according to ASTM D 543 3 Self- extinguishing when tested according to ASTM D 635 4 Flame- Spread Index: 25 or less. 5 Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less. B Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester Panel Wall Covering Material: ASTM D 1784 Class 1 textured, chemical- and stain resistant, semirigid, high- impact- resistant acrylic modified vinyl plastic sheet with integral color throughout; thickness as indicated. IMPACT RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION 10265 3 2.3 CORNER GUARDS CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1 Impact Resistance: Minimum 25 4 ft- Ibf /in. of notch when tested according to ASTM D 256 Test Method A. 2. Chemical and Stain Resistance: Tested according to ASTM D 543 3. Self- extinguishing when tested according to ASTM D 635 4 Flame- Spread Index: 25 or Tess. 5 Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less C Aluminum Extrusions: AIIoy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated but with not less than strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B 221 for AIIoy 6063 -T5 D Fasteners. Aluminum, non magnetic stainless steel, or other non corrosive metal screws, bolts, and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type fasteners where exposed to view E. Adhesive: Type recommended by manufacturer for use with material being adhered to substrate indicated. 1 Use adhesives and sealants that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59 Subpart D (EPA Method 24). a. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g /L. b. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g /L. c. Contact Adhesive: 250 g /L. A. Surface- Mounted, Resilient, Plastic Corner Guards CG -1 Assembly consisting of snap -on plastic cover installed over continuous retainer including mounting hardware; fabricated with 90- or 135 degree turn to match wall condition. 1 Basis -of- Design Product C/S Acrovyn, SSM 20 or a comparable product by one of the following: a. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems; Division of InPro Corporation. b Korogard Wall Protection Systems; Division of RJF International Corporation. c. Pawling Corporation. 2. Cover Extruded rigid plastic, minimum 0 078 -inch wall thickness; as follows: a. Profile. Nominal 2- inch -long leg and 1/4 -inch corner radius. b. Height: 4 feet. c. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 3. Retainer Minimum 0 060 inch thick, 1- piece, extruded aluminum. 4 Top and Bottom Caps. Prefabricated, injection molded plastic; color matching cover field adjustable for close alignment with snap -on cover 2.4 IMPACT RESISTANT WALL COVERINGS A. Semirigid, Impact- Resistant Wall Covering Panels FRP 1 Basis -of- Design Product: Marlite FRP or a comparable product by one of the following IMPACT RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION 10265 4 2.5 FABRICATION CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION a. Glasteel, Division of Stability America, Inc. b Nudo Products, Inc. c. Sequentia, Inc. 2. Size. 48 by 96 inches for sheet. 3 Panel Thickness. 0 093 inch. 4 Color and Texture. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 5 Height: As indicated. 6 Trim and Joint Moldings. Extruded rigid plastic that matches sheet wall covering color 7 Mounting: Adhesive. A. Fabricate impact- resistant wall protection units to comply with requirements indicated for design dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components. B Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling C Fabricate components with tight seams and joints with exposed edges rolled Provide surfaces free of wrinkles, chips dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints. PART 3 EXECUTION 31 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1 Examine walls to which impact- resistant wall protection will be attached for blocking grounds and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners. 2. For impact- resistant wall protection units attached with adhesive or foam tape verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact- resistant wall protection system components. B Before installation clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles. 3 3 INSTALLATION A. General Install impact- resistant wall protection units level, plumb and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work. IMPACT- RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION 10265 5 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1 Install impact- resistant wall protection units in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings. 2. Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for a complete installation. a. Provide anchoring devices to withstand imposed Toads. b Adjust end and top caps as required to ensure tight seams. B. Impact- Resistant Wall Covering: Provide top and edge moldings, corners, and divider bars as required for a complete installation. 3 4 CLEANING A. Immediately after completion of installation clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard, ammonia -based household cleaning agent. B Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer END OF SECTION 10265 IMPACT RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION 10265 6 EN MN MB N NM MO MI MI NM NE MB On MI MI I i GENERAL NOTES 1 OWNER'S APPROVAL OF SIGNAGE TEXT IS REQUIRED PRIOR TO SIGN FABRICATION 2. VERIFY SIGNAGE LOCATIONS WITH ARCHITECTURAL PLANS 3. SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 10431 SIGNAGE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SIGN S101 S102 S103 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 S109 S110 S111 S112 S113 S114 S115 S116 S117 S118 SIGN TYPE SIGNAGE DESCRIPTION ID -1 ROOM IDENTIFICATION ID -1 ROOM IDENTIFICATION ID -2 RESTROOM PICTOGRAM ID -2 RESTROOM PICTOGRAM ID -1 ROOM IDENTIFICATION ID -1 ROOM IDENTIFICATION ID -1 ROOM IDENTIFICATION ID -1 ROOM IDENTIFICATION ID -1 ROOM IDENTIFICATION ID -1 ROOM IDENTIFICATION ID -1 ROOM IDENTIFICATION ID -1 ROOM IDENTIFICATION ID -1 ROOM IDENTIFICATION ID -1 ROOM IDENTIFICATION ID -1 ROOM IDENTIFICATION ID -1 ROOM IDENTIFICATION ID -1 ROOM IDENTIFICATION ID -1 ROOM IDENTIFICATION 4 EVALUATE FIELD CONDITIONS TO DETERMINE BEST LOCATION FOR SIGN, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, NOTIFY ARCHITECT BEFORE INSTALLATION, IF SIGNAGE CONFLICTS WITH FIELD CONDITIONS SIGNAGE SCHEDULE CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION KEY SIGNAGE TEXT NOTES Waiting Room Exit Water Heater Closet Patient Toilet Man Woman Handicap Pictograms Staff Toilet Man Woman Handicap Pictograms Office WIC WIC Interview Room Exam Room Exam Room Storage Janitor Hazmat Interview Room Conference Room Telecom Telecom Doctor's Office File Room SIGNAGE 10431 1 Interior Signage Schedule SECTION 10431 SIGNAGE PART1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 Panel signs. B Related Sections include the following. 1 Division 1 Section 'Temporary Facilities and Controls' for temporary Project identification signs and for temporary information and directional signs. 2. Division 15 Section 'Mechanical Identification' for labels, tags, and nameplates for mechanical equipment. 3 Division 16 Section 'Electrical Identification' for labels, tags and nameplates for electrical equipment. 13 DEFINITIONS CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. ADA -ABA Accessibility Guidelines. U S Architectural Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities, Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines 14 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B Shop Drawings. Show fabrication and installation details for signs. 1 Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories. 2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille, and layout for each sign. C Samples for Verification. For each of the following products and for the full range of color texture, and sign material indicated, of sizes indicated: 1 Panel Signs: Not Tess than 8 inches square. D Sign Schedule. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. E. Qualification Data: For fabricator SIGNAGE 10431 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION F Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals. G Warranty Special warranty specified in this Section. 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications. Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. B Source Limitations for Signs. Obtain each sign type indicated from one source from a single manufacturer C Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA -ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC /ANSI A117 1 16 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1 Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Deterioration of embedded graphic image colors and sign lamination. 2. Warranty Period. Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PANEL SIGNS A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ASI Modulex, Inc. Terra ADA Ready Plaque Series or a comparable product by one of the following: 1 ACE Sign Systems, Inc. 2. Advance Corporation Braille -Tac Division. 3 Allen Industries Architectural Signage 4 Allenite Signs; Allen Marking Products, Inc. 5 APCO Graphics, Inc. 6 ASI Modulex, Inc. 7 Best Sign Systems Inc. 8. Bunting Graphics, Inc. 9 Fossil Industries, Inc. 10 Gemini Incorporated. 11 Grimco Inc. 12. Innerface Sign Systems, Inc. 13 InPro Corporation 14 Matthews International Corporation; Bronze Division. 15 Mills Manufacturing Company 16 Mohawk Sign Systems. SIGNAGE 10431 2 17 Nelson- Harkins Industries. 18 Seton Identification Products. 19 Signature Signs, Incorporated 20 Supersine Company (The) CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION B Interior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from corner to corner complying with the following requirements. 1 Laminated, Etched Photopolymer Raised graphics with Braille 1/32 inch above surface with contrasting colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range and laminated to acrylic back. 2. Edge Condition: Square cut. 3 Corner Condition. Square. 4 Mounting: a. Wall mounted with two -face tape. 5 Color As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 6 Tactile Characters. Characters and Grade 2 Braille raised 1/32 inch above surface with contrasting colors C Panel Sign Schedule. 1 See Signage Schedule at the end of Part 3 2.2 FABRICATION A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 31 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions. 1 Install signs level, plumb and at heights indicated with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Interior Wall Signs. Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door SIGNAGE 10431 3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION B Wall- Mounted Signs. Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply 1 Two -Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl- covered or rough surfaces. 3 3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturers written instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner END OF SECTION 10431 SIGNAGE 10431 4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 10520 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 Fire protection cabinets for the following: a. Portable fire extinguishers. 2. Fire protection accessories. 13 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual com- ponents and profiles, and finishes for fire- protection specialties. 1 Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification. 2. Cabinets. Include roughing -in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relation- ships of box and trim to surrounding construction door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. B Samples for Initial Selection Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of cabinet finish indicated. C Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed cabinet finish required prepared on Sam- ples of size indicated below and of same thickness and material indicated for the Work. If fi- nishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. 1 Size. 6 -by -6- inch square Samples. 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations. Obtain fire extinguishers and cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer B NFPA Compliance. Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10 'Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers. FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 1 C Fire Extinguishers. Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent test- ing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1 Provide extinguishers listed and labeled by FM. 15 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size of cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated and provided by Owner under separate Contract are accommodated PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1 Portable Fire Extinguishers. 2. Fire Protection Cabinets: 2.2 MATERIALS a. Fire -End Croker Corporation. b. J L. Industries, Inc. c. Larsen's Manufacturing Company d. Modern Metal Products; Div of Technico e. Potter Roemer Div of Smith Industries, Inc. a. Fire -End Croker Corporation. b. J L. Industries, Inc. c. Larsen's Manufacturing Company d. Modern Metal Products; Div of Technico e. Potter Roemer Div of Smith Industries, Inc. A. Cold Rolled Steel Sheet: Carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 366/A 366M, commercial quali- ty stretcher leveled, temper rolled. 2.3 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each cabinet and other loca- tions indicated. B Multipurpose Dry- Chemical Type. UL -rated 2- A.10 5-lb nominal capacity in enameled steel container 2.4 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Cabinet Construction. Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame door and hardware to suit cabinet type trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter doorframes. 1 Cabinet Metal: Enameled -steel sheet. 2. Shelf Same metal and finish as cabinet. B Cabinet Type: Suitable for the following 1 Fire extinguisher C Cabinet Mounting: Suitable for the following mounting conditions. 1 Semi recessed: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of shallow depth to suit style of trim indicated. D Cabinet Trim Style. Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded and ground smooth. 1 Exposed Trim: One -piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping sur rounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend) a. Rolled -Edge Trim. 2 -1/2 -inch backbend depth. E. Cabinet Trim Material: Manufacturer's standard as follows: 1 Same metal and finish as door F Door Material: Manufacturer's standard as follows. 1 Steel sheet. G Door Glazing. Manufacturer's standard as follows. 1 Tempered Float Glass ASTM C 1048 Kind FT Condition A, Type I Quality q3 as fol- lows: a. Class 1 (clear). H. Door Style. Manufacturer's standard design, as follows. 1 Fully glazed panel with frame Door Construction Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, of materials indi- cated, and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 1 Provide minimum 1/2- inch -thick doorframes, fabricated with tubular stiles and rails, and hollow -metal design. 2. Provide inside latch and lock for break -glass panels. J Door Hardware. Provide manufacturer's standard door operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Provide either lever handle with cam action latch, or exposed or concealed door pull and friction latch. Provide concealed or continuous -type hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees. FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 3 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure extinguisher of sizes re- quired for types and capacities of extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked enamel finish. 1 Provide brackets for extinguishers located in cabinets. B Lettered Door Handle. Provide one piece, cast -iron door handle with the word 'FIRE' embossed into face. C Door Locks: Provide cylinder lock, with all cabinets keyed alike. D Identification. Provide lettering to comply with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, col- or size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 1 Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with the words 'FIRE EXTINGUISHER' applied to door a. Application Process: Silk- screened. b. Lettering Color Red. c. Orientation: Vertical. 2.6 COLORS AND TEXTURES A. Colors and Textures: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for these characte- ristics. 2.7 FINISHES GENERAL CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Comply with the NAAMM 'Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products' for rec- ommendations for applying and designating finishes. B Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, tempo- rary protective covering before shipping. C Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are ac ceptable if they are within one -half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are accept- able if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minim- ize contrast. D Cabinet and Door Finishes: Provide manufacturer's standard baked enamel paint for the follow- ing: 1 Exterior of cabinets and doors, except for those surfaces indicated to receive another finish. 2. Interior of cabinets and doors. 2.8 STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, mill scale, rust, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond using manufacturer's standard methods. FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 4 END OF SECTION 10520 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION B Factory Priming for Field- Painted Finish. Apply shop primer specified below immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. 1 Shop Primer Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast curing lead- and chromate free, universal primer selected for resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for com- patibility with substrate and field applied finish paint system indicated and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field- applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. C Baked Enamel Finish. Immediately after cleaning and pre- treating, apply manufacturer's stan- dard two -coat, baked enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturers written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. 1 Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 EXECUTION 31 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semi recessed cab- inets are to be installed. B Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging 1 Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units C Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing fire- protection specialties. B Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated or if not indicated at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1 Prepare recesses for cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 2. Fasten mounting brackets to structure and cabinets, square and plumb 3 Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb 3.3 ADJUSTING CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Adjust cabinet doors that do not swing or operate freely B Refinish or replace cabinets and doors damaged during installation. C Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that cabinets and doors are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 5 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 12 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 Public -use washroom. accessories. 2. Childcare accessories. 3. Under lavatory guards. 13 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1 Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation 3 Material and finish descriptions. 4 Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty B Product Schedule Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1 Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings. 2. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings. C Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same articles in Part 2. provide products of same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by Architect. B Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 Article 100 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 1 15 COORDINATION 16 WARRANTY PART 2 PRODUCTS B Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser TA1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning and servicing of accessories. B Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. A. Special Mirror Warranty Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1 Warranty Period 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. 2.1 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304 0 0312 -inch minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated B Brass: ASTM B 19 flat products; ASTM B 16, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; or ASTM B 30 castings. C Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. D Fasteners. Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper and -theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. E. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456 Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service) F Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality clear -glass mirrors, nominal 6 0 mm thick. 2.2 PUBLIC -USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES A. Basis -of- Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1 A J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3 Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4 Bradley Corporation. 5 General Accessory Manufacturing Co (GAMCO) 6 World Dryer TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1 Basis -of- Design Product: Bobrick B -2740 2. Description. Double -roll dispenser 3 Mounting: Surface mounted. 4 Operation. Non control delivery with theft resistant spindle. 5 Capacity Designed for 5- inch diameter tissue rolls. 6 Material and Finish. Satin finish aluminum bracket with plastic spindle C Paper Towel (Folded) Dispenser TA2: 1 Basis -of- Design Product: Bobrick B -262. 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3 Minimum Capacity 400 C -fold or 525 multifold towels. 4 Material and Finish. Stainless steel No 4 finish (satin) 5 Lockset: Tumbler type. 6 Refill Indicators. Pierced slots at sides or front. D Paper Towel Dispenser Waste TA3 1 Basis -of- Design Product: Bobrick B -3942. 2. Mounting: Semi Recessed. 3 Minimum Capacity Paper Towel Dispenser 600 C -fold or 800 multifold towels Waste Receptacle. 12 gallons. 4 Material and Finish. Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin) 5 Lockset: Tumbler type 6 Refill Indicators: Pierced slots at sides or front. E. Liquid -Soap Dispenser provided by Owner installed by Contractor F Grab Bar TA5 TA6 and TA6A. 1 Basis -of- Design Product: TA5 Bobrick B-6806 99 x 42. TA6 Bobrick B-6806 99 x 36 TA6A. Bobrick B-6806 99 x 18 2. Mounting. Flanges with concealed fasteners. 3 Material. Stainless steel, 0 05 inch thick. a. Finish. Smooth, No 4 satin finish on ends and slip- resistant texture in grip area. 4 Outside Diameter 1 -1/2 inches. 5 Configuration and Length: TA5 Straight 42 inches long. TA6 Straight, 36 inches long G. Baby Changing Station TA7 1 Basis -of- Design Product: World ABC -300 HS 2. Mounting Recessed. 3. Door or Cover Stainless Steel. 4 Material and Finish. Polyethylene. H Mirror Unit TA8: 1 Basis -of- Design Product: Bobrick B- 290.2436 2. Frame: Stainless -steel angle, 0.05 inch thick. a. Corners: Welded and ground smooth. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 3 Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper and theft- resistant installation, using one of the methods indicated below a. One piece, galvanized steel, wall- hanger device with spring- action locking mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts. b. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove. 4 Size. 24 inches wide by 36 inches high. I Sanitary Napkin Disposal TA11 1 Basis -of- Design Product: Bobrick B -270 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Material and Finish. Stainless steel, No 4 finish (satin) 2.3 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS A. Basis -of Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1 Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. 2. TCI Products. 3 Truebro, Inc. B Under lavatory Guard TA9* 1 Basis -of- Design Product: Plumberex Pro Extreme. 2. Description. Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevent direct contact with and burns from piping, and allow service access without removing coverings. 3 Material and Finish: Anti microbial molded plastic, white. 2.4 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1 A J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3 Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4 Bradley Corporation. 5 General Accessory Manufacturing Co (GAMCO). B Mop and Broom Holder TA10* 1 Basis -of- Design Product: Bobrick B -239 x 34 2. Description: Unit with shelf hooks, holders, and rod suspended beneath shelf 3 Length: 34 inches 4 Hooks: Four 5 Mop /Broom Holders Three, spring loaded, rubber hat, cam type. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 6 Material and Finish Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin) a. Shelf Not less than nominal 0 05- inch -thick stainless steel. b Rod: Approximately 1/4- inch diameter stainless steel. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled Hang doors and access panels with full length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion- resistant backing plates. B Keys. Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and re- supplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer Install units level, plumb and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated B Grab Bars. Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 Ibf when tested according to method in ASTM F 446 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items B Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturers written recommendations. END OF SECTION 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 5 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 11490 GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 12 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following gymnasium equipment: 1 Safety pads. 13 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated 1 If applicable, include assembly disassembly and storage instructions for removable equipment. B Shop Drawings. For gymnasium equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections details, attachments to other work, and the following 1 Method of field assembly for removable equipment, connections, installation details, and mountings. 2. Transport and storage accessories for removable equipment. C Samples for Initial Selection. For each type of gymnasium equipment indicated. D Samples for Verification. For the following products 1 Pad Fabric: Not less than 3 inches square, with specified treatments applied. Mark face of material. E. Product Certificates. For each type of gymnasium equipment, signed by product manufacturer F Warranty Special warranty specified in this Section. 1 4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install gymnasium equipment until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof wet work in spaces is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B Field Measurements. Verify position and elevation of layout for gymnasium equipment. GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT 11490 -1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.2 SAFETY PADS CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1 Extruded Bars, Profiles, and Tubes. ASTM B 221 2. Cast Aluminum: ASTM B 179 3 Flat Sheet: ASTM B 209 B Medium Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde. C Anchors, Fasteners, Fittings and Hardware: Manufacturer's standard corrosion resistant or non corrodible units; concealed A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide AALCO Manufacturing Wall Pads: No. SWP -CA with SSMV attachment, Floor Mats: AALCO custom, or a comparable product by one of the following 1 ADP Lemco Inc. 2. American Athletic, Inc. 3. Draper Inc. 4 Institutional Products Inc. 5. Jaypro Sports, LLC 6 Performance Sports Systems. 7 Porter Athletic Equipment Company B Safety Pad Surface- Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1 Flame- Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less. C Pad Coverings. Provide safety pad fabric covering fabricated from puncture- and tear resistant, not less than 14- oz. /sq. yd. PVC coated polyester or nylon- reinforced PVC fabric treated with fungicide for mildew resistance; with surface- burning characteristics indicated, and lined with fire retardant liner D Wall Safety Pads: Padded wall wainscot panels designed to be attached in a continuous row• each panel section consisting of fill laminated to backer board with visible surfaces fully covered by seamless fabric covering free of sag and wrinkles and firmly attached to back of backer board. 1 Backer Board: Not less than 3/8 -inch- thick fire- retardant- treated plywood per AWPA C27 Interior Type A. 2. Fire- Resistive Fill: Multiple- impact- resistant foam not less than 2 -inch- thick fire resistive neoprene, 6 0-lb/cu. ft. density 3 Size: Each panel section, as indicated. 4 Number of Panel Sections: As indicated modular panel sections. GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT 11490 2 PART 3 EXECUTION 31 EXAMINATION CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 5 Installation Method Manufacturer's standard. 6 Fabric Covering Color(s) As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for one color 7 Graphics Custom graphics as indicated. A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for play court layout, alignment of mounting substrates, installation tolerances operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance. 1 Verify critical dimensions. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION GENERAL A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Complete equipment field assembly where required. B Unless otherwise indicated, install gymnasium equipment after other finishing operations including painting, have been completed. C Wall Safety Pads. Mount with bottom edge at 2 inches above finished floor 3 3 CLEANING A. After completing gymnasium equipment installation, inspect components. Remove spots, dirt, and debris and touch up damaged shop applied finishes according to manufacturer's written instructions. B Replace gymnasium equipment and finishes that cannot be cleaned and repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion END OF SECTION 11490 GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT 11490 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 12484 FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES PART1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following' 1 Entrance mats. 13 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B Samples for Verification. For each type of product indicated 1 Floor Mat: 8 -inch- square assembled sections of floor mat. C Maintenance Data: For floor mats to include in maintenance manuals 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations. Obtain floor mats through one source from a single manufacturer B Accessibility Requirements: Provide installed floor mats that comply with Section 4 5 in the U S Architectural Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)' 1 5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1 6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1 Entrance Mats: Full -width roll units equal to 2 percent of amount installed for each size, color and pattern indicated, but no fewer than 5 square yards. FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 12484 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ENTRANCE MATS A. Basis -of- Design Product Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Flintile, Berber "Charcoal' or a comparable product by one of the following 1 Atlas Nop. 2. Flexco. 3 Mats, Inc. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, provide single unit for each mat installation. Where joints in mats are necessary space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and floor conditions for compliance with requirements for location, sizes, and other conditions affecting installation of floor mats. 1 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install surface -type units to comply with manufacturers' written instructions at locations indicated; coordinate with entrance locations and traffic patterns. 3.3 PROTECTION A. After completing mat installation provide temporary protective covering. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 12484 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 12484 2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 12491 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS PART1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following 1 Horizontal louver blinds with aluminum slats. B Related Sections include the following: 1 Division 6 Section 'Miscellaneous Carpentry' for wood blocking and grounds for mounting horizontal louver blinds and accessories. 13 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for horizontal louver blind C Samples for Initial Selection For each type and color of horizontal louver blind indicated. 1 Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection. D Samples for Verification: For each type and color of horizontal louver blind indicated. 1 Slat: Not less than 6 inches long. 2. Valance. Full -size unit, not less than 6 inches wide. E. Window Treatment Schedule For horizontal louver blinds. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. F Product Certificates. For each type of horizontal louver blind, signed by product manufacturer G Product Test Reports. Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for each type of horizontal louver blind. H Maintenance Data: For horizontal louver blinds to include in maintenance manuals. 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations. Obtain horizontal louver blinds through one source from a single manufacturer HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12491 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION B Product Standard: Provide horizontal louver blinds complying with WCSC A 100 1 C Mockup Build mockup to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution 1 Approved mockup may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1 5 DELIVERY STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver horizontal louver blinds in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings and in a window treatment schedule. 1 6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal louver blinds until construction and wet and dirty finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Field Measurements: Where horizontal louver blinds are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation hardware throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS ALUMINUM SLATS A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Bali, 1 inch Customiser® Aluminum Blinds or a comparable product by one of the following: 1 Hunter Douglas. 2. Levolor a Newell Rubbermaid Company 3 Springs Window Fashions Division, Inc. B Slats. Aluminum; alloy and temper recommended by producer for type of use and finish indicated; with crowned profile and radiused corners. 1 Width. 1 inch. 2. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Finish. One color a. Ionized Coating: Antistatic, dust repellent, baked polyester finish. C Headrail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum, long edges returned or rolled, fully enclosing operating mechanisms on three sides and end plugs and the following 1 Capacity One blind per headrail. HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12491 2 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION D Bottom Rail Formed -steel or extruded- aluminum tube, with plastic or metal capped ends, with enclosed ladders to prevent contact with sill. E. Ladders: Evenly spaced to prevent Tong -term slat sag. 1 For Blinds with Nominal Slat Width 1 Inch or Less: Braided string. F Lift Cords Manufacturer's standard. G Tilt Control. Enclosed worm -gear mechanism, slip clutch or detachable wand preventing over rotation and linkage rod and the following 1 Tilt Operation. Manual with clear plastic wand. 2. Length of Tilt Control. Full length of blind. 3 Tilt: Full. H Lift Operation: Manual, cord lock; locks pull cord to stop blind at any position in ascending or descending travel. Valance: Two slats. 1 Finish Color Characteristics. Match color texture pattern, and gloss of slats. J Mounting: As indicated, permitting easy removal and replacement without damaging blind or adjacent surfaces and finishes; with spacers and shims required for blind placement and alignment indicated. 1 Provide intermediate support brackets if end support spacing exceeds spacing recommended by manufacturer for weight and size of blind K. Side Channels and Perimeter Light Gap Seals. Manufacturer's standard. L. Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Gloss. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND FABRICATION A. Concealed Components: Non corrodible or corrosion resistant coated materials. 1 Lift- and -Tilt Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated moving parts. B Unit Sizes. Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F 1 Blind Units Installed between (inside) Jambs: Width equal to 1/4 inch per side or 1/2 inch total, plus or minus 1/8 inch, less than jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which each blind is installed. Length equal to 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch. Delete subparagraph above or below if not applicable. Revise above if heat strengthened glass is not specified and if compliance with GANA recommendations in its 'Glazing Manual' for clearances between top bottom, and sides of opening and blind suits Project. Coordinate requirements for perimeter clearances with distance between blinds and glass, tilt limits, glass type, and placement of heating /cooling air supplies to avoid heat buildup and possible damage to glass. HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12491 3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 2. Blind Units Installed outside Jambs: Width and length as indicated with terminations between blinds of end to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations between openings. C Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of blind, for supporting head -rail valance and operating hardware and for hardware position and blind mounting method indicated. D Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal non- corrosive to blind hardware and adjoining construction, type designed for securing to supporting substrate, and supporting blinds and accessories under conditions of normal use. E. Color- Coated Finish: 1 Metal: For components exposed to view apply manufacturer's standard baked finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, baking and minimum dry film thickness. F Component Color Provide rails, cords, ladders, and exposed -to -view metal and plastic matching or coordinating with slat color unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 31 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance. 1 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install horizontal louver blinds level and plumb and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so exterior slat edges in any position are not closer than 2 inches to interior face of glass. Install intermediate support as required to prevent deflection in head -rail. Allow clearances between adjacent blinds and for operating glazed opening's operation hardware if any 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate smoothly easily safely and free of binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean horizontal louver blind surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12491 4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION B Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensure that horizontal louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C Replace damaged horizontal louver blinds that cannot be repaired in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 12491 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12491 5 SECTION 15000 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS (Performance Specification) PART1 GENERAL 1 1 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section is specifically applicable to the Basic Mechanical Requirements in addition to Division 1 General Requirements. B The General Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1) apply to this Section 15 Work. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. A completed operating installation of all mechanical systems specified and required shall be provided. All installations shall be in strict compliance with the specifications drawings, general conditions and contract terms, all applicable current State and Local Codes and Ordinances. In case of conflicts, the quality deemed best by the Owners Representative will govern B This Work is Design /Build. 1 3 SCOPE OF WORK A. HVAC CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1 Contractor to coordinate, design, fabricate and install the complete Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Distribution System (Roof top mechanical is existing to remain, no new major HVAC equipment is envisioned for this Project) per governing authorities requirements, as specified and as approved by the Owners Representative 2. Contractor to provide detailed shop drawings submitted to and approved by governing jurisdiction. 3 Contractor to comply with all State Energy Code requirements and complete State Energy Code forms 4 Refer to Architectural Drawings for some required equipment, fixtures, etc. 14 REFERENCES A. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers. B ANSI American National Standards Institute. C ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials. D UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. E. IBC International Building Code. F IMC International Mechanical Code. Including Oregon Mechanical Specialty Code. GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS (Performance Specification) 15000 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION G NFPA National Fire Protection Association. H. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association. I ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers. J UFC Uniform Fire Code. K. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors. L. NBS National Bureau of Standards. M AGA American Gas Association. 15 SUBMITTALS A. Submit (3) sets of shop drawings, energy calculations and other required information to local jurisdiction for approval as required. B Submit four bound HVAC shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of project, products, and accessories in a single submittal. Each product data to be labeled and cross referenced to the drawings. Each bound shop drawings and product data shall be indexed as follows. 1 HVAC a. Equipment. b. Controls. c. Detailed drawings and equipment schedules. d. Copy of energy calculations. C Proposed Mechanical Products List: Include products to indicate the following: 1 Manufacturer's name and address. 2. Catalog designation or model number 3 Equipment Schedule Number corresponding to the drawings mark numbers. 4 Rough -in data and dimensions. 5 Performance curves and rated capacities. 6 Motor characteristics and wiring diagrams. 7 Operation characteristics. 8 Airborne noise levels. D Proposed Drawings: Include drawings to indicate the following 1 Detailed HVAC layout to include detailed sheet metal duct layout (location) inlets and outlets, material sizes and type, automatic and manual dampers, hangers and supports, thermostat locations, components and accessories. 2. Detailed HVAC layout will be coordinated with all building features such as Electrical, Plumbing, Structural, etc. Provide drawing sections to clarify equipment/material locations. 3 Details of seismic restraints and seismic calculations as required to meet code. 1 6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS (Performance Specification) 15000 2 A. The Contractor is required to comply with all applicable National, State and Local Codes, Standards, and Ordinances in performing this work. Contractor shall pay for all permits and tests. B All work and materials shall be governed by the recommended practices of AGA, ANSI ASHRAE, ASME, ASTM, American Welding Society American Water Works Association (AWWA) Hydraulic Institute, NBS NEC NEMA, NFPA, SMACNA, UBC UL, UMC UFC and latest adopted editions. 1 7 RECORD DRAWINGS A. In addition to Division 1 General Requirements the following work shall apply 1 As installed drawings. Maintain a set of black line prints of the building plans for the duration of the contract and mark a Record of the Work as installation progresses Dimensions shall be referenced from Visible Building structural features such as bearing walls or columns. 2. Include one set of record drawings with documents required at Completion Requirements. 3 See Section 01770 for other requirements. 1 8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. HVAC 1 Design and installation to conform to IMC IBC ASHRAE, SMACNA, local authorities having jurisdiction, and as directed by the Owners Representative. 2. Specialist Firm. Company regularly engaged and specializing in Commercial Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning systems. 3 Provide all calculations. (Obtain lighting equipment Toads, etc. from Owners Representative or Division 16 Contractor) Load calculations to be clearly marked and include at minimum the following information and calculated data: 19 WARRANTY a. Input (per zone) 1) Materials and associated R and U factors. 2) People Toads; number of people and associated btu /hr per person (cooling) 3) Lighting loads, total watts or watt/sq ft. (cooling) 4) Equipment loads; description of equipment and associated watts /hr or btu /hr (cooling) 5) Minimum outside air for ventilation per code and ASHRAE standards. b Output (per zone) CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1) Square feet. 2) Heating, btu /hr 4 Provide complete energy code compliance forms. GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS (Performance Specification) 15000 3 A. All equipment, apparatus and work shall be free from all defects, shall be fabricated, built and installed to deliver its full rated capacity and efficiency for which it was specifically designed. B Without additional charge replace any work or new material which develops defects, except from abuse, within one year from Owners Representative acceptance. 110 SAFETY A. The contractor will be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the job site, including safety of all persons and property during performance at the Work. B This requirement will apply continuously and not be limited to normal working hours. 1 11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. At least five copies of the Operation and Maintenance (O &M) Manuals shall be submitted and shall contain all manufacturer's data and a complete list of repair and replacement parts necessary for the maintenance of equipment. All recommended oiling methods, filter changes, gasket replacement, preventative maintenance indicating frequency of performance, etc. shall be identified in a cover letter and bound in the front of the O &M manuals. In addition, a written step -by -step detail of the start-up and shut -down procedure shall be incorporated in the letter B. A table of contents shall be included indicating page numbers for major items. In each chapter include operating instructions for each piece of equipment. Include all shop drawings, control drawings, and record drawings. C The Maintenance Manual shall be submitted for approval to the Owner's Representative ten (10) days prior to Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. The contract shall be based upon furnishing all materials and equipment as new of the best grade, and the latest products as listed in printed catalog data. B All articles of a kind shall be standard product of a single manufacturer 2.2 DUCT INSULATION A. Duct Work CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 1 Round Supply and Return Ducts: Flexible glass fiber ANSI /ASTM C612; commercial grade, 'k' value of 0.29 at 75 degrees F 0 002 inch foil scrim facing. Schuller R series Microlite, Pittsburg Coring, Certain Teed, Knauf or approved. Foil scrim facing not required on return air ducts. Install per manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Rectangular Supply and Return Ducts (duct liner). Flexible glass fiber ANSI /ASTM C553 'k' value of 0.24 at 75 degrees F 1 5 lb/cu ft minimum density coated air side for maximum 4 000 ft/min air velocity Schuller Linacoustic, Pittsburg Coring, Certain Teed, Knauf or approved. Install per manufacturer's recommendations. GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS (Performance Specification) 15000 4 A. Duct Work Materials. 2.4 LOW PRESSURE DUCT WORK 2.5 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS A. Grilles, Registers and Diffusers CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 3. Return ducts located on warm side of building insulation are not required to be insulated except for noise reduction. 4 Exhaust ducts are not to be insulated 2.3 DUCT WORK AND DUCT WORK ACCESSORIES 1 General: Non combustible or conforming to requirements for Class 1 air duct materials, or UL 181 2. Steel Ducts. ASTM A525 or ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet, lock- forming quality having zinc coating of 1.25 oz per sq ft for each side in conformance with ASTM A90 3 Fasteners. Rivets, bolts or sheet metal screws. 4 Sealant: Non hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials, liquid used alone or with tape, or heavy mastic. 5 All exposed ductwork in finished spaces to be galvanized steel spiral round. Paint as directed by Owners Representative 6. No exposed flex duct is allowed. Flex duct is permissible at concealed locations and accessible, maximum four feet. B Hangers. One inch by 16 ga. galvanized iron strap or aluminum where applicable secured to structure as recommended by SMACNA. A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards and ASHRAE Handbooks, except as indicated. Provide duct material gages, reinforcing and sealing for operating pressures indicated. B Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not Tess then 1 1/2 times width of duct on center line. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide air foil turning vanes. C Increase duct sizes gradually not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible. Divergence upstream of equipment shall not exceed 30 degrees, convergence downstream shall not exceed 45 degrees. D Provide easements where low pressure duct work conflicts with piping and structure Where easements exceed 10 percent duct area, split into two ducts maintaining original duct area. E. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller with crimp in direction of air flow F Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. 1 All grilles registers and diffusers shall be security grade. 2. Finish as selected by Owners Representative. 3 Manufacturers: Carnes, Metalaire, Price or Titus. GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS (Performance Specification) 15000 5 3.2 HVAC A. Design Parameters 3 Low Pressure Duct Work CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 2.6 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING A. At the completion of the job perform the testing and balancing of the air distribution and heating by an approved independent test and balance agency who specializes in this work. B. Submit three (3) bound copies of complete balancing reports on forms which have been reviewed and approved by the Owner's Representative. Provide with the report marked balancing drawings showing air opening numbers and flow station numbers that correspond to the numbering system in the balancing report (logs) Include approved drawings and report with completion requirements. C Test, adjust and balance the air distribution system to within minus 5 percent plus 10 percent of values indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 31 GENERAL A. Contractor to visit site prior to submitting bid. During visit contractor shall determine existing systems and exact conditions. 1 Design Temperatures (Occupied Areas) Descriotion Inside Outside Winter 70 Deg F Per ASHRAE, 99 6% Summer 75 Deg F Per ASHRAE, 1% 2. Design Temperatures (Computer Rooms) Description Inside Outside Winter 68 Deg F Per ASHRAE, 99 6% Summer 68 Deg F Per ASHRAE, 1% a. Size duct work at 0 08 inches of water column per 100 feet of duct or less and not to exceed air velocities as follows. 1) Branch Ducts 600 900 feet per minute 2) Connection to air inlets and outlets 500 600 feet per minute 4 Select grilles registers and diffusers based upon throw drop and noise criteria. Design not to exceed the following Noise Criteria. a. Staff Areas Offices 35 5 Size exhaust systems according to the following minimum criteria: a. Interview 11412 air changes per hour GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS (Performance Specification) 15000 6 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 3 3 TESTS 6 All duct work to be concealed in ceiling space. Do Not Cut any Structural Building Members Unless Approved by Architect and Owners Representative in Writing., B Installation 1 Install duct work to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space Install all equipment per manufacture's requirements and at locations as directed by Owners Representative. 2. Provide clearance for access to filters, coils, dampers and equipment requiring routine servicing 3 Provide security type access doors for dampers and equipment that require servicing Coordinate size and location of access doors. 4 During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open duct work to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. 5 Install flexible duct connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment. 6 Provide manual volume dampers at points on supply return and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing Install accessible manual volume dampers at all takeoffs to air inlets and outlets. 7 Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to Architectural features, symmetry and lighting arrangement. 8. Install diffusers to duct work with air tight connection. A. The Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling obtaining permits, making payments of all fees and /or services to test the mechanical systems as specified and as required by local authorities, including balancing of HVAC system. 1 Any deficiencies, which appear during testing shall be corrected before progressing further No equipment or other portions of the mechanical installation shall be covered or concealed until all required tests are satisfactorily completed. 2. Upon completion, a written certification shall be furnished to attest that the tests have been duly performed. Include a copy with the required operation and maintenance manuals. B An operating test can be requested by the Architect and Owner's Representative at any time to demonstrate satisfactory functioning of any portion or the entire mechanical installation. C A final test shall be made by the Contractor at the completion of the project and after the mechanical system has been in operation for a period of time Before final acceptance, all defects which appear shall be corrected 3 4 IDENTIFICATION A. General: Permanently label equipment components of each mechanical system to correspond to the contractors drawings. Use plastic laminate with adhesive. Utilize standard markers for identification 3 5 FINAL ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS (Performance Specification) 15000 7 A. All equipment shall be checked for proper operation and final acceptance. Clean all equipment remove shipping labels. 3 6 AS -BUILT (RECORD) DRAWINGS CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Submit as -built (record) drawings (in Autocad 2000 format) to the Owner's Representative 10 days prior to final completion. The value of these as -built (determined by the Owner's Representative's representative) will be withheld from the Contractor until they are submitted in approved form. 3 7 COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS A. Upon completion of the work and adjustment of all equipment, all systems shall be tested by the Contractor to demonstrate to the Owner's Representative's representative that all equipment furnished and installed or connected under the provisions of these specifications function mechanically in the manner required. At the time of this demonstration, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owners Representative's representative bound copies of the approved operation and maintenance manuals and record drawings. END OF SECTION 15000 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS (Performance Specification) 15000 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section is specifically applicable to the Basic Electrical Requirements, in addition to Division 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 16000 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS (Performance Specification) PART 1 GENERAL 01 General Requirements. B The General Conditions and General Requirements (Division 01) apply to this Section. C This Section also includes provisions from Sections 16050 16110 16120 16140 16450 16510 and 16720 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. A completed operating installation of all electrical systems specified and required shall be provided. All installations shall be in strict compliance with the Specifications, Drawings, General Conditions and Contract Terms, all applicable current State and Local Codes and Ordinances. In case of conflicts, the quality deemed best by the Owners Representative, will govern. B This Work is Design /Build. 1 3 SCOPE OF WORK A. Contractor shall provide lighting, power fire alarm systems design low voltage conduit, labor and material construction services associated with the demolition and remodeling of the existing East 3rd Street Building Area. Reference Architectural drawings for Area of Work. B A State of Washington Licensed Supervising Electrician whom complies with State of Washington Requirements shall provide the Electrical design C Refer to Architectural Drawings for some required equipment, fixtures etc. B Contractor is to verify requirements and submit and obtain approval from Washington State Bureau of Labor and Industries, if required. Contractor is responsible for paying all costs for obtaining a permit. 14 DRAWINGS A. Prepare and submit electrical floor plans to the Architect on reproducible bond Architectural 22' x 34 drawings after gaining approval from Washington State Bureau of Labor and Industries. Submit drawings on a disc in electronic format using AutoCAD version 2000 Show all details legibly and neatly Architect to provide floor plan in electronic format for Contractors use. B Prior to final acceptance of this Work the Contractor shall submit the following to the Architect: 1 Electrical Design Drawings. GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS (Performance Specification) 16000 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 2. Record Drawings. 3 Operating and Maintenance Manuals. 4 Certificates of Code Authority Acceptance. 5 Contractors Labor and Material Warrantees. 6 Other project documentation specified herein 1 5 CODES AND PERMITS A. This Work shall comply with the latest Rules and Regulations of the State and Local Authorities Having Jurisdiction National Electrical Code International Fire and Building Codes. B Obtain and pay for all required permits, plan check charges and certificates. Deliver Certificates of Acceptance from the Code Enforcing Authorities to the Architect. 1 6 COOPERATION WITH OTHER CRAFTS A. Cooperate with other crafts (or contracts) as may be necessary for the proper execution of this Work. B Coordinate with Owner's low voltage vendor Provide and install 3/4 -inch diameter conduit for all devices indicated in Drawings. 1 7 INSPECTION, OBSERVATION AND TESTS A. Provide one (1) journeyman, tools, meters, instruments and other test equipment required to properly complete the Work. Contractor to remove and replace trims, covers, fixtures, etc. and test materials, systems, methods and Workmanship in the presence of the Architect for final review at completion of this Work. 1 8 GUARANTEE AND CLEAN -UP A. Keep tools and materials in an orderly manner throughout the construction period. Upon completion of this Work; remove all excess materials, tools, dirt and debris from the job site. B Leave the entire electrical system installed under this Work in clean, dust -free and proper Working order C Without additional charge, replace any Work or material, which develops defects except from abuse, within one (1) year from acceptance unless otherwise noted. D Lamp guarantee is from date of Architect occupancy or acceptance, six (6) months for fluorescent and H I D lamps. E. Labor for Tamp installation is to be provided by the Contractor for a thirty (30) day period 1 9 SPREAD OF FIRE OR PRODUCTS OF COMBUSTION A. Electrical installations in hollow spaces, vertical shafts and ventilation or air handling ducts shall be so made that the possible spread of fire or products of combustion will not be substantially increased. GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS (Performance Specification) 16000 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 16000 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS (Performance Specification) 16000 3 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS (Performance Specification) PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Scratched, marred or deformed materials will not be accepted B Fixtures, material or equipment in wet cartons or boxes, stored in or exposed to rain, water dust, dirt or snow are not acceptable. 1.2 APPROVAL OF MATERIALS A. Electrical materials shall be of the type and quality indicated, new listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories and shall bear their label wherever standards have been established and they regularly furnish label service. 13 MANUFACTURER A. Like items shall be from one manufacturer i.e. fixture types, switches, receptacles, breakers, panels etc. 1 4 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prior to completion of the job and before final payment, the Contractor shall furnish the Architect three (3) sets of operating and maintenance brochures for equipment installed Operating and maintenance brochures shall include descriptive and technical data, maintenance and operation procedures, wiring diagrams, spare parts lists, service representative, supplier for replacement parts, etc. B Assemble data into individual sets and bind into plastic- covered, hard backed, loose -leaf binders arranged for side binding. Segregate respective items into related groups (starters, fixtures, etc.) and provide index tab for each group C At the completion of project, and at a time scheduled by the Architect, assemble key mechanics vendors, factory representatives and similar personnel required to explain all facets of maintenance and operation of the installed system to the operating personnel. Instructions shall include actual operation of systems and methods of maintenance D Provide all incidentals, hangers, brackets, supports, framing, backing signal transformers, relays, etc. required to complete the system or systems, in a safe and satisfactory Working condition, shall be provided and installed as part of this Work. E. All openings associated with this Work shall be seated with EPO -TEC product number 200 1 5 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS (Performance Specification) 16050 1 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Provide Raychem ShrinkMark system Cable Markers. B Nameplates shall be engraved three -layer laminated plastic, white letters on black background 1 6 WIRING METHOD A. Wiring throughout area shall be metallic concealed raceway system with flush mounted outlets, cabinets, panels, etc. B All Work shall be executed in a Workmanlike manner and shall present a neat and mechanical appearance upon completion. C Cable and tree all wiring in panels, enclosures, and cabinets; for power and signal. Use plastic ties in panels, enclosures, cabinets, and all open cable or wire installations. D Wet, and Damp Location: Comply with Code requirements. E. Recondition or replace any damage to this Work or other crafts. 1 7 ELECTRICAL DESIGN CRITERIA A. Branch circuit loading shall be as follows. 1 Convenience outlets shall be calculated based upon a minimum of 200 volt- amperes per device. A maximum of 1 400 volt- amperes per 20- ampere 120V branch circuit shall be used. 2. Maximum lighting Toad per 20- ampere 120V branch circuit shall not exceed 1 500 volt amperes. B Devices. 1 Electrical device locations are indicated on the Architectural and Electrical Drawings. 2. Branch circuits requiring extending and demolition shall be documented on Design /Build Drawings. C Lighting and Controls: 1 Any new fixtures in the lighting system shall be designed utilizing energy efficient fluorescent 32 watt T8, 3 000K, CRI 82 lamps. Ballasts shall be fused protected, electronic solid state, with THD less than 10 2. The average illumination level shall be designed at twenty (20) foot candles thirty (30) inches above finished floor 3. The fixtures shall be recessed, with built -in emergency -light and battery back -up as noted, to match existing and shall be approved by the Architect. 4 Lighting control design shall be from semi -flush ceiling mounted ultrasonic occupancy sensors. Sensors shall be time -delay adjustable (15 seconds to 15 minutes), and shall provide exhaust fan on /off control. D Fire Alarm: 1 System design modifications shall be made in compliance with Local Fire Marshal approval. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS (Performance Specification) 16050 a. Fire alarm system for Project Area is to be separate zone as required by Fire Marshal. E. Construction Documents. 1 Provide neat, legible design scaled drawings to the Architect. Drawing to include symbol schedule power lighting and fire alarm system wiring details. 2. The electrical devices will be shown on the drawings circuited with home runs to respective panels The phase conductor shall be shown as small line, the neutral conductor shall be shown as a larger line, and the ground conductor shall be shown as in figure 1 3 There shall be a lighting floor plan with fixtures, controls, and branch circuiting shown. 4 There shall be one power and signal floor plan with device and fire alarm branch circuiting shown. 5 Provide symbol fixture, and panel schedules on the drawings. 6 Provide lighting calculations either attached to the drawings or on 8 1/2' X 11 paper 7 Record Drawings shall show all fixtures with types and all electrical devices with circuit numbers. 1 8 LOCATION AND INSTALLATION A. Distance of device outlet boxes above finished floor shall comply with ADA Disabilities Act, and at locations approved by the Architect. 1 9 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and tape labels. B Install nameplates and tape labels parallel to equipment lines. C Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using screws, rivets, or adhesive Secure nameplate to inside face of recessed panel board doors in finished locations. D Install branch circuit tape labels inside duplex receptacle finish plates. 1 10 NAMEPLATE ENGRAVING SCHEDULE 1 11 WIRE IDENTIFICATION CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION sir Figure 1 A. Provide nameplates to identify all electrical power distribution, fire alarm, and receptacles. Letter Height shall be 1/4 inch for main distribution panel, panel boards, and disconnect switches, and 1/8 inch for all other equipment. A. Provide wire markers on each conductor at Toad connections, panel boards, pull boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS (Performance Specification) 16050 3 112 SUPPORTS CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Conduits shall be supported from the structure. Penetration of roof deck is not permitted for hangers, clamps, etc. Provide metal conduit, pipe hangers /supports, and straps. Supports to provide (5) times ultimate weight of equipment to be supported. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS (Performance Specification) 16050 4 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 16110 CONDUITS RACEWAYS BOXES AND FITTINGS (Performance Specification) PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 CONDUITS AND SURFACE METAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS A. Provide Raceways and Conduits of specified types for all Electrical System Wiring. All Fittings, Boxes, Hangers and Appurtenances shall be included. B Manufacturer Triangle, National Allied, Carlon, Greenfield or approved. 1 Zinc coated Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (E.M T 2. Galvanized, interlocked Steel, flexible metallic Conduit and liquid- tight. 12 FITTINGS A. Manufacturer Appleton, Efcor Midwest, Raco T B Steel City or approved. 14 BOXES 1 Threaded insulated throat or plastic Bushings. 2. Insulated grounding Bushings. 3 Flex Connectors shall be malleable squeeze type. 4 E.M.T Steel Set Screw Connectors and /or Couplings. 13 FASTENERS A. Manufacturer Caddy Minerallac or approved. 1 Con clips for support of Thin -wall Conduit or flexible metallic Conduit. 2. Conduit Clips for support of Conduit outside Beams. 3 EMT two hole Straps for support of Conduit from structure. 4 EMT Jiffy Clips for support of Flex Conduit. A. Manufacturer Raco Steel -City Bell, Hubbell, Appleton or approved. 1 Galvanized stamped steel with screw ears and knock out plugs, mounting type as required, 4' W x 1 1/2' D minimum. 2. Boxes exposed to weather and installed in contact with earth shall be cast iron alloy with gasketed screw cover and watertight hubs. 3 Solid gang box covers single, double as required and 3/4 inch 4 Boxes exceeding 4 11/16 inch square shall be welded steel construction with screw cover 5 Mud ring depth to be coordinated with finished materials depth. 1 5 CONDUIT SIZING ARRANGEMENT AND SUPPORT CONDUITS RACEWAYS BOXES AND FITTINGS (Performance Specification) 16110 1 A. Conceal all Conduits in finished spaces. B. All conduits are to be securely supported and fastened at six (6) foot intervals and within eighteen (18) inches of every outlet, ell, and panel termination. Conduit runs, which are grouped together or larger than 1 -1/4 inch, are to be supported from building structure by Kindorf or Unistrut steel channel. C Conduit may be sized to the minimum National Electric Code. Minimum conduit trade size shall be 1/2 inch. D Maintain minimum 6 -inch clearance between conduit and piping. Maintain 12 -inch clearance between conduit and heat sources such as flues, and heating appliances. E. Arrange conduit supports to prevent distortion of alignment by wire pulling operations. Fasten conduit using galvanized straps, lay -in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, or bolted split stamped galvanized hangers. 1 6 CONDUIT INSTALLATION A. Flexible metal conduit shall be installed at ventilating equipment. B All conduits shall be cut square reamed smooth and with all fittings drawn up tight. C Jacket flexible metal conduit shall be installed at locations exposed to weather or damp areas. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 16110 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION CONDUITS RACEWAYS BOXES AND FITTINGS (Performance Specification) 16110 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 t 1 1 PART 1 GENERAL CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS (Performance Specification) 11 CONDUCTORS A. Manufacturer Anaconda, Triangle, Hatfield, Rome or approved. B All Branch Circuit and Feeder Conductors shall be 600 -volt insulation Copper soft drawn C Insulation types approved shall be THW THHN and THWN Number 8 and larger shall be stranded Class B D The minimum Conductor size shall be number 12 AWG unless otherwise specified herein. E. Color -code all Feeder and Branch Circuit Conductors in a consistent phase -to -phase manner Phases A -B -C left -to -right and phases A -B -C top -to- bottom. F Color coding of conductors. Phase -to -Phase Voltage I Phase A Phase .B I Phase C 1 Neutral I Ground Under 250 -volts 1 Black Red I Blue 1 White 1 Green 1.2 CONNECTORS A. Branch Circuit Connectors shall be Scotch -Lok, Ideal Wire Nut, and Scotch 3M or approved 1 3 CABLE SPLICES A. Split -bolt, compression terminal, tool applied sleeves, Burndy Kearney or approved. B Vinyl plastic electrical tape, flame- retardant, equal to Scotch #33 or approved. C Termination lugs for number 12 AWG conductors and /or smaller shall be spade -flared tool applied. 1 4 GENERAL WIRING METHODS A. Use no wire smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits, and no smaller than 14 AWG for control wiring B Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 -volt branch circuit home runs longer than 75 feet. C Place an equal number of conductors for each phase of a circuit in same raceway D Splice only in junction or outlet boxes. E. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panel boards. CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS (Performance Specification) 16120 1 1 6 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS A. Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full capacity of conductors without perceptible temperature rise. CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION F Make conductor lengths for parallel circuits equal. 1 5 CABLE INSTALLATION A. Provide protection for exposed cables where subject to damage. B. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. C Conductors routed through fluorescent fixtures, mounted in a continuous row shall have an insulation rating not Tess than 90° Celsius. Conductors shall be rated as fixture wire. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS (Performance Specification) 16120 2 PART 1 GENERAL C Receptacles: PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 16140 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES (Performance Specification) 11 MATERIALS A. Wiring Devices shall be specification grade, Ivory color B Acceptable grade Devices to those specified will be Pass Seymour Leviton, Hubbell or equal All Lighting Switches and Duplex Receptacles installed shall be of the same Manufacturer and have identical appearance 1 Duplex 20 ampere, 3 -wire, 2 -pole Grounding Hubbell 5362 series, Leviton 5362 series or equal. 1.2 INSTALLATION A. Install wall switches with OFF position down B Install wall mounted convenience receptacles grounding pole on bottom. C Install devices and wall plates flush and level D Devices and Finish Plates shall be installed plumb with Building lines. Finish Plates and Devices shall not be installed until final painting is complete. Scratched or splattered Finish Plates and Devices will not be accepted. E. Receptacles shall be tested for polarity WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES (Performance Specification) 16140 1 SECTION 16450 GROUNDING (Performance Specification) PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Ground equipment enclosures, exposed non current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway systems, grounding conductor in raceways and cables, and duplex receptacle grounds. 1.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 16450 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION GROUNDING (Performance Specification) 16450 1 SECTION 16510 LIGHTING FIXTURES (Performance Specification) PART 1 GENERAL CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION 11 ACCESSORIES A. Fluorescent Lamps and Ballasts: 1 Provide 5 percent Tamp spares and 2 percent ballast spares. 1.2 MANUFACTURERS A. See Light Fixture Schedule. B Lamps General Electric, Norelco Sylvania or approved. 1 Fluorescent: F32T8 R.S 32 watt. C Ballasts. 1 Solid -state electronic with less than 10% THD Thermal protection Class P Advance Magnetic, or approved. 1 3 INSTALLATION A. Install lamps in fixtures. B Install recessed fixtures to permit removal of lamps from below C Coordinate installation of Fixtures with other trades to avoid conflicts. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 16510 LIGHTING FIXTURES (Performance Specification) 16510 1 13 OPERATION CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION SECTION 16720 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (Performance Specification) PART 1 GENERAL 11 SCOPE A. Furnish and install new equipment compatible with existing County Courthouse fire alarm system; verify with Owner 1.2 REQUIREMENTS A. System equipment shall be UL, and FM listed. B Fire alarm system and installation shall comply with International Fire Code. A. The system shall independently process local fire alarms reported by the devices properly connected to it and properly programmed and shall annunciate in the manner described in D thru I below The system shall be expandable to include Level 2 in the future. B The new sub system shall communicate via digital multiplexing techniques over the data communication network and shall have the Owner selectable capability to 1 Report alarms and trouble by specific device in their respective areas of coverage, or 2. Report alarms and trouble by area of coverage only C The new fire alarm control panel shall incorporate circuitry to provide self- diagnostic procedures and to continuously monitor communications and data processing operations. The MFACP shall supervise and monitor communications with the local FACP D The activation of a manual station, heat detector smoke detector or any other approved initiating device anywhere in the system, connected to its proper monitor point and properly addressed, shall cause the following operations: 1 Identify the area in alarm on the liquid crystal display on the door of the MFACP with the assigned English language message and cause a common 'alarm' LED to flash and sound a local tone. 2. Identify the device in alarm on the liquid crystal display on the door of the local FACP connected to the point in alarm with the assigned English language message, causing a common 'alarm' LED to flash and sound a local tone. 3 Identify the area in alarm on the main remote liquid crystal display at the building entrance vestibule with the assigned English language message and sound a workstation alarm 4 Activate audible and visual evacuation signals. Also activate the weatherproof hom/strobe mounted outside the building in which the alarm occurs. 5 If the activating device is a duct detector signal the respective air handling units via interfacing relays to shut down the air handling equipment and operate individual smoke dampers 6 Activate Central Reporting circuit from the MFACP as directed FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (Performance Specification) 16720 1 14 QUALIFICATIONS CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION E. A trouble condition shall be indicated on the liquid crystal displays at the corresponding local annunciator and local FACP and the MFACP 1 Removal of a smoke detector from its base 2. An open or short in the field wiring of any circuit 3. Removal of a control module 4 Loss of primary power 5 A ground fault on any detector or audible /visual circuit or DC power line within the system 6 Loss of battery or auxiliary power 7 Manual fan shutdown through the fire alarm system 8. Failure of a self- diagnostic test 9 Failure of system communications or processing F Trouble conditions shall be indicated at the locations noted above by a distinct visual and audible signal, which shall differentiate trouble and supervisory conditions. The control unit audible signal shall be capable of being momentarily silenced with a silence switch at each annunciator location. The silenced trouble or supervisory signal shall sound again upon restoration of the system to normal. When restored to normal the following English message shall appear on all liquid crystal displays: 'System Normal' G Alarm notification signals shall be capable of being silenced by opening the FACP or MFACP and operating the proper acknowledge switch. An acknowledge switch shall also be operable from the local liquid crystal annunciator for the system. Operation of this switch will silence the signals only The displays shall indicate that the alarm has been so silenced. Operation of this switch will not turn off the visible portion of the alarm notification signals, this shall only be accomplished through the operation of the reset switch. Subsequent activation of any initiation device shall reactivate the notification signals. Restoring the initiating device to normal will permit operation of the reset switch at the liquid crystal display at the FACP the MFACP and the local liquid crystal display thereby placing the system back to normal. H All liquid crystal displays (at the FACPs and local annunciators) shall indicate the following information relative to the alarm or abnormal condition of any corresponding point in the sub- system 1 42- character custom location label 2. Type of device (smoke, pull station, water flow etc.). 3 Print status (alarm, trouble, supervisory) Alarm, supervisory and trouble conditions shall be available for chronological review on all liquid crystal displays. J System operation shall be powered from the primary building power system. Sealed, automatically charged, maintenance -free batteries shall provide secondary (backup) power sufficient for sixty (60) hours of system operation followed by five (5) minutes of alarm. Batteries shall automatically recharge to 80 of full charge within 8 hours of restoration of normal primary power A. Installer Company specializing in fire alarm with five (5) years documented experience. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (Performance Specification) 16720 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 15 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data. Provide wiring diagrams, data sheets, and equipment ratings, layout, dimensions, and finishes. B Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Submit manufacturer's certificate indicating system meets or exceeds specified requirements. C Submit floor plan layouts and detail Drawings approved by the local jurisdiction for approval by the Owner prior to start of construction. 1 6 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION A. Submit documents and include location of end -of -line devices, cable routing. 1 7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit data. Include operating instructions, and maintenance and repair procedures, and parts list. 1 8 INSTALLATION A. Install system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Coordinate with electrical Contractor for any power requirements. B All wiring shall be installed in compliance with the provisions of the National Electric Code Article 760A and C Power limited Fire Protective signaling Circuits. Metallic raceway shall be installed at all flush boxes for manual alarm stations, and fire alarm bells, and below eight (8) feet from finished floor C Junction boxes shall be painted red and labeled 'FIRE ALARM' 1 9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test in accordance with NFPA 72H and local fire department requirements. 1 10 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Provide manufacturer's field services. B Include services of certified technician to supervise installation, adjustments, final connections and system testing 1 11 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE COLOR CODE A. Provide fire alarm circuit conductors with color coded insulation and in each junction box as follows. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (Performance Specification) 16720 3 1 Power Branch Circuit Conductors. Red, white. 2. Initiating Device Circuit: Red. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 16720 CLALLAM COUNTY 3 STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (Performance Specification) 16720 4 1 r r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ARCH SYMBOLS 1 A I I i T COPYRIGHT BRICK CERAMIC TILE CONCRETE CONCRETE BLOCK EARTH 1 GYPSUM BOARD INSULATION BLANKET INSULATION RIGID METAL PLYWOOD WATER PROOFING WOOD BLOCKING WOOD BLKG. CONT FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET ELECTRIC WATER COOLER ACCESS PANEL 2009 COLUMN LINE ROOM NAME/NUMBER ROOM_NAME A2oo DOOR NUMBER ELEVATION SECTION DETAIL 1 1 1 A2.1 WALLS GLAZING CEILING HEIGHT KEY NOTES STATION POINT PROPERTY LINE ROOF ELEVATIONS GRADE ELEVATIONS BY BEAMAN ARCH. LTD. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 0 ARCH SYMBOLS N. TYPE OF GLAZING (SEE SCHEDULE) HORIZONTAL BLINDS (SEE SPECIFICATIONS) (NOTE) TOR TOD ELEV(E) ELEV(N) CORNERGUARD (Refer to detail X/X where Indicated) CG DOOR SUFFIX FOR MULTIPLE DOORS ROOM NUMBER WHERE DOOR OCCURS ELEVATION IDENTIFICATION SHEET WHERE ELEVATION IS DRAWN SECTION IDENTIFICATION SHEET WHERE SECTION IS DRAWN DETAIL IDENTIFICATION SHEET WHERE DETAIL IS DRAWN AREA SHOWN ON LARGE SCALE DETAIL TYPE OF WALL (SEE WALL NOTES) FRAMES TYPE (SEE SCHEDULE) FIRE RATING OR SEE DOOR SCHEDULE TOR TOP OF ROOF ELEVATION TOD TOP OF METAL DECK ELEVATION EXISTING GRADE ELEVATION SHEET A0.00 A1.01 A2.01 A2.02 A2.02E A2.02F A2.03 A2.04 A2.05 A4.01 A4.02 A9.01 A9.02 A9.03 A9.04 A9.05 A9.06 INDEX OF DRAWINGS SHEET TITLE COVER SHEET SITE PLAN DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN FLOOR PLAN ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLAN DESIGN BUILD FLOOR FINISHES PLAN SCHEDULES NOTES WALL TYPES WALL TYPES DEMOLITION CEILING PLAN REFLECTED CEILING PLAN INTERIOR ELEVATIONS CABINETRY DETAILS CABINETRY DETAILS DETAILS DOOR WINDOW TYPES DETAILS DETAILS DETAILS NOTE. CONTRACTOR PRE CONSTRUCTION TESTING OF EXISTING CONCRETE SLAB -ON -GRADE FOR ACCEPTABLE MOISTURE LEVELS IS REQUIRED SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 09654 LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS. BID PACKAGE DESIGN TEAM VICINITY PLAN ARCHITECT BEAMAN ARCHITECTURE, LTD Michael Beaman PO Box 86038 Portland, OR 97286 503.236.3300 503.239.9191 fax mb @beamanarch.com OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE CLALLAM COUNTY Joel Winborn 223 East Fourth St. Suite 7 Port Angeles, WA 98362 360 417.2429 360 417.2395 b_i rc Beaman Arc iitecture, Ltd. P.O. Box 86038 Portland, Orego 97286 tel.: (503) 2363300 fax.. (503) 2349191 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL 1 RENOVATION PROJECT 620708CH 4528 AE STATE OF WASHINGTON CLALLAM COUNTY 111 EAST 3RD STREET PORT ANGELES, WA :EY REGISTERED TITLE. COVER SHEET ARCHITECT PROJECT CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL ONE RENOVATION DATE OCTOBER 2009 JOB No 09102 SHEET NO A0.00 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 e 1 1 I COPYRIGHT 2009 BY BEAMAN ARCH. LTD. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. SITE PLAN 1 /16 =1 KEY NOTES: 01732 -01 01732 -01 EXISTING CONCRETE WHEEL STOP TO BE REMOVED; PATCH CONCRETE PAVEMENT 01732 -02 01732 -02. EXISTING WALL MOUNTED HC SIGN TO BE REMOVED. 01732 -03 01732 -03. NEW PAINTED HC DROP -OFF AREA AND PAINTED HC SYMBOL, AS REQUIRED BY STATE OF WASHINGTON. 01732 -04 01732 -04. NEW GROUND- MOUNTED HC SIGN; SEE DETAIL. 1' RADIUS (TYP 16 GA. GALV STL SIGN PAINTED W/ BLUE BACKGROUND REFLECTIVE WHITE SYMBOL 1' HIGH REFLECTIVE WHITE LETTERS SCREW TO POST W/ (3) #14 X 3/4' SCREWS (VERIFY W/ STATE LOCAL REQ'S.) cni NOT TO SCALE 1'J b_ikkrch Beaman Arc litecture, Ltd. P.O. Box 86038 Portland, Oregon 97286 tel. (503) 236-3300 fax.: (503) 2399191 .--I s .4 12' 4528 2 GALV CHANNEL SECT RESERVED I I VAN L s• 4L s L 12' L 'I FINISH GRADE CORE DRILL EXISTING CONCRETE SIDEWALK AND INSTALL NEW CONCRETE FOOTING AS INDICATED .4 s HANDICAP PARKING SIGN Co REGISTERED TITLE. SITE PLAN ARCHITECT /PROJECT CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL ONE RENOVATION AEL :E• STATE OF WASHINGTON TEXT PER STATE H.C. CODE DATE OCTOBER 2009 JOB No 09102 SHEET NO Al 01 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01732 -10 I 1 1 -1 -+1 1 I J I 1 01732 -08 0 1I 1732 -01 01732- 11 P PANEL I L 7 1 1_+ 01732 -09 I -I 1 01732 -07 01732 -10 12' -2 3/4" 01732 -14 01732 -18 01732 -13 01732 -17 01732 -07 01732 -02 a. ea, —i ,4— I —I d TM 1 -1-1-1-1-j 1 i H -r ,v- 1- T r I '1 I 7 T- T -IT1 11 J 1 G 1 P AN EL I IB -I !11732 -07 1 1 Y 01732 -16 L I 1 1 01732 -09 1 01732-11 �J I LJ I JLJirt:= Iiii 1- j -T -T r f Y fY J I t- I -1 --I II I J �_4"{ 1 7 I7 I I I L7_ �1 iii rl I 1 1 1 J. VI�J[ 11 1 r -1 T, r I I+ 1 t- 1- T1rl -i- -I -r i r 1 1 a- 01732 -10 I_7 L 1 -I -1-1 11 I 1J -T I -L 1 -L7 -I I I I I Ta L I_ I _I I F I I I LI__J L_I_L I I I I I TJ 1 1 I II i�� It 1_T-__ rrrt T T 7 rT j�rT t -1-11 II I -1-4--1- III 1_4 fg -T T i I -a 1 -17 I 1_L1Jr9' II 1 1 1 I I I 117LJ lJ LJ L___$ J 01732 -07 I i 1 i i r-- Ilrr i 1 1 1 1 1 r 01732 -03 r I I I( 01732 03 I I (01732 -03 tx -1 ,.t -1 7 I II 01732 -01 1 1 1 ,f, 1- TYPi J -T_ 7 i 7 01732-11 A I r� r 1 ,-T- -r r ii. I 1 I L� 11 I I T 1 _r_ -Tlrl- -1 -L 1�I I IL 1J I I �L I H7 H -I I 1 I 1 1 t -1 -1--11 I 1 I I I I 1 1 1 1 1 L7_L1_L1_I r T TJI T -I l-I I F L �I I t 1 t r -L 7 I -I --1� L1_L1_I_1 _i_ I I' 7 -I -1---1- �-I' I- 1 Ir F 1 ZSZ LSZSv 1- T7- r- t- f- J_1- Y1_LJ -11 -r r7- 1- 7- 1 T-7 -r-i7 1_.!_ -1- 1- 7- 1- '169 1 I I 7 I t j T J 1 11 7 -h -I- .I- 1 4 I 1 I I I F69 1 I I r -r I I` v1 I I I 1 1 TJ T7 r J i -68--1 I s 1- 4__i- J -7 -L +I I L 1 _I I 1 I I I -1I1 t 1 I 1 r 1 r7 j I_I I_ I I 7- NOTE. EXISTING SLAB -ON -GRADE IS TO CLEANED OF ALL ADHESIVE RESIDUE, IMPERFECTIONS, ETC. AND READY FOR BASIC FLOORING PREP 01732 -07 COPYRIGHT 2009 BY BEAMAN ARCH. LTD. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED T I T r7 rT I TJ T7 I r -1- 1 -T4 -1 7- I-4- I- -4- -I-I I I��� 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I Iw L 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01732 -07 KEY NOTES. 01732 -01 01732 -01 EXISTING 2X4 STUDS AT 16' O.C. WITH 1/2" GWB EACH SIDE, 8' -0" AFF TO BE REMOVED. 01732 -02 01732 -02. EXISTING 2X6 STUDS FURRING AT 16' O.C. BATT INSUL. 8' -0" AFF TO REMAIN. REMOVE 1/2" GWB FINISH; REMOVE BOTTOM 24" OF BATT INSUL. AND REPLACE TO MATCH. 01732 -03 01732 -03. EXISTING STRUCTURAL COLUMNS AND BEAMS ABOVE TO REMAIN. 01732 -04 01732 -04. EXISTING 2X4 STUD WALL AT 16" O.C. TO REMAIN; REMOVE 1/2" GWB FINISH EACH SIDE. 01732 -05 01732 -05. EXISTING 2X6 STUD WALL AT 16" O.C. TO REMAIN; REMOVE 1/2' GWB FINISH EACH SIDE. 01732 -06 01732 -06. EXISTING CONCRETE FOUNDATION WALL TO REMAIN. 01732 -14 93' -0" 68' 2" NOTE. EXISTING ELECTRICAL PANELS 1A 1B ARE TO BE REMOVED WITH ALL ASSOCIATED WIRING BACK TO METER (ASSOCIATED METERS WILL NO LONGER BE USED). EXISTING ELECTRICAL PANEL 1D IS TO BE REMOVED AND REPLACED WITH A PANEL SIZED TO HANDLE ALL LOADS FOR LEVEL 1 SEE SHEET A2.02E FOR LOCATIONS. K 01732 -07 i 01732 -07 J CO 01732 -08 )-.J -g I'll III II III I II I 144 u x�. 4� c I II I L 01732 -07 01732 -07 EXISTING PLUMBING PIPING AND DRAIN PIPING TO BE CAPPED AND ABANDONED UNLESS CALLED OUT FOR RE -USE ON FLOOR PLAN. 01732 -08 01732 -08. EXISTING DRAINAGE CLEAN -OUT TO BE REMOVED AND EXTENDED TO FLOOR LEVEL. 01732 -09 01732 -09. EXISTING ELECTRICAL PANEL TO BE REMOVED CIRCUITS TO BE CONSOLIDATED IN NEW PANEL, SEE FLOOR PLAN. 01732 -10 01732 -10. EXISTING PLASTIC LAMINATE CABINETRY TO BE REMOVED. 01732 -11 01732 -11 EXISTING 2X4 4' -0" HIGH WALL WITH 1/2" GWB ALL FACES TO BE REMOVED. 01732 -12 01732 -12. EXISTING (32) 3/4"� HOLES THRU SLAB -ON -GRADE TO BE PATCHED WITH HYDRAULIC CEMENT N a 0 0 0 0 0 0 m o K r 01732 -09 II''IIIIII 01732 -18 TYP METER BASES I 01732 -17 01732 -12 01732 -02 TYP 1 1/8"=1 -0' n r P \(LEVEL 2) HOUSE 111 I' II II II J 1k� Beaman Arc,itecture, Ltd. P.O. Box 86038 Portland, Oregon 97286 tel.: (503) 236-3300 fax.: (503) 239-9191 1 b_ rch 12' 7 1/4" LL 01732 -02 7,75 TYP eklA 01732 -10 TYP 01732 -08 co-if 01732 -05 01732 -06) 01732 -04 1 L IL 1� II u IT 01732 -12 II II 4528 y DEMO FLOOR PLAN REGISTERED ARCHITECT STATE OF WASHINGTON 01732 05 0 01732 -07 TYP 01732 -07 DEMOLITION LEGEND ITEMS SHOWN WITH A CONTINUOUS LINE ARE TO REMAIN; ITEMS SHOWN WITH A DASHED LINE ARE TO BE REMOVED OR RELOCATED UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE. n tfi 4 TELEPHONE OR COMPUTER DATA WALL JACK TO BE REMOVED 4T\ (j) II II u I FE, 01732 -13 01732 -14 01732 -15 01732 -18 01732 -16 PROJECT CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL ONE RENOVATION 110V WALL OUTLET TO BE REMOVED' REMOVE OUTLET BOX AND WIRING (TO PANEL OR JUNCTION BOX). 220V WALL OUTLET (REFER TO NOTE ABOVE) WALL SWITCH TO BE REMOVED WALL- MOUNTED THERMOSTAT SEE MECH. FD FLOOR DRAIN, SEE MECH. TOILET ALL ASSOCIATE PLUMBING TO BE REMOVED PATCH FLOOR WITH CONC. LAVATORY ALL ASSOCIATED PLUMBING TO BE REMOVED EXISTING DOOR AND FRAME TO BE REMOVED SALVAGE DOOR FOR RE -USE. FIRE EXTINGUISHER TO BE REMOVED AND SALVAGED FOR OWNER'S RE -USE. KEY NOTES (CONT 01732 -13. EXISTING 4 "0 PLUMBING DRAIN FEEDING SECOND FLOOR PLUMBING FIXTURES, TO REMAIN ALONG WITH ASSOCIATED WALL FRAMING. 01732 -14. EXISTING SHEET VINYL FLOORING TO BE REMOVED; BEAD BLAST FLOOR AND PATCH AS REQUIRED. 01732 -15. EXISTING VCT FLOORING TO BE REMOVED; BEAD BLAST FLOOR AND PATCH AS REQUIRED. 01732 -16. EXISTING GAS OUTLET AND ASSOCIATED PIPING TO BE REMOVED; CAP BELOW FINISH FLOOR AND PATCH CONC. 01732 -17 01732 -17 EXISTING HOT WATER HEATERS TO BE REMOVED AT EACH EXISTING TOILET ROOMS, EXTEND SUPPLY PIPING TO NEW HOT WATER HEATER LOCATION. 01732 -18. EXISTING 5' CONCRETE SLAB -ON -GRADE TO BE SAW -CUT AND REMOVED FOR INSTALLATION OF NEW FLOOR DRAINS. ALLOW FOR 20 SF AREA OF CONCRETE DEMO AT EACH LOCATION. EXCAVATE AND REMOVE SOIL FOR INSTALLATION OF NEW PIPING, BACKFILL WITH 3/4" MINUS CRUSHED ROCK, INSTALL NEW 6 MIL VISQUEEN VAPOR BARRIER AND POUR BACK WITH NEW 3000 PSI CONCRETE TO MATCH ADJACENT SLAB TO REMAIN. TITLE. DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN DATE. OCTOBER 2009 JOB No 09102 SHEET NO A2 01 6' 51 /2" 10265 -01 k I COPYRIGHT STORAGE JAN. 108 HAZMAT 107 107A 4 1 A9.01 I 7' -3 3/4 INTERVIEW 114 I CONFERENCE 105 2009 c STOR. A SLE 115 106 3' 11 1/4'_ 114A FD 51/2' w 10' -41/8" I O I 7 7/8' N M iD BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS OCCUPANCY GROUP B CONSTRUCTION GROUP V -B BASIC ALLOWABLE FLOOR AREA. 9,000 SF OCCUPANCY LOADING FACTOR 100 GSF PERSON NUMBER OF EXITS (IBC 1015.1) 3,520/100 35.2 50 (1) EXIT REQUIRED RATED CORRIDOR (IBC 1017 1) 3,520/100 35.2 20 EXCEPT 1016.1 4 NONE 2 109A 7 A9.01 BY BEAMAN ARCH. LTD. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 5 1 EXAM A9.01 I 110 I O TELCOM 109 7 I n L1 .AS- 7 A9.01 SIM. EXAM 5 111 A9.01 103 103A 10' -0' I, 4' 10 1/8" 7 bo N 0 INTERVIEW 116 9' -2 3/4 16' -0 1/8" FILE 120 0 KEY NOTES: 10265 -01 10265 -01 5' -0" HIGH IMPACT RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION 11490-01 11490 -01 ATHLETIC MATS, WALL MOUNTED. 11490 -02 11490 -02. ATHLETIC MATS, FLOOR- MOUNTED 9' 7' AS_ 7 A9.01 Li1J 11L1 7 A9.01 WIC 5 1 112 A9.01 WIC SUM. 113 1 5 A9.01 0 10' -0' HALLWAY 121 OPEN OFFICE 102 33' 1 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 OFFICE 117 11 11 1/4' 1/8"=1 -0' 123A AISLE 124 31 As.ci1 RECEPTION 101 T 41 31 A 9.01 11 b .l. Beaman Arc iitecture, Ltd. P.O. Box 86038 Portland, Oregon 97286 60. (503) 236-3300 fax_ (503)239-9191 1 I A 9. 0 1 1 PUBLIC WAIT 100 100A MAIN ENTRANCE FLOOR PLAN 4528 STATE OF WASHINGTON t LEGEND WALL TYPE 1 3 -Y2 METAL STUDS. FIRE RATING NR. HEIGHT 8' -6' AFF SEE WALL TYPE DETAILS WALL TYPE 2: 4 METAL STUDS FIRE RATING NR. HEIGHT 12' -0' AFF SEE WALL TYPE DETAILS WALL TYPE 3 (E) 2X4 STUDS. FIRE Q RATING NR. HEIGHT 12' -0' AFF SEE WALL TYPE DETAILS WALL TYPE 4 4 METAL STUDS. FIRE Q RATING NR. HEIGHT 4 -0' AFF SEE WALL TYPE DETAILS 0 FD FLOOR DRAIN SEE PLUMBING SCHEDULE 0 O REGISTERED TITLE FLOOR PLAN ARCHITECT (PROJECT CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING AE .:E LEVEL ONE RENOVATION TOILET SEE PLUMBING SCHEDULE. LAVATORY SEE PLUMBING SCHEDULE. DOOR AND FRAME SEE DOOR SCHEDULE. SEMI RECESSED FIRE EXTINGUISHER. 0 WINDOW TYPE, SEE SHEET A9.04 DATE. OCTOBER 2009 JOB No 09102 SHEET NO A2 02 t 1 1 1 1 t 1 r 1 1 1 1 STORAGE JAN. 108 db HAZMAT 107 di 0 42 0 STOR. 115 16000 -04 C 0 INTERVIEW 114 0* 1 CONFERENCE 105 1 1 11 1 1 3 -way 3-way TELCOM t 4• 109 413 r fFI 1 COPYRIGHT 2009 BY BEAMAN ARCH. LTD ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 16000-03 r 16000 -03 1. EXAM 110 OFFICE 103 ft 3-wa EXAM 111 4D 44 0 db �NTERVIEW 116 FILE 120 0 KEY NOTES. 16000-01 16000 -01 NEW FULLY RECESSED LOCKABLE ELECTRICAL PANEL TO ACCOMMODATE ELECTRICAL LOADS OF ENTIRE AREA, DESIGN BUILD. 16000-02 16000 -02. DEDICATED OUTLET FOR COPIER. 16000-03 16000 -03. DEDICATED OUTLET FOR REFRIGERATOR. 16000-04 16000 -04 INSTALL ELECTRICAL OUTLET FOR UNDERCOUNTER REFRIGERATOR, COORDINATE WITH OWNER. WIC ttrWIC 112 H 113 U U OPEN OFFICE 102 0 41) HALLWAY 121 ci/ OFFICE KCEPTION 101 1/8 =1 -0" 11 b _1 rch. Beaman Arc litecture, Ltd. P.O. Box 85038 Portland, Oregon 97286 tel.: (503) 236 -3300 fax_ (503) 239-9191 Bea o T T CL. Oo 122 MAIN ENTRANCE PLAY AREA. 119 16000 -01 0 y PUBLIC WAIT 100 ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLAN STATE OF WASHINGTON LEGEND 110V WALL OUTLET NOTE DESIGNATES HT HEIGHT A.F.F 110V WALL OUTLET NOTE DESIGNATES A CONNECTION TO DOOR OPERATOR 110V 4 -PLUG DEDICATED WALL 0 OUTLET (PROVIDE DEDICATED 15A CIRCUIT AND ONE SPARE FOR TELCOM 109 WITH TWIST LOCK) TELEPHONE WALL JACK, SEE SPECIFICATIONS COMPUTER DATA WALL JACK, SEE SPECIFICATIONS I WALL SWITCH SEE SPECIFICATIONS. O WALL- MOUNTED THERMOSTAT SEE SPECIFICATIONS NOTE. COORDINATION AND HOOK -UP OF TELEPHONES SHALL BE THRU COUNTY IT DEPARTMENT CONTACT TERESA BIBLER AT 360.417.2346. NOTE: COMPUTER NETWORKING BY OWNER. COORDINATE THRU COUNTY IT DEPARTMENT CONTACT GREG HELWICK AT 360.417.2598. ae --0.J )C4 L 4528 r FLOOR PLAN ELECTRICAL REGISTERED 1 /PROJ CLALLAM COUNTY AE 'Pi 3RD STREET BUILDING ARCHITECT LEVEL ONE RENOVATION 4-1 vans JM. tQ c,L. e e_04067 1 RK' 1 c■it-Q 69, ,Q- DATE. OCTOBER 2009 JOB No 09102 SHEET NO A2 02E COPYRIGHT 2009 BY BEAMAN ARCH. LTD. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 5irmiii R ■`\I ■tl;1 ■EK\uI $1■ tea 51E 1 1 1 1 1 4, ,11111111/4g 31,1■ "IIIER. Offal are. 111•111E !VI 'E ■t 1 ■t E■■■■ ■E $4 1 ■E S■■ENr;EI;IE El E••••1111EME111E ■M■■■ RESFAiliil MIENS IN ER \I N I I I MIME i■■ E II ENE i I■■ I■■ HAZMAT 107 STORAGE JAN. 108 FLOOR FINISH LEGEND A LJV-1A UN-2A LIN-1B UN-1C EXAM EXAM 110 111 11_ tel: u AM EM WIC 112 WIC 113 OFF C I FLOOR FINISHES PLAN 1/8"=1 -0" 11 b_rc Beaman Arc titecture, Ltd. P.O. Box 86038 Portland, Crego" 97286 tel.: (503) 2363300 fax_ (503) 239-9191 AE STATE OF WASHINGTON 1- 4528 REGISTERED I TITLE FLOOR FINISHES PLAN ARCHITECT 'PROJECT CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL ONE RENOVATION TL1` DATE. OCTOBER 2009 JOB No 09102 SHEET NO A2 02F COPYRIGHT 2009 BY BEAMAN ARCH. LTD. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. SYMBOL DISCRIPTION FD JS -1 L1 S -1 WC 1 WH -1 PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE FLOOR DRAIN: CAST IRON BODY WITH ADJUSTABLE ROUND POLISHED NICKEL BRONZE STRAINER. VANDAL -PROOF SCREWS. TRAP PRIMER CONNECTION. J.R. SMITH 2005 -A OR ARCHITECT ACCEPTED EQUAL. JANITOR SINK. FLOOR- MOUNTED 16 IN. BY 20 IN. BY 6 IN. CORNER TYPE, ACID RESISTANT 304 STAINLESS STEEL, CHICAGO QUATURN (TO MATCH THAT IN COURTHOUSE, VERIFY WITH OWNER) OR ARCHITECT ACCEPTED EQUAL WITH STAINLESS STEEL BACKSPLASHES. FAUCET HOSE -END SPOUT TYPE WITH INTEGRAL VACUUM BREAKER, ADJUSTABLE ARMS WITH INTEGRAL STOPS AND WALL BRACE. CHROME. ACCESSORIES. MOP HANGER AND SHELF HOSE AND HANGER. LAVATORY WALL HUNG, VITREOUS CHINA, 20- IN. BY 18 IN. FRONT OVERFLOW ANTI BACKSPLASH. KOHLER K 2084 4IN. CENTER FAUCET HOLES, ADA COMPLIANT FITTINGS: 1-Y4 IN. BY 1-Y2 IN. P TRAP SUPPLIES AND STOPS. FOR ADA COMPLIANT PROVIDE INSULATION KIT TO P TRAP AND SUPPLIES. CARRIER: HANGER PLATE, SMITH AS ACCEPTABLE. FAUCET 4 -IN. CENTERS. CHROME. SLOAN EAF275- ISM -CP FAUCET (TO MATCH THAT AT COURTHOUSE, VERIFY WITH OWNER). BREAKROOM SINK. SINGLE COMPARTMENT 18 GA. STAINLESS STEEL, SOUND DEADENED 15 IN. LEFT TO RIGHT BY 15 IN. FRONT TO BACK, SELF RIMMING, 4 -IN. CENTER FAUCET HOLES. ELKAY BLR -151 -7 -Ys IN. DEEP FITTINGS: SUPPLIES, STOPS, P TRAP 1.5 GPM AERATOR. FAUCET 4 IN. CENTERS. CHROME. SLOAN EAF275- ISM -CP (TO MATCH THAT AT COURTHOUSE, VERIFY WITH OWNER). ADA COMPLIANT FLOOR- MOUNTED FLUSH VALVE, ELONGATED 16-Y2 IN. HIGH BOWL, VITREOUS CHINA, SIPHON JET ACTION, 1-Y2 IN. TOP SPUD BOLT CAPS. ZURN Z5655. SEAT COMMERCIAL WEIGHT HEAVY -DUTY SOLID PLASTIC, OPEN FRONT STAINLESS STEEL CHECK HINGE, WHITE, WITHOUT COVER. ZURN Z5955SS -EL. FLUSH VALVE. SLOAN WITH OPTIMA HEADS (TO MATCH THAT AT COURTHOUSE, VERIFY WITH OWNER). WATERHEATER, POINT -OF -USE. 20 GALLON, 23- IN. DIAMETER BY 30-Y2 IN. HEIGHT 120V RHEEM MR20120 OR ARCHITECT ACCEPTED EQUAL. b_Arch Beaman Arc iitecture, Ltd. P.O. Box 86038 Portland, Oregon 97286 td. (503) 236-3300 fax.: (503) 239-9191 AEL STATE OF WASHINGTON nom WASTE VENT CW HW 3 IN. 2IN. 1 1 /2IN. 1 1 /2IN. 1 /2IN. 1 /2IN. 2IN. 1 1/2 IN. 1/2 IN. 9-- 4528 SCHEDULES NOTES REGISTERED TITLE ARCHITECT /PROJECT CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL ONE RENOVATION CONNECTION 2 IN. 1 -1/2 IN. 1/2 IN. 1/2 IN. 2IN. 1 1/2 IN. 1 /2IN. 1 /2 IN. 3/4 IN. IN 3/4 IN. OUT DATE. OCTOBER 2009 JOB No 09102 SHEET NO A2 03 COPYRIGHT 2009 BY BEAMAN ARCH. LTD. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. SCREWEYE 2' MIN. INTO BOTTOM CHORD OF TRUSS J 09111 -05 2 1/2' 20 GA. TRACK 6' Length secure to wall track 09111 -04 1.5 METAL ANGLE I WALL BASE G 4 d WALL TYPE 1 1 1/2 =1 -0' 09250 -01 WALL HEAD WALL AT CLG. 09111 -05 3 -1/2" STUDS 16' 0 C. WALL PLAN 4 4 44 d 4 %4 4 A >1 09250 -02 09111 -04 07210 -05 4 4 4 4 03300 -01 09651 -01 A.F.F B.0 TRUSS 09111 -05 2 1/2' 20 GA. TRACK Length to bridge (2) min. trusses 09111 -05 2 -1/2' 20 GA. STUDS 4' -0' 0 C. at 45° angle SEE CLG. PLAN SCREWEYE 2' MIN. INTO BOTTOM CHORD OF TRUSS J WALL BASE b_�.rcli Beaman Arc iitecture, Ltd. P.O. Box 86038 Portland, Oregon 97286 teL. (503)2363300 tax.. (503) 239-9191 09111 -05 5y4, DEFLECTION TRACK 1 Ft 09250 -02 4528 WALL HEAD 09111 -05 4 STUDS 16" O C. 4 4 d 09250 -01 WALL PLAN WALL TYPE 2 AEL .:E r STATE OF WASHINGTON 4 4 4d 1 1/2"=1 -0' KEY NOTES 03300 -01 03300 -01 07210 -05 07210 -05 07920 -01 07920 -01 09111 -04 09111 -04 09111 -05 09111 -05 09250 -01 09250 -01 09250 -02 09250 -02 U.N.0 09511 -01 09511 -01 09651 -01 09651 -01 REGISTERED TITLE ARCHITECT way A SEALANT 4 WALL TYPES 4 4 /PROJECT CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL ONE RENOVATION 09250 -02 09111 -04 07210 -05 2 4 EXISTING CONC. SOB; PATCH AS REQUIRED. ACOUSTICAL BATT INSULATION SUSPENDED GWB CEILING SYSTEM SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING FLOOR FINISH, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE A.F.F B.O.DECK dikk 9' -0' A.F.F B.0 TRUSS EXISTING ROOF TRUSSES AT 24' 0 C. (VERIFY) TO REMAIN SEE CLG. PLAN MISC. FRAMING, SEE NOTE GYPSUM WALL BOARD LEVEL OF FINISH 4 U.N.0 5" GYPSUM WALL BOARD CEILING; LEVEL OF FINISH 4 DATE OCTOBER 2009 JOB No 09102 SHEET NO A2 04 COPYRIGHT 2009 BY BEAMAN ARCH. LTD. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. WALL BASE WALL HEAD 09111 -05 3 -1/2' STUDS 16' 0 09111 -04 1.5' METAL ANGLE 4%4 WALL AT CLG. EXISTING 2X4 STUD WALL TO REMAIN (8' -0" H) f 4 4 WALL PLAN 09250 -01 4 4 «7 WALL TYPE 3 1 1/2 =1 -0' 4 4 d 4 n 4 09250 -02 09111 -04 07210 -05 03300 -01 09651 -01 4 4 4 J Alki 12' -0' A.F.F B.O.DECK SEE CLG. PLAN WALL BASE 1 1/2 =1 -0' 11 b_ Arch. Beaman Arc iitecture, Ltd. P.O. Box 86038 Portland, Oregon 97286 tel.: (503( 236-3300 fax.: (503) 239 -9191 4528 1 1 A9 03 1 09111 -05 4" STUDS 16' 0 C. 4 4 4 WALL TYPE 4 STATE OF WASHINGTON 4 d° 4° Tip REGISTERED TITLE. ARCHITECT 1 Ii AE =E 4 03300 -01 03300 -01 07210 -05 07210 -05 07920 -01 07920 -01 09111 -04 09111 -04 09111 -05 09111 -05 09250 -01 09250 -01 09250 -02 09250 -02 U.N.O. 09511 -01 09511 -01 09651 -01 09651 -01 /PROJECT 4 4 KEY NOTES WALL TYPES CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL ONE RENOVATION 4' -0' A.F.F 4 3/4' PLYWD NAILER 4 J EXISTING CONC. SOB; PATCH AS REQUIRED ACOUSTICAL BATT INSULATION SEALANT SUSPENDED GWB CEILING SYSTEM MISC. FRAMING, SEE NOTE GYPSUM WALL BOARD LEVEL OF FINISH 4 U.N.0 GYPSUM WALL BOARD CEILING; LEVEL OF FINISH 4 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING FLOOR FINISH, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE DATE OCTOBER 2009 JOB No 09102 SHEET NO A2 05 I\ I\ I I I CI= L =i= =r- -r- 1-J --21-- -I n 7 I\ I\ --I- N I I\ I\ 1 G I I I 1 1 \I \I -L 1-- -J—V V I\ I I 01732 -O 1 1 I T\ 7 I G S 1 1 j -I-- V 4 COPYRIGHT 2009 BY BEAMAN ARCH. LTD. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED I fS 1 1 I I-+ I- -I I N\ I I 1 Y I I\ I I I I 1 I J I 1 1 1 \1 1 0 I- -1 7 T T 0 I I I I I I I I L 7 G r I\ I 1 1 I I Ic 1 L LL_J- -1 L_ J-� 4L r- Jy T I IT r 1 I -L 0 1/8 =1 -0' 1 r7l LJ 19 b_Arcl Beaman Arc iitecture, Ltd. P.O. Box 86038 Portland, Oregon 97286 td. (503) 236-3300 fax.: (503) 239-9191 I LL III I I I 7 Lr- -T N I- Jr T 1 r _.--r 1 I T '1 I 1 I I I I I 10"O"AFF) 1 1 r-1 -r1 I 1 L 1 1 1 _L 1 TYP L J- 1 I c_A I I C 1 1 1 r I 7 TI -T 1 I 1 1 I I 1 T T 1 T 1 1 r I 1� 1- t1 -J G -1 m I I 1 L I I C =.,61- I I]\ y I\ I I 01 I I I I 1 1 I �I T r _r I I I I IG_� II I I I I 1 I I I IF1 I 1 1 \I \I L_J L I -L_J I II I I I (V1732t01 I I I I V t- L I II I LLI I II�� a{ r r- -1 T� �L I LJJ f n I I-- -I I- /r I I I I I 1 I y L_ d I I I I� k- I 1 F T1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1\ I I I I GJ L 1 1 I L L J 1 L I I I G 1 r T r` I I 7 9 I r T\ I 1 I IT I T r I 1 II Il i 1 ii 1 II i II I I 11 I 1 1 1 r- I- T r I 111 I I I CT L� DEMO CEILING PLAN STATE OF WASHINGTON DEMOLITION LEGEND ITEMS SHOWN WITH A CONTINUOUS LINE ARE TO REMAIN ITEMS SHOWN WITH A DASHED LINE ARE TO BE REMOVED OR RELOCATED UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE. EXISTING SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL 1 CEILING SYSTEM TO BE REMOVED J L- I EXISTING FLUORESCENT LIGHT 1 FIXTURE, ASSOCIATED BACKBOXES AND WIRING TO BE REMOVED EXISTING HVAC SUPPLY AND ASSOCIATED DUCTWORK TO BE REMOVED r� LJ EXISTING HVAC EXHAUST AND ASSOCIATED DUCTWORK TO BE REMOVED EXISTING EXIT SIGN AND ASSOCIATED EXI1 BACKBOX AND WIRING TO BE REMOVED AND SALVAGED FOR OWNER'S REUSE. KEY NOTES: 01732 -01 01732 -01 EXISTING ABOVE CEILING DUCT CHASE TO REMAIN; THIS IS HVAC SUPPLY AND RETURN FROM THE ROOF 01732 -02 01732 -02. EXISTING ABOVE CEILING COMMUNICATION CHASE TO REMAIN. 01732 -03 01732 -03. EXISTING HVAC SUPPLY AND RETURN FROM GROUND MOUNTED HVAC UNITS TO REMAIN. 4528 REGISTERED DEMOLITION CEILING PLAN TITLE. ARCHITECT /PROJECT CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING AEL LEVEL ONE RENOVATION DATE OCTOBER 2009 JOB No 09102 SHEET NO A4 01 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 F1A F1A AGE 108 F1A CONFERENCE 105 JA■. F1A Type F1A F1B RR1 WF2 WF4 EX1 F1B ISL 106 F1A F1B (BB) F1B —J.- WF4 1 15000 -01 FIAT OFFICE 103 fl ff ti fl Mounting Recess Grid Recess Grid Recessed Wall Wall Exit Light Lamp Quantity and Type (3)F032 (2)F032 (2)F13TT (2)F017 (2)F017 (1) LED F1AI EXAM F1A Input Watts 84 58 27 34 55 3 110 WF4 Tql F1A Voltage 120 1P 2W 120 1P 2W 120 1P 2W 120 1P 2W 120 1P 2W 1201P2W EXAM 111 F1A TELCOM 109 F Ballast Type UNV UNV UNV EB10 UNV BB 0 Notes: 1 Or equal, as approved by the Architect. 2 Provide battery back ballast for emergency lighting as noted on drawing by (BB). 3 Contractor to provide lamps for at fixtures 4 Provide dual level switching (inner lamps shall be switched separately from the oute lamps) at all Offices, Conference rooms, Exam Rooms and WIC rooms. 5 Provide lamps for all fixtures in the same color of light; 5000k. COPYRIGHT 2009 BY BEAMAN ARCH. LTD. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED F1A Ballast Abbreviations: EB10 UNV BB F1B F1A Description 2' X 4' TROFFER 2' X 4' TROFFER 8' DOWN LIGHT 2' WALL FLUOR. 4' WALL FLUOR. EXIT LIGHT FILE 1 F1A F1A LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE FIB (BB' r 0 F1A F1A F1A Electronic, <10% THD Fluorescent electronic, <10% 11-ID, 120V Input. Battery Back -up WIC WIC 112 113 F1A F1A 0 Manufacturer and Catalog Number Columbia AT824- 332G- FSAl2, 125 -3EU Columbia AT824- 232G- FSAl2, 125 -3EU Prescolite LFFTW- H8- 13EB -8FDOP Nulite VR- 217- EB10 -TPD Nulite VR- 232- EB10 -TPD Dual Lite SE- S- G-W -E -1 )PEI 4 OF -ICE 102 F1AI F1A F1B B 1A F1A Notes 1,2,3,4,5 1,2,3,5 1, 3 1, 3 1, 3 1, 3 FIB F1A F1A J �I F1A F1A AISLE El_ 124 1/8 =1 -0" F1A F1B jatnro F1B J L F1B (BB) .RR1 0 F1A REC EP' 101 b_1 rc.i Beaman Arc )itecture, Ltd. P.O. Box 86038 Portland, Oregon 97286 teL: (503) 236-3300 fax: (503) 239-9191 6-18 WF2 F1 B FIB (BB F1B J 6• IAFF) RR1 0 .7.27 EX1 4528 F1B STATE OF WASHINGTON STAFF TLT 123 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN PATIENT TLT 118 2 A905 PUBLIC WAIT 100 MAIN ENTRAP' LEGEND 0 r EXIT C OA' LN REGISTERED TITLE. ARCHITECT PROJECT CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL ONE RENOVATION SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM TYPE 1 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM; TYPE 2. SUSPENDED GWB CEILING SYSTEM; FLUORESCENT 2 X 4 LIGHT FIXTURE. FLUORESCENT 1 X 4 WALL -MOUNT LIGHT FIXTURE. FLUORESCENT 1 X 2 WALL -MOUNT LIGHT FIXTURE. FLUORESCENT CAN LIGHT FIXTURE. EXIT LIGHT HVAC SUPPLY DIFFUSER. HVAC RETURN GRILLE. NEW RESTROOM EXHAUST FANS. KEY NOTES. 15000-01 15000-01 PROVIDE COOLING TO COMPUTER ROOM WITH 670 CFM AIR FLOW AND 24 MBH COOLING. REFLECTED CEILING PLAN ezo P'av DATE OCTOBER 2009 JOB No 09102 SHEET NO A4 02 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 J CoJ O Eh 09250 -02 10801 -05 10801 -01 (10801 11 d 0 H Co EN -0 I L 3 1 A9.02 1 EQ. L L. 9, -0"" WAITING 100 1 A9 03 2 A9 02 TOILET 103 06402 -02 09250 -01 06402 -03 06402 -04 06402 -01 6' -5' RECEPTION 101 WEST 10801 -07 O) N COPYRIGHT 2009 BY BEAMAN ARCH. LTD. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 09250 -02 10801 -08 10801 -04 10801 -06A 10801 -06 06402 -06 0 EV N EQ. 11451 -02 1, -6 I, 3 -9 10801 -09 06402 -04 06402 -07 TYP 06402 -04 11451 -01 Z_ EC). I V I_ L— I 1 N a CV f 2 4-4 1 i 3 INTERVIEW 104 1 7' 1 1 1 A9 02 a 0 (D -0 C2D 06402 -01 09250 -01 10801 -02 06402 -03 a o 06402 -04 06402 -01 06402 -06 RECEPTION 101 EAST 40" 1 A9.02 06402 -01 06402 -04 1 SIM. EXAM WIC; TYPICAL 09250 -02 H b_1 rich Beaman Ar lecture, Ltd. P.O. Box 86038 Portland, Vegan 97286 td.: (503) 236-3300 fax: (503)239-9191 06402 -06 06402 -04 06402 -05 06402 -04 06402 -01 09250 -01 06402 -03 TYP 4528 09250 -01 09250 -02 10801 -01 10801 -02 10801 -03 10801 -04 STATE OF WASHINGTON 06402 -01 06402 -01 PLASTIC LAMINATE ADJUSTABLE SHELVING 06402 -02 06402 -02 PLASTIC LAMINATE WALL CAP 06402 -03 06402 -03 PLASTIC LAMINATE BACKSPLASH 06402 -04 06402 -04 PLASTIC LAMINATE CABINETRY 06402 -05 06402 -05 SUPPORT BRACKET RAAKS EH -1824 FLUSH MOUNT 06402 -06 06402 -06 PLASTIC LAMINATE DIVIDER, 2- INCHES WIDE. 06402 -07 06402 -07 PLASTIC LAMINATE REVEAL 1 /4 -1NCH WIDE BY 1/8 -INCH DEEP 09250 -01 5/8' GYPSUM WALL BOARD LEVEL OF FINISH 4 U.N.O 09250 -02 5/8' GYPSUM WALL BOARD LEVEL OF FINISH 5, EPDXY PAINT 10801 -01 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSOR TAI 10801 -02 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSOR TA2 10801 -03 PAPER TOWEL DISP WASTE TA3 )10801 -04 SOAP DISPENSOR SUPPLIED BY OWNER, INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR 10801 -05 10801 -05 )10801 -06 (10801 -06A 10801 -06A 10801 -07 10801 -07 10801 -08 )10801 -08 10801 -09 )10801 -09 10801 '10 10801 10 10801 11 10801 -11 10801 -06 KEY NOTES GRAB BAR TA5 GRAB BAR TA6 GRAB BAR TA6A DIAPER CHANGING STATION TA7 MIRROR TA8 UNDERSINK PROTECTION TA9 MOP AND BROOM HOLDER TA10 SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL TA11 11451 -01 11451 -01 COUNTERTOP MICROWAVE OVEN; BY OWNER. 11451 -02 11451 -02 UNDERCOUNTER REFRIGERATOR; BY OWNER. EXAM WIC REGISTERED TITLE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS ARCHITECT /PROJECT 3RD STREET BUILDING AE. LEVEL ONE RENOVATION DATE OCTOBER 2009 JOB No 09102 SHEET NO A9 01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 c r-� I I I I II H 11 1' =1 -0' BEVEL BACK SURFACES THAT CONTRACT WALL FOR SCRIBING OF CABINETRY TO WALL, TYP INSTALL CONT 6' METAL STUD BACKING PLATES AT ALL WALL HUNG CABINETRY TYP 2' 1 PLAM -1 COUNTERTOP BACKSPLASH AND EDGE (SIDE SPLASH WHEN ALIGNING WITH GWB WALL); ALL BACK o SIDE SPLASH AND COUNTERTOP EDGES ARE TO HAVE A 45° CHAMPHER HOLES AT 3' 0 C. FOR ADJUSTABLE SHELVING; TYP SECTION AT CASEWORK NOTE: PROVIDE ACCESS IN BACK OF ALL CABINETS THAT ARE INSTALLED OVER ANY NEW OR EXISTING WALL PLUMBING CLEAN -OUTS; TYP I COPYRIGHT 2009 BY BEAMAN ARCH. LTD. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED NOTE. TYPICAL CONSTRUCTION TO BE REVEAL OVERLAY USING 3/4 PLYWD. WITH HIGH PRESSURE PLASTIC LAMINATE ON ALL EXPOSED SURFACES HOLES AT 3' 0 C. FOR ADJUSTABLE SHELVING; TYP PLAM -1 ALL EXPOSED SURFACES SINK, WHERE OCCURS PLAM -1 AT ALL EXPOSED VERTICAL SURFACES, ALL INTERIOR SURFACES TO BE MELAMINE, TYP CABINET DOOR/DRAWER; SEE CASEWORK ELEVATIONS FOR SPECIFIC CONFIGURATIONS; TYP 4' PLAM -2; TYP SILICONE SEAL EDGE OF BASE TO FLOORING' TYP PLAM -1 ALL EXPOSED PLAM -1 ALL EXPOSED SURFACES PLAM -1 COUNTERTOP' COUNTERTOP EDGES ARE TO HAVE A 45° CHAMPHER COUNTER SUPPORT BRACKET N l'=1 -0' 1 11 2' 7' 6Y SECTION AT CASEWORK 1�1 b_rc1 Beaman Arc iitecture, Ltd. P.O. Box 86038 Portland, Oregon 97286 nd (503) 236-3309 fax.: (503) 239-9191 4 PLAM -2; TYP 4528 NOTE. PROVIDE AND INSTALL (1) DOUG MOFFIT 'MAX 1A RECESSED GROMMENT AT OUTER EDGE OF COUNTERTOP AE r STATE OF WASHINGTON SURFACES PLAM -1 COUNTERTOP COUNTERTOP EDGES ARE TO HAVE A 45° CHAMPHER COUNTER SUPPORT BRACKET l'=1 0' 2' 1 REGISTERED TITLE. CABINETRY DETAILS ARCHITECT FROJECT CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL ONE RENOVATION 1 SECTION AT CASEWORK 4' PLAM -2; TYP DATE. OCTOBER 2009 JOB No 09102 SHEET NO A9 02 INSTALL CONT 6' METAL STUD BACKING PLATES AT ALL WALL HUNG CABINETRY TYP FRAMED WALL, SEE WALL TYPES 5% COPYRIGHT Z009 BY BEAMAN ARCH. LTD. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. j PLAM -1 WALL CAP WITH 45° CHAMPHERED EDGES 2' 1 4" PLAM -2; TYP SILICONE SEAL EDGE OF BASE TO FLOORING' TYP SECTION AT COUNTERTOP 1"=1 -0" PLAM -1 COUNTERTOP BACKSPLASH AND EDGE (SIDE SPLASH WHEN ALIGNING WITH GWB WALL); ALL BACK SIDE SPLASH AND COUNTERTOP EDGES ARE TO HAVE A 45° CHAMPHER HOLES AT 3' 0 C. FOR ADJUSTABLE SHELVING; TYP PLAM -1 AT ALL EXPOSED VERTICAL SURFACES, ALL INTERIOR SURFACES TO BE MELAMINE, TYP CABINET DOOR/DRAWER; SEE CASEWORK ELEVATIONS FOR SPECIFIC CONFIGURATIONS; TYP VERIFY FLOOR PREP REQUIREMENTS WITH FLOORING MANUFACTURER 3 =1 -0" WALL SUBSTRATE VARIES, SEE WALL TYPES 4' OR 6' RUBBER BASE (SEE FINISH SCHEDULE), SET TIGHT TO WALL, AT LEVEL LINE, IN CONT BED OF ADHESIVE FLOOR FINISH, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE d a Q 4 INTERIOR WALL BASE DETAIL 3 =1 -0" WALL SUBSTRATE VARIES, SEE WALL TYPES 1X WOOD BASE TO ALIGN WITH TOP OF RUBBER BASE AT OTHER WALLS IN EACH ROOM, PAINT (SEE FINISH SCHEDULE), SCREW TO WALL WITH PHILLIPS FH SCREWS, COUNTERSINK 1/4 FLOOR FINISH, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE VERIFY FLOOR PREP REQUIREMENTS WITH FLOORING MANUFACTURER 71 b_A.rc Beaman Arc iitecture, Ltd. P.O. Box 86038 Portland, Oregon 97286 tel. (503) 236 -3300 fax. (503) 239 -9191 4528 Q tl 1IAEL Q PERIMETER WALL BASE DETAIL a REGISTERED TITLE. CABINETRY DETAILS DETAILS ARCHITECT /PROJECT CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL ONE RENOVATION STATE OF WASHINGTON 5/8" X 1 CONT PLYWD SPACER DATE OCTOBER 2009 JOB No 09102 SHEET NO A9 03 1 SEE WALL TYPES FOR WALL FINISHES, TYP NOTE. FRAMES IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION ARE TO BE GROUTED PRIOR TO BEING ERECTED TYP COPYRIGHT HOLLOW METAL FRAME, GROUT SOLID TYP 1 1/2" =1 -0' SEE WALL TYPES FOR WALL FINISHES, TYP NOTE. FRAMES IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION ARE TO BE GROUTED PRIOR TO BEING ERECTED TYP HOLLOW METAL FRAME, GROUT SOLID TYP 1 1/2"=1 -0" 2009 BY BEAMAN ARCH. LTD. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 1lVlr- �L VERIFY SEE WALL TYPES ACOUS. INSULATION, AS NOTED* SEE WALL TYPES, TYP FRAMED HEADER ASSEMBLY INTERIOR DOOR HEAD DETAIL VERIFY SEE WALL TYPES INTERIOR DOOR JAMB DETAIL NOTE: AT WOOD FRAMED WALLS INSTALL DOUBLE 2X6 HEADER IN LIEU OF THAT INDICATED TYP ACOUS. INSULATION AS NOTED SEE WALL TYPES, TYP FRAMED JAMB SUPPORT ASSEMBLY NOTE. AT WOOD FRAMED WALLS INSTALL DOUBLE 2X JAMB IN LIEU OF THAT INDICATED TYP SEE SPECIFICATION FOR REQUIRED ANCHORAGE, TYP NI is WOOD PICTURE 3' -0' WINDOW TO MATCH EXISTING; PAINT INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR io M WITH EXISTING 3 at WINDOW SILL LINE 1 1 I A9 06 f l ALIGN MULLION E IN SOLID INSULATED I FROM WINDOW MFG., r PAINT BOTH SIDES °Os 1 I NOTE. REPLACE EXISTING DOOR WITH WOOD WINDOW SASH TO FIT WITHIN EXISTING WOOD DOOR FRAME. INSTALL SEALANT TO HEAD JAMBS AND SILL TO ENSURE NO WATER PENETRATION. 2 A9.06 3 A9 06 4 A9 06 WINDOW TYPE WA 1/4"=1 -0' M Beaman Arc iitecture, Ltd. P.O. Box 86038 Poland, Oregon 97286 tel.: (503) 2393300 tax_ (503) 239-9191 A DOOR TYPE A 1/4' =1 -0" CV GLAZING AS SCHEDULED C DOOR TYPE C 1/4' =1 -0' GENERAL NOTES 1 SEE SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 8 "GLAZING" FOR EXACT GLASS TYPE DESIGNATION. 2. SEE SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 8 'STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES" FOR REQUIREMENTS FOR DOORS AND FRAMES, NOTED HEREIN. 3. SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 8 'WOOD DOORS' FOR REQUIREMENTS FOR WOOD DOORS. 4 SEE DOOR SCHEDULE, SPECIFICATION SECTION 8 FOR SIZES, MATERIALS, DETAIL REFERENCE, HARDWARE REFERENCE, ETC. NOT NOTED HEREIN. REGISTERED TITLE. 4528 DOOR WINDOW TYPES DETAILS ARCHITECT HM FRAME, n PAINT TYP l03 PROJECT CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING STATE OF WASHINGTON LEVEL ONE RENOVATION 4 8' EN GLAZING AS SCHEDULED DOOR TYPE B 1/4 =1 -0' NOTE. VERIFY WALL CONSTRUCTION TYP VERIFY GLAZING KEY NOTE. SEE DOOR SCHEDULE FOR DOOR FRAME DETAIL REFERENCE, TYP 1 HM FRAME TYPE 1 1/4' =1 -0' INSULATED GLASS IG (TEMPERED BOTH SIDES) TEMPERED GLASS REFER TO SPECIFICATION SECTION 08800 FOR NOTATIONS. DATE. OCTOBER 2009 JOB No 09102 SHEET NO A9 04 BUILDING STRUCTURAL MEMBER 2" X 2" X 12 GA. CONT BENT PLATE (2) #10 X 1 1/2" WOOD SCREWS; TYP (2) #10 S.M.SCREWS; TYP 3 =1 -0' CONDITION AT WALL BRACE CEILING DETAILS COPYRIGHT 2009 BY BEAMAN ARCH. LTD. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM SUSPENDED GWB SYSTEM OR 2%' 20 GA. STUD FRAMING AT 16' 0 C WHERE SPANS ARE LESS THAN 4' -0' SEE DETAIL FOR CONNECTION TO STRUCTURE ABOVE 2 1/2 18 GA. METAL STUDS AT 4' -0" 0 C. 4' 20 GA. METAL STUDS AT 16" O.C. CEILING DETAIL 3"=1 -0" #10 S.M.S. TYP 20 GA. DEFLECTION HEAD TRACK PARTITION STUD SEE WALL TYPES 5/8" GYPSUM WALL BOARD wl CORNER BEAD AT EXPOSED CORNER BUILDING STRUCTURAL MEMBER 1) w a w w I 1. CONDITION AT FULL HT PART HEAD M Beaman Arc iitecture, Ltd. P.O. Box 86038 Por9aM, Oregon 97286 tel.: (503) 236.3300 fa (503) 2399191 I NEW DOOR OPERATOR BEYOND PROVIDE ARM EXTENSION TO ACCOMMODATE EXISTING CONDITIONS EXISTING DOOR TRIM BEYOND' NEATLY CUT TO ACCOMMODATE INSTALLATION OF DOOR OPERATOR NEW FLEX CONDUIT TO NEW DOOR OPERATOR 1 1/2 =1 -0' 4528 REGISTERED i a 1 ARCHITECT STATE OF WASHINGTON Noy TITLE. DETAILS 43 VERIFY PROJECT CLALLAM COUNTY 3RD STREET BUILDING LEVEL ONE RENOVATION EXISTING EXTERIOR WALL CONSTRUCTION NEW ROUGH -IN BOX, COVERPLATE AND ESCUTCHEON FOR POWER FEED TO NEW DOOR OPERATOR EXISTING DOOR TO REMAIN EXTERIOR DOOR HEAD DETAIL DATE. OCTOBER 2009 JOB No 09102 SHEET NO A9 05 COPYRIGHT 2009 BY BEAMAN ARCH. LTD. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 1X3 HARDWD TRIM; PAINTED 5/8" GWB, PAINTED WINDOW IS TO BE ORDERED WITH JAMB EXTENSION TO ALIGN WITH NEW FINISH; CONTRACTOR VERIFY DIMENSION; TYP WINDOW HEAD DETAIL 1 1/2 =1 -0" 5/8' GWB, PAINTED 1X3 HARDWD TRIM; PAINTED 1 1/2 =1 -0' WINDOW JAMB DETAIL EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO REMAIN FLASHING BY WINDOW MFG. SAW -CUT EXISTING SIDING FOR INSTALLATION. TAPE FLASHING TO EXISTING SUBSTRATE WITH VAPOR BARRIER TAPE. SET FLASHING IN CONT BED OF SEALANT EXISTING DOOR AND FRAME TO BE REMOVED NEW FIXED WOOD WINDOW WITH CASING MOULD EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO REMAIN SAW -CUT EXISTING SIDING FOR INSTALLATION OF WINDOW INSTALL NEW 30 LB. VAPOR BARRIER UNDER WINDOW CASING CONT BEAD OF SEALANT 7 EXISTING DOOR AND FRAME TO BE REMOVED NEW FIXED WOOD WINDOW WITH CASING MOULD b_irc Beaman Arc iitecture, Ltd. P.O. Box86038 Portland, Oregon 97286 6t: (503) 236 -3300 lax_ (503) 239-9191 1X3 HARDWD TRIM; PAINTED \41 1X3 HARDWD TRIM; PAINTED Co BASE DETAIL SEE DETAIL '2X6 FRAMING TO MATCH (E) WALL 4528 5/8' GWB, PAINTED WINDOW JAMB AT BRICK DETAIL 1 1/2"=1-0' WINDOW BASE SILL DETAIL 1 1/2 =1 -0' STATE OF WASHINGTON ftee REGISTERED TITLE. DETAILS ARCHITECT /PROJECT CLALLAM COUNTY ,I! 3RD STREET BUILDING AE LEVEL ONE RENOVATION EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO REMAIN EXISTING BRICK MASONRY VENEER TO REMAIN CONT BEAD OF SEALANT BACKER ROD EXISTING DOOR AND FRAME TO BE REMOVED NEW FIXED WOOD WINDOW WITH CASING MOULD NEW FIXED WOOD WINDOW WITH CASING MOULD SEALANT CONT NEW CEDAR SIDING TO MATCH EXISTING, PAINT TO MATCH NEW 30 LB. VAPOR BARRIER 20 GA. S.S. FLASHING ADHERED TO SUBSTRATE, CONT SEALANT IN SLAB RECESS NEW PLYWD SHEATHING TO MATCH (E) THICKNESS EXISTING CONCRETE SLAB -ON- GRADE, SAW -CUT FOR INSTALLATION OF S.S. FLASHING, RECESS 1 DATE. OCTOBER 2009 JOB No 09102 SHEET NO A9 06 (2/18/2010) Linda Pangrle Clallam County 3rd St Building HVAC plans Page1 r From To Date Subject: Attachments Good morning Linda, Thanks, 'Kevin G Wight' <kevinw @andgar com> <Ipangrle @cityofpa. us> 2/18/2010 8 45 AM Clallam County 3rd St Building HVAC plans 3rd Street Level 1 Drawings Permit Set 2 17 10 pdf Thank you for all your help attached are our drawings for the HVAC system I II be sending the submittals shortly Let me know if you have any questions or need more information Kevin Gene Wight Commercial HVAC Design /Build Estimator 6920 Salashan Pkwy A106 Ferndale Wa 98248 Office 360 366 9900 Ext 168 Fax 360 366 5800 What Else Can Andgar Do For You? Click here <http. /www andgar com /andgar- company php> to find out. Confidentiality Notice The content of this email is intended solely for the individual or destination of which it is addressed and may contain information that is privileged confidential and /or exempt from disclosure under state and federal laws If you are not the intended recipient, or are not authorized to receive this in their behalf you are hereby notified that you may not use copy distribute or disclose to anyone this message or the content contained herein If you have received this message in error notify the sender by reply and delete it immediately RECEIVED FEB 1 8 2010 CITY UI D�RDIVISION s Oechan∎ c.6, 5u ccon`kccJor o3 O C O> N IT) W (2/18/2010) Linda Pangrle Clallam County 3rd St Bldg HVAC Submittals Page 2/18 2010 Lid P l From 'Kevin G Wight' <kevinw @andgar com> To <Ipangrle@cityofpa.us> Date 2/18/2010 8 52 AM Subject: Clallam County 3rd St Bldg HVAC Submittals Attachments Shoemaker 700MA supply air diffuser submittal pdf Honeywell- TB8000 TStat s ubmittal.pdf Mitsubishi MSY24_MUY24 ductless AC submittal.pdf NuTone QTRN 110 Exhast Fan submittal pdf Shoemaker 600 -700 return air grille submittal pdf Part 2 Submittals for 3rd Street Building Kevin Gene Wight Commercial HVAC Design /Build Estimator 6920 Salashan Pkwy A106 Ferndale Wa 98248 Office 360 366 9900 Ext 168 Fax 360 366 5800 What Else Can Andgar Do For You? Click here <http. /www andgar com /andgar- company php> to find out. Confidentiality Notice The content of this email is intended solely for the individual or destination of which it is addressed and may contain information that is privileged confidential, and /or exempt from disclosure under state and federal laws If you are not the intended recipient, or are not authorized to receive this in their behalf you are hereby notified that you may not use copy distribute or disclose to anyone this message or the content contained herein If you have received this message in error notify the sender by reply and delete it immediately s 3 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE TAG I BRAND I DESCRIPTION MODEL SEER COOLING' BTU'S HEATING 1 CFM AC-1 I MITSUBISHI I INDOOR NC UNIT MSY -A24NA 16 I 22.000 NA 1 624 CU -1 I MITSUBISHI I OUTDOOR UNIT MUY -A24NA 16 I 22.000 NA NA EF 1 I NUTONE I EXHAUST FAN OTRN110 NA I NA NA 110 EF -2 I NUTONE I EXHAUST FAN QTRN110 NA I NA NA 110 SD- I SHOEMAKER I SUPPLY DIFFUSER 700 -MA NA I NA NA NA I SHOEMAKER I RETURN AIR GRILLE 700/600 NA 1 NA NA NA (fl I HONEYWELL I THERMOSTAT TB8220U -1003 NA I NA NA NA I I I I I I VOLTAGE 208/230 -V (1 -PH1 208/230 -V (1 -PH1 115-V (1 -PH1 115-V (1 -PH) NA NA NA NOTES IAFUE I NA N/A NA NA _a NA NA F M NA WO g F a O 13- Za O a U O M -0 LINESET EXISTING GROUND MOUNTED HEAT PUMP AND DUCTWORK TORE REUSED FOR ZONE 8 1 �1RA -Z3 6RD EXISTING GROUND MOUNTED HEAT PUMP AND DUCTWORK I TO BE REUSED FOR ZONE 0 2 (8)SD -Z2 8 "RD O (I)SD -ZI 6' RD (7)RA -ZI 6" RD 4 1 ZONE 82 T STAT I (3)RA-Z1 8"RD II (41RA- 21 8"RD 12" RD i- --"t. -10' 2 111 (51RA -Z( 8"RD 1 l i II (8)RA -Z2 8 "RO j 1 4! (10)SD -Z2 8 "RD 1 ZONE 2 (2ISD -ZI 8 "RD (111RA -Z3 1(1" 8.0 (12)RA -2312 RD (91RA -Z2 10" RD tAC -I +2 101RA -7.2 10"RD (3)SD -ZI 8"R0 L fl IISD -Z2 8"RD (121SD -Z3 8 "RD +1) RESTROOM EXHAUST FAN (SEE SHEET M -2 DETAIL-I) +2) INDOOR AIR CONDITIONING UNIT (SEE SHEET M -2 DETAIL -2) +3) OUTDOOR AIR CONDITIONING UNIT (SEE SHEET M -2 DETAIL-2) (4)SD -ZI 8"RD ZONE 1 (5)SD-Z1 8"RD (6)SD -ZI 8 "RD CI 1 12"R 16 10 "R II 11 12" RD ZONE 81 (19)SD -23 8 "RD Z QQ( 3 rim (13112A -Z3 8"RD lY.�"""'°kl 1R■ 8" RD 8' RE (13)SD -Z3 8 "RD (1 ZONE #3 Q r (7)SD -Zl 8"RD JI .181S13-Z3 8 "RD (6)RA -ZI 8"RD ZONE 83 (14)RA -Z3 10" RD T STAT EXISTING ROOFTOP UNIT AND DUCTWORK TO BE REUSED FOR ZONE 8 3 8' RD 8' RD (141SD -Z3 8 "RD IT RD 1 (15)0A -23 10" RD M -1 n POWER CABLE CEILING MATERIAL P JOIST SPACER BLOCK MOUNTING TABS GRILLE JOIST Housing mounted to 1- joists. Use i joist spacer block (provided). DETAIL -1 EXHAUST FANS ON OFF SWITCH LINE IN EF 1 EF 2 BLK W HT 1 WHT GRD 1 GRO SWITCH BOX LOR INSULATION (Can be placed round and over tan housing.) FAN HOUSING 4-IN. ROUND DUCT Purchase 4 -IN. ROUNQ separately ELBOW(S) WIRING UNIT ROOF CAP 10 'WOO k WHT electrical wiring. Run 120 VAC house wiring to Installation lorati Use proper UL approved connector to secure house wiring to wiring plate. Connect wires as shown In wiring diagrams. WALL CAP 1 -4.INSTALLAT1ON DIAGRAM ACCESSORIES Chet the followng parts before Installer andoor unit (1) 16cb-atIon Plate p)1 plate fume screw 4025 mm 1(3) (Romero controller holder H) I35 6 mm (Bleck) 1 Y(AAA)be (8) 1(6)1wrais s remote controller Fa4 hq (1) (Far Mt left-rear piping) (8) tar Nampo lire/ PARTS TO BE r.........�.. AT YOUR SITE (A) Indodautdoerad connecting two' 0)1 Eate.taon pee (a1 wait lw10 slam fE)1 tel bale cover (E)+ Pipe rung band (F)1 .Ring screw f r (E)4 20 mm (0(1 EON I. 8) PeCy Drab rye (I) (or soft PVC Mme, 19/32 b.(15 mm) inner dla and PVC pipe VP16) 111) Refrigeration oil 1 (K) 1 Power apply add Note Ram h doorlautdoor u connecting wire (A) and power supply cord (K) at least 3 ft. 11 m) away born to N antenn wlr DETAIL -2 DUCTLESS SPLIT AIR CONDITIONER i 2 28, 128,6 CU -1 AC -1 Bes to not us. wall e ove IC) to prevent mdoor/wmoor connecwg re (A) from contacting d pare in the wan and prey damage rodents case nag haw. ndew u t a nw Yore (C) After tM leak Net sporty 9reula0g male dal tightly so that there Is no gap. ��100 n11 work(ng pkb tor maintenance ash mine Soo kw..,.: l 33 -1116 L1g 11-11116 °Air Inlet outlet 4-318 13/16 No 1802 whenate ping b to be attached ma well containing metals On plated) or modal nadag, use a chemically treated wooden piece 25/32 In (20 mm) or thicker between the wall and to piping Or wrap T to 8 iuma a nealamn vbryl tape arprmd the Pb61g. To waling piping. perform COOL operation for 30 min tee a pump Omen before removing the Id arc mnd0Oner Renck. flare =Carding to the dirnen* for new refrigerant Outdoor R installation Unit Inch Un mm 840 00 EEE OAir Inlet 7 0 Air. 9et 9- 109210108 40 HOOMAIN COMMERCIAL SUBMITTAL FORM COLLAR SIZE I 6 -20 T BAR FRAME SEISMIC SUPPORT HOLES 23 3/4 700 MA COLLAR SIZE T BAR lo- 6 -20 FRAME 1 1 fl MOVABLE CORE RE 23 3/4 700 MAO PROJECT Clallam County 3rd St Level -1 LOCATION Ceiling Supply Diffuser ENGINEER ARCHITECT CONTRACTOR Andgar Corporation N: \Opel loons \Final Website Subn ittnl\Commaraaal\700 MA 4 3/8 4 3/8 700 MA Series T -Bar Modular Core Standard Modular core T -Bar lay -in diffuser 2 x 2 galvaneal steel panel with seismic support holes Movable cores provide multiple fixed air patterns 6 x 6 thru 20 x 20 diffuser sizes Soft White Optional Opposed blade damper (700 MA -O) Square collar 1 x 2 panel 2 x 4 panel TVB Thermal Vapor Blanket 1 thick 2 x 2 foil faced self adhesive insulation blanket SUBMITTAL REVIEW 700 MA 700 MAO Print Form 3/09 TB8220 Commercia VisionPROTM Programmab e Thermostat VISIONPROTM 8000 TOUCHSCREEN APPLICATION The TB8220 Commercial VisionPROTM' 8000 Touchscreen Programmable Thermostat is an effortless, seven -day programmable thermostat that provides universal system compatibility precise comfort control and is easy -to- program. The TB8220 provides temperature control for gas, oil, electric and heat pumps for up to 2 heat, 2 cool systems. FEATURES Large, clear display with backlight shows the current and set temperature and time —even in the dark. Menu driven programming make setup effortless Beautiful ergonomic design is smart and sophisticated to match your customers lifestyle. Touchscreen interaction Real -time clock keeps time during power failures and automatically updates to daylight savings. `Saving Changes notification lets you know when the schedule changes have been saved. Change reminders let you know when to replace the batteries. Holiday Override options allow you to override the program schedule, as desired. Speedy same schedule programming —no need to copy multiple days. Armchair programming allows you to remove the thermostat from the wall for programming. Application Specifications Ordering Information Installation Wiring Installer Setup Operation Troubleshooting (Table 11) Honeywell PRODUCT -DATA Contents 1 2 2 4 5 12 18 23 63- 2625 -1 TB8220 COMMERCIAL VISIONPROTM' PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT SPECIFICATIONS Thermostat Description See Table 1 Electrical Ratings See Table 2. Temperature Ratings Operating Ambient: TB8220 0 °F to 120 °F 18 °C to 49 °C) C7089U C7189U 5% to 95 Shipping: 30 F to 150 F 34 4 °C to 65.6 °C) Display Accuracy ±1°F (±0 5 °C). Setpoint: Range Heating 40 °F to 90 °F (4 °C to 32 °C). Cooling 50 °F to 99 °F (10 °C to 37 °C) Default Settings. See Table 3 Humidity Ratings (RH, non condensing): TB8220 VisionPRO Thermostats. 5% to 90% C7089U C7189U 5% to 95% Feature Powering methods System types (up to 2 heat/2 cool) Changeover System setting Fan setting Terminal 1W (Heating) Y (Cooling) G (Fan) rIA (Economizer/TOD) Table 1 Thermostat Description. Description Battery only 24 Vac only 24 Vac with battery backup Gas or electric heat with air conditioning Warm air hot water high efficiency furnaces, and heat pumps Heat only Heat only with fan Cool only 'Manual or Auto changeover selectable 1 Heat Off -Cool -Auto 1 Auto -On Table 2. Electrical Ratings Voltage (50/60 Hz) 120 30 Vac 120 30 Vac 120 30 Vac 120 30 Vac ORDERING INFORMATION Running Current 10 02 1 OA 10 02 1 OA 10 02 0 60A 10 02 1 OA 63- 2625 -1 2 Cool Indication Displays 'Cool On when Cool is activated. Heat Indication Displays 'Heat On when Heat is activated Auxiliary Heat Indication Displays Aux. Heat On when Auxiliary Heat is activated. Clock Accuracy" ±1 minute per month Table 3. Energy Star Default Program Settings. Setpoints Heat I Cool Schedule Period Time 1Occ1 18 170 °F (21 °C) 175 °F (24 °C) IUnoccl 110 155 °F (10 °C) 185 °F (29 5 °C) 1 Occ2 1Unocc2 1- Cycle Rates (at 50% Heating Selectable 1 Cooling: Selectable 1 Load)• 12 cycles per hour 6 cycles per hour On Auto Fan Setting Interstage Differential: Droopless control Once the first stage is running at 90% load, the thermostat energizes the second stage Finish: TB8000 Premier White® color C7189U Wall Mount Remote Indoor Sensor Premier White® color T7770A Wall Mount Remote Indoor Sensor Premier White® color Batteries Three replaceable AAA alkaline batteries Power thermostat when 24 Vac common is not used Non replaceable lithium battery with ten -year life Under nor mal conditions holds calendar and time settings. NOTE. Alkaline batteries keep calendar and time if lithium battery is no longer functional. Resistance Characteristics of Remote Sensors C7089U Outdoor Sensor 10K ohm NTC C7189U Remote Indoor Sensor 10K ohm NTC C7772 Flush -Mount Remote Indoor Sensor 20K ohm NTC T7770A1006 Wall -Mount Remote Indoor Sensor 20K ohm NTC T7770A3002 Wall -Mount Remote Indoor Sensor 10K ohm NTC When purchasing replacement and modernization products from your TRADELINE® wholesaler or distributor refer to the TRADELINE® Catalog or price sheets for complete ordering number lf,you have additional questions, need further information or would like to comment on our products or services, please write or phone. 1 Your local Honeywell Automation and Control Products Sales Office (check white pages of your phone directory). 2. Honeywell Customer Care 1885 Douglas Drive North Minneapolis, Minnesota 55422 -4386 In Canada Honeywell Limited /Honeywell Limitee 35 Dynamic Drive, Scarborough, Ontario M1V 4Z9 International Sales and Service Offices in all principal cities of the world Manufacturing in Australia, Canada, Finland France Germany Japan, Mexico Netherlands Spain, Taiwan United Kingdom, U S.A. Calibration (TB8220, C7089U C7189U T7770A): No field calibration required. Mounting Means TB8220 Direct wall -mount using mounting screws and anchors provided. Fits standard vertical or horizontal 2 in. x 4 in. junction box. C7089U Mounts outside of living space with mounting clip and screws provided C7189U T7770A. Mounts directly on the wall using mounting screws and anchors provided. Fits a vertical 2 x 4 in. junc tion box. Cover Plate 32003796 -001 Cover Plate is used to cover marks left on the wall by the old thermostat. Dimensions. TB8220 Touchscreen Thermostat: See Fig. 1 C7089U Outdoor Sensor Mounting Clip See Fig. 3 C7189U Remote Indoor Sensor see Fig. 5 T7770A. See Fig. 4 32003796 -001 Cover Plate. See Fig. 2 WALLPLATE 3 -3/8 (86) `r UP 3.3/8 (86) 1 THERMOSTAT 6 (152) 14-9/ (116) THERMOSTAT AND WALLPLATE 1-3/8 (35)1 Fig. 1 TB8220 Touchscreen Thermostat dimensions in in. (mm). J M22421 TB8220 COMMERCIAL VISIONPROTm PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT 5 -1/2 (140) 3 -5/16 Fig. 2. 32003796 -001 Cover Plate dimensions in in. (mm). Fig. 3. C7089U Outdoor Sensor Mounting Clip dimensions in in. (mm). I nnnnnn f 2 -3/8 (60) 3 -3/16 (80) 7 7/8 (200) I f- 3 5/16 (84) 0 U �v 0 0 1 -1/2 (38) KNOCKOUTS FOR EUROPEAN APPLICATIONS 4 2 -3/8 (60) STANDARD UTILITY CONDUIT BOX (2 X 4) MOUNTING HOLES 488 15/16 Fig. 4 T7770A dimensions in in. (mm). M22139 5 -1/16 (128) M22936 3 63-2625--1 TB8220 COMMERCIAL VISIONPROTm PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT 4 -5/8 (117) Honeywell 2 -3/4 (70) MERCURY NOTICE INSTALLATION A\ CAUTION f• 1 118 �I (29) M6•188 FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW Fig. 5. C7189U Indoor Sensor dimensions in in. (mm). If this control is replacing a control that contains mercury in a sealed tube, do not place your old control in the trash. Dispose of properly Contact your local waste management authority for instructions regarding recycling and the proper disposal of an old control When Installing this Product. 1 Read these instructions carefully Failure to follow them could damage the product or cause a hazardous condition. 2. Check ratings given in instructions and on the product to ensure the product is suitable for your application. 3. Installer must be a trained experienced service technician. 4 After installation is complete, check out product operation as provided in these instructions. Electrical Shock or Equipment Damage Hazard. Can shock individuals or short equipment circuitry. Disconnect power supply before installation Select Thermostat Location Select a location for the thermostat about 5 ft (1 5m) above the floor in an area with good air circulation at average temperature See Fig. 6 63- 2625 -1 4 l X NO WALLPLATE WIRE HOLE THERMOSTAT YES IQ) 1 5 FEET [1.5 METERS) 1 NO Fig. 6. Select thermostat location. Do not install the thermostat where it can be affected by Drafts or dead spots behind doors and in corners. Hot or cold air from ducts. Radiant heat from sun or appliances. Concealed pipes and chimneys. Unheated (uncooled) areas such as an outside wall behind the thermostat. Separate Wallplate from Thermostat 1 Separate the wallplate from the thermostat. See Fig. 7 M22267 Fig. 7 Separate wallplate from thermostat. M22258 Install Wallplate (See Fig 8) Mount the thermostat horizontally on the wall: 1 Pull the wires through the wire hole on the wallplate 2. Position the wallplate on the wall with the arrow pointing up Level the wallplate for appearance only 3. Use a pencil to mark the mounting holes. 4. Remove the wallplate from the wall and drill two 3/16 in. holes in the wall (if drywall) as marked For firmer material such as plaster drill two 7/32 in holes. Tap the wall anchors (provided) into the drilled holes until flush with the wall. 5. Pull the wires through the wire hole on the wallplate and position the wallplate over the wall anchors. 6. Insert the mounting screws into the wall anchors and tighten. WIRING NOTES MOUNTING HOLES MOUNTING SCREWS (2) WALL CAUTION WIRES THROUGH WALL AND WIRE SLOT o r WALL ANCHORS (2) Fig. 8. Install wallplate. HEAT PUMP CONVENTIONAL, i i t Y2 Y2 RC 0 RC L R R A t W 0/B W1 NO W2 Y Y S1 S1 G G S2 S2 C SCREW TERMINALS M22780 M19916 Electrical Shock Hazard. Can cause electrical shock or equipment damage. Disconnect power supply before connecting wiring. IMPORTANT All wiring must agree with applicable codes, ordinances and regulations. Use 18 gauge thermostat wire Shielded cable is not required. Refer to Table 5 for terminal designation descriptions. See Fig 12 through 22 for wiring diagrams for specific equipment applications. 1 Select set of terminal identifications that correspond to your system type (conventional or heat pump). See Fig. 9 Fig. 9 Terminal identifications for system type. 2. Loosen screw terminals used for the application TB8220 COMMERCIAL VISIONPROTM PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT 5 3. Insert the wires into the terminal block and tighten each screw terminal. See Fig. 10 Fig. 10. Insert wires into terminal block. 4 Push excess wire back into the wall opening and restrict wires to the shaded area. See Fig 11 5. Plug the wall opening with nonflammable insulation to prevent drafts from affecting the thermostat. WIRE WALL OPENING SHADED AREA WALLPLATE 6-JP A Ce Fig. 11 Restrict wires to shaded area of wire hole Table 4 Wiring Diagrams. Wallplate Terminal Wiring Diagram System Type Identifications Figure Standard Heat/Cool 'Conventional 112 13 Heat Only (Conventional 114 Heat Only with Fan 'Conventional Cool only (Conventional +16 Standard Multistage Conventional 17 18 up to 2 Heat/2 Cool Heat Pump Heat Pump 19 20 (No Auxiliary Heat) Heat Pump Heat Pump 21 22 (with Auxiliary Heat) Multiple T7770A 27 28, 29 Sensors Multiple C7189U 30 Sensors 115 11 1 M22266 63- 2625 -1 TB8220 COMMERCIAL VISIONPROTM PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT Table 5. Terminal Designation Descriptions. Terminal Designation Description Rc Power for cooling— connect to secondary side (see Note 1) of cooling system transformer R Power for heating— connect to secondary side (see Note 1) of heating system transformer IY Compressor output. C Common wire from secondary side of cooling (see Note 2) system transformer W 'Heat relay I G I Fan relay I W2 'Second stage heat relay IY2 (Second stage cooling O/B Changeover valve for heat pumps. (see Note 3) A Economizer/Time -Of -Day (TOD) output (see Note 4) powered via R terminal. S1 Optional outdoor or indoor remote sensor (See Note 5) S2 Optional outdoor or indoor remote sensor (See Note 5) L Powers red LED behind plastic in upper right corner of the thermostat. Conventional System Wiring Y2 L A W2 S1 S2 1 IL OUTDOOR /INDOOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR ECONOMIZE R R w Y G C n I FAN RELAY ---1 COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR 1, HEAT RELAY 7 POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER. /J\ WHEN USING BATTERIES. THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION IS OPTIONAL. M22781A Fig. 12. Typical wiring of single transformer 1H /1C system. 63- 2625 -1 6 NOTES 1 When used in a single- transformer system, leave metal jumper wire in place between Rc and R. If used on a two- transformer system, remove metal jumper wire between Rc and R. 2. Common wire is optional when thermostat is used with batteries. When using separate transformers for heating and cooling, the common must come from the cooling transformer 3 If thermostat is configured for a heat pump in the Installer Setup configure changeover valve for cool (0-factory setting) or heat (B). 4 Reference economizer literature for wiring details. When set for economizer operation the A terminal provides the occupancy signal. (Power indicates occupied.) 5 Sensor wires must have a cable separate from the thermostat control cable. Terminal "A" Wiring Details for Economizers Wire the A terminal to the W7212 'N' terminal, or the W7459 'TR' terminal. When using dual transformers at the thermostat, the heating transformer must power the economizer The A signal is powered from the R terminal and energizes the economizer to signal occupied status and drive the damper to the set minimum position OUTDOOR/INDOOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR ECONOMIZER FAN RELAY COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR HEAT RELAY 24 VAC L1 (HOT) L2 A POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. A REMOVE FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER. /s\ WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION IS OPTIONAL. WHEN USED, THE COMMON MUST CONNECT TO THE COOLING TRANSFORMER SECONDARY. M22782A Fig. 13. Typical hookup of dual transformer 1H /1C system. OUTDOOR /INDOOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR /1\ POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. A FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER. A WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION IS OPTIONAL. M22783A Fig. 14 Typical hookup of heat -only system. Y2 L A W2 S1 S2 Il R R W Y G C 3 HEAT RELAY ECONOMIZER /FAN RELAY/ HEAT RELAY A L1 (HOT) 24VAC11 ii L2 OUTDOOR /INDOOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR ECONOMIZER 1 POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER. A WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION IS OPTIONAL. M22784A Fig. 15. Typical hookup of heat -only system with fan. Y2 L A W2 s1 �I OUTDOOR /INDOOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER. FAN RELAY (-4, COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR ECONOMIZER POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. A WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION IS OPTIONAL. M227e5A Fig. 16. Typical hookup of cool -only system. TB8220 COMMERCIAL VISIONPROT" PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT NO 0 MP S2 OUTDOOR/INDOOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 Y2 L A W2 S1 1 Y2 L A W2 S1 S2 FAN RELAY C HEAT RELAY 2 -COOL RELAY 2' COOL RELAY 1 ECONOMIZER' HEAT RELAY 1 1Q POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. A FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER. A WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION IS OPTIONAL. Fig. 17 Typical hookup of single transformer multistage system (up to 2H /2C). 24 VAC OUTDOOR /INDOOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 HEAT RELAY 2 f -1 COOL RELAY 2/ COOL RELAY 1' ECONOMIZER' HEAT RELAY 1 24 VAC Q t POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED A REMOVE FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER. A WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION IS OPTIONAL. WHEN USED THE COMMON MUST CONNECT TO THE COOLING TRANSFORMER SECONDARY. M227864 L L1 (HOT) L2 L1 (HOT) L2 M22787A Fig. 18. Typical hookup of dual transformer multistage system (up to 2H /2C). 7 63- 2625 -1 TB8220 COMMERCIAL VISIONPROTM PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT Heat Pump System Wiring 1 OUTDOOR /INDOOR Z\ TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 ECONOMIZER OPTIONAL OUTDOOR OR INDOOR REMOTE SENSOR. WIRES MUST HAVE A CABLE SEPARATE FROM THE THERMOSTAT CABLE. 'OUTDOOR/INDOOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CHANGEOVER VALVE ;FAN RELAY 1- COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR' CHANGEOVER VALVE; POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. n FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER Q WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION IS OPTIONAL. "O /B" TERMINAL SET TO CONTROL AS EITHER "0" OR "B" IN THE INSTALLER SETUP Fig. 19. Typical hookup of single -stage heat pump with no auxiliary heat (114I1C). 1 ECONOMIZER 'COMPRESSOR 21 1COMPRESS071 Q POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER. 3Q WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION IS OPTIONAL. Q 'O /B' TERMINAL SET TO CONTROL AS EITHER '0" OR 'B' IN THE INSTALLER SETUP /5\ OPTIONAL OUTDOOR OR INDOOR REMOTE SENSOR. WIRES MUST HAVE A CABLE SEPARATE FROM THE THERMOSTAT CABLE. M22789B Fig. 20. Typical hookup of multistage heat pump with no auxiliary heat (2H /2C). 63- 2625 -1 8 1 OUTDOOR /INDOOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR AUXILIARY HEAT RELAY `OUTDOOR /INDOOR Q TEMPERATURE I SENSOR ;FAN RELAY 1- COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR!.- CHANGEOVER VALVE; Q POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. n FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER. WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION IS OPTIONAL. Q "O /B" TERMINAL SET TO CONTROL AS EITHER "0" OR "B" IN THE INSTALLER SETUP 5Q OPTIONAL OUTDOOR OR INDOOR REMOTE SENSOR. WIRES MUST HAVE A CABLE SEPARATE FROM THE M227888 THERMOSTAT CABLE. Fig. 21 Typical hookup of single -stage heat pump with auxiliary heat (2H /1C). ECONOMIZER RC R ®l. 0 /B, Y G r 1 AUXILIARY HEAT RELAY 1 CHANGEOVER VALVE 1 ECONOMIZER i 1 4 COMPRESSOR 2 FAN RELAY 1-• COMPRESSOR 1 1 WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION IS OPTIONAL. "O /B" TERMINAL SET TO CONTROL AS EITHER "0' OR "B" IN THE INSTALLER SETUP OPTIONAL OUTDOOR OR INDOOR REMOTE SENSOR. WIRES MUST HAVE A CABLE SEPARATE FROM THE THERMOSTAT CABLE. M227908 /i\ POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. Q FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER. M22791B Fig. 22. Typical hookup of multistage heat pump with auxiliary heat (3H /2C). POWER THE THERMOSTAT You can choose from three methods to power the thermostat: Batteries only (AAA alkaline) 24 Vac direct connection only 24 Vac direct connection with battery backup (AAA alkaline). Wiring 24 Vac Common Single- Transformer System— Connect the common side of the transformer to the C screw terminal of the thermostat wallplate Leave the metal jumper wire in place between Rc and R. Two Transformer System— Connect the common side of the cooling transformer to the C screw terminal of the thermostat wallplate Remove the metal jumper wire between Rc and R. Installing Batteries 1 Install three AAA alkaline batteries on the back of the thermostat as marked See Fig. 23 BATTERIES (3) M1991B Fig. 23. Installing batteries. 2. Locate and remove tab labeled Remove See Fig. 24 IMPORTANT This tab must be removed in order to set the real -time clock. M19920 Fig. 24 Remove tab labeled REMOVE from thermostat back. TB8220 COMMERCIAL VISIONPROTm PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT 9 Locate and Mount C7089U Outdoor Temperature Sensor (Optional) Mount the sensor where (see Fig 25): cannot tamper with settings. there is good air circulation it can measure true outdoor ambient temperature. surface is flat. wire distance between C7089U and thermostat is less than 200 feet. Do not mount the sensor in direct sunlight. where hot or cold air blows on the sensor Discharge line from an outdoor compressor unit, vent or fan causes inaccurate temperature readings. where snow, ice or debris can cover it. Use the following steps to mount the sensor 1 Remove the sensor from the mounting clip 2. Mark the area on the location selected for mounting the sensor mounting clip 3. Mount the clip Fig. 25. Typical locations for C7089U Outdoor Sensor Wire C7089U Outdoor Sensor CAUTION Electrical Interference (Noise) Hazard. Can cause erratic system operation. Keep wiring at least one foot away from large inductive loads such as motors, line starters, lighting ballasts and large power distribution panels Use shielded cable to reduce interference when rerouting is not possible 63- 2625 -1 TB8220 COMMERCIAL VISIONPROTM PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT 1 Wire C7089U Outdoor Sensor to S1 and S2 terminals on the thermostat. If leadwire provided is not long enough (60 in.) run a cable to a hole at C7089U location. a. Using color -coded 18 -gauge thermostat wire is recommended. For example of general wiring of C7089U see Fig 26 2. Mount C7089U in its mounting clip 3. Plug wiring hole using nonhardening caulk or putty A arr C7089 A USE APPROPRIATE MOUNTING MEANS FOR THE TYPE OF STRUCTURE. A PLUG WIRING HOLE WITH NON HARDENING CAULK OR PUTTY Fig. 26. Wire C7089U Outdoor Sensor to the thermostat. Locate and Mount T7770A or C7189U Remote Indoor Temperature Sensor (Optional) Locate and mount the sensor in the same fashion as the thermostat. See the Select Thermostat Location section. Sensor Wiring for Temperature Averaging SUBBASE S1 0 T7770A T7770A T7770A T7770A WIRING HOLE THROUGH STRUCTURE M22831 M19970A Fig. 27 Wiring four T7770A1006 (20K ohm) Sensors 63- 2625 -1 10 Consider the following as well' 1 Be sure wire distance between sensor and thermostat is less than 200 feet. 2. Mark the area on the wall selected for mounting the sensor or junction box. 3. Sensor wire must be separate from the thermostat cable 4. Run wire cable to a hole at the selected wall location. 5. Pull approximately three inches of wire through the opening NOTE. Color- coded, 18 -gauge wire is recommended. Wire Indoor Sensor CAUTION Electrical Interference (Noise) Hazard. Can cause erratic system operation. Keep wiring at least one foot away from large inductive loads such as motors line starters, lighting ballasts and large power distribution panels. 1 Check Installer Setup Number (ISU) 340 to ensure it is set to the desired value (See Table 6 2. Wire sensor to Si and S2 thermostat terminals. 3. Push excess wire back into the hole. Plug the hole using nonhardening caulk, putty or insulation to prevent drafts from affecting performance. 4 Remove sensor cover 5. Mount sensor to the wall or junction box using the screws and anchors provided 6. Level the sensor for appearance only Device functions correctly even when not level. 7 Install sensor cover SUBBASE 51 0 I I T4 o- T4 T3 T7770A3002 T7770A3002 THE T7770A3002 IS A 10K OHM SENSOR. M22933 Fig. 28. Wiring two T7770A3002 (10K ohm) Sensors to provide a temperature averaging network. T7770A1006 T7770A1006 SUBBASE 51 0 T4 0 17770A3002 1\THE T7770A3002 IS A 10K OHM SENSOR. M22934 Fig. 29. Wiring two T7770A1006 (20K ohm) Sensors and one T7770A3002 (10K ohm) sensor to provide a temperature averaging network SET CALENDAR AND TIME This thermostat is designed to under normal use automatically keep current time and day in memory for up to ten years once the calendar is set. There are two ways to set the calendar for this thermostat: Setting Calendar Once Functioning See steps 1 through 4 in the Advanced Settings section to set year month and day SET CURRENT DAY SET MONTH fin L1 Cu❑ 1 I n 1 1 1 j TB8220 COMMERCIAL VISIONPROTm PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT USE ARROWS TO SET YEAR AND TIME Fig. 31 Setting calendar and time when thermostat is first powered 11 Y2 W2 S1 1 S2 WIRES MUST HAVE A CABLE SEPARATE FROM THE THERMOSTAT CABLE. M22935 Fig. 30. Wiring four C7189U (10K ohm) Sensors to provide a temperature averaging network. Setting Calendar When First Powered When first powered, the thermostat proceeds through a sequence of screens to set the calendar When first powered the thermostat proceeds through a sequence of screens to set the calendar See Fig. 31 1A, C7189 C7189 C7189 C7189 M22761 63- 2625 -1 TB8220 COMMERCIAL VISIONPROTM PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT INSTALLER SETUP Advanced Settings The thermostat has advanced settings to match the HVAC system These settings can be adjusted to match specific needs Installer Settings (Complete Set) Access to the installer settings is obtained as follows: 1 From the main screen, press SYSTEM. Five blank touch keys show on the bottom of the screen between DONE and CANCEL. 2. Press and hold the two blank keys on either side of the center blank key for approximately five seconds. (See Fig 32.) 3. The Setup Number displays to the lower -left area of the screen It is a four -digit code beginning with zero The current setting is displayed to the right. NOTE. To cycle through the Setup Numbers press the up or down arrow [SYSTEj 0 i $rxp..n M19923 Fig. 32. Entering Installer Setup. 63- 2625 -1 12 There are two different groups of settings. A complete set designed for the installation use. A simple set to limit accessibility for typical users. User Settings (Simple Set) Access to the user settings is obtained as follows: 1 From the main screen, press SYSTEM. Five blank touch keys show on the bottom of the screen between DONE and CANCEL. 2. Press and hold the center blank key approximately five seconds 3. The Setup Number displays to the lower -left area of the screen. It is a four -digit code beginning with zero The current setting is displayed to the right. NOTE. To cycle through the Setup Numbers, press the up or down arrow. Fig. 33. Entering User Setup. M22766 INSTALLER SETUP NUMBERS (ISU), SETTINGS, AND TESTS (TABLE 6) Use the Installer System Test to test the heating cooling and fan. Refer to the latter portion of Table 6 A\ CAUTION Equipment Damage Hazard. Minimum compressor off time is bypassed during Installer System Test Avoid cycling compressor quickly Installer Setup Installer Setup Number 0120 10130 10140 10150 0160 Name Date (Year Upper) 1 Date (Year Lower) 1Date (Month) 1Date (Day) Schedule Options 0170 System Selection 0175 TOD /Economizer output 0180 0185 Heat Fan Operation 0 Pre occupancy Purge Duration 0190 Reversing Valve O/B 0 0220 Cycles Per Hour (CPH) for first stage compressor 0230 CPH for second stage compressor 0240 CPH for first stage conventional heat 104 1 115 4 0250 CPH for second 5 stage conventional heat Default Setting All Settings Notes 20 20 -20xx Available year range 2001 2178 21 -21xx 100 -99 'Available year range. 2001 2178 11 12 11 31 (Month Dependent) 0— Non Programmable 4— Programmable 8 1 -1H /1C Conv 2 -1H /1C HP 3-1H w/o fan 4 -1 H with fan 6 -1C 7 -2H /1C HP 8 -2H /2C Conv 9 -2H /1C Conv 10-1H/2C Conv 11 -2H /2C HP 12 -3H /2C HP 0 0— Unused 1 —TOD 2— Economizer 0— Fossil 1— Electric 0 0—no duration 1 —one hour 2 —two hours 3 —three hours 0-0 (0/B On Cool) 1 —B (0/B On Heat) TB8220 COMMERCIAL VISIONPROTM PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT Table 6. Installer Setup Menu. a Setting available for modification in both the Installer and User setup modes. 13 IMPORTANT Use Installer System Test to test heating, cooling and fan. The setting chosen for System Type (ISU 0170) can prevent some System Test Numbers from appearing. NOTE. Unless otherwise noted setup items are accessible through only the Installer setup and not the User setup Economizer energizes A during a call for cool TOD energizes A during Occupied period, and deenergizes A during Unoccupied. Only shown for conventional system with heat stages and fan capability selected If heat pump is selected fan defaults to electric. Shown only if system has fan and schedule programmable. Pre occupancy purge enabled by nonzero duration (and sends economizer to minimum position). Only shown with heat pump system selected 3 1 -6 Only shown for system with cool stages. Selection in this stage changes default CPH of second stage cool. 3 1 -6 Only shown if two stages of cool selected 5 1 12 Only shown if system is conventional with heat stages. Selection in this stage changes default CPH of second stage heat. 1 12 Only shown with at least two stages conventional heat or 2H /1C heat pump selected. 63- 2625 -1 TB8220 COMMERCIAL VISIONPROTM' PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT Installer Setup Installer Setup Number Name 0260 CPH for third Stage Heat 0270 CPH for Auxiliary Heat 0280 Continuous Backlight 0300 Changeover 0310 Deadband 0320 0330 0340 Temperature 0 Indication Scale Daylight Saving 1 Remote 0 Temperature Sensor 0350 Heat Pump 0 Compressor Lockout 0360 Heat Pump Auxiliary 0 Lockout 0535 Temporary Occupied 3 Duration Limit 0540 Number of Periods 4 0580 Minimum Compressor Off Time 0600 Heat Temperature Range Stops Default Setting 9 9 0 1 3 °F (2 °C) 1 12 All Settings 0—No 1 —Yes 0— Manual 1 —Auto 2 (1 5)-2 °F (1 5 °C) 3 (2.0) -3 °F (2.0 °C) 4 (2.5) -4 °F (2.5 °C) 5 (3 0) -5 °F (3 0 °C) 6 (3 5)-6 °F (3 5 °C) 7 (4 0)-7 °F (4 0 °C) 8 (4 5) -8 °F (4 5 °C) 9 (5 0)-9 °F (5 0 °C) 0— F 1 °C 0— Disabled 1— Enabled (US) 0 —None 1— Outdoor for Display 2— Outdoor for Control 3— Remote 10K Indoor 4— Remote 20K Indoor 0—None 15( -9 5)- 15 °F( -9 5 °C) 20(- 6.5)- 20 °F( -6 5 °C) 25( -4 0)- 25 °F(-4 0 °C) 30( 1 0) -30 °F( 1 0 °C) 35(1 5)- 35 °F(1 5 °C) 40(4 5)- 40 °F(4 5 °C) 45(7 0) -45 °F(7 0 °C) 0 —None 40(4 5)- 40 °F(4 5 °C) 45(7 0)- 45 °F(7 0 °C) 50(10 0)- 50 °F(10 0 °C) 55(13 0)- 55 °F(13 0 °C) 60(15 5)- 60 °F(15 5 °C) 0—no duration 1 —one hour 2 —two hours 3 —three hours 4 —four hours 2 -2 Periods 4-4 Periods 5 0 —Off 2 -2 minutes 3 -3 minutes 4-4 minutes 5-5 minutes 90 40 to 90 °F (4 to 32 °C) 0610 Cool Temperature 50 50 to 99 °F (10 to 37 °C) Range Stops a Setting available for modification in both the Installer and User setup modes. 63- 2625 -1 14 Table 6. Installer Setup Menu. (Continued) Notes Only shown if 3H /2C heat pump is selected. 1 12 Only shown if multi -stage heat pump is selected (heat pump with more heat than cool stages) Always shown. If AC power not present the option is overridden and normal backlight operation occurs. Only shown if system has both heat and cool stages. Only shown if Automatic Changeover Selected Averaging would not include on -board sensor It is accomplished by series /parallel combinations. 2 applies only to Heat Pump applications (allowing compressor lockout while displaying temperature) Only shown for heat pump systems with more heat stages than cool selected and remote sensor selection is outdoor for control. Must enforce a dead band between this and Auxiliary Lockout Only shown for heat pump systems with more heat stages than cool selected and remote sensor selection is outdoor for control. Must enforce a dead band between this and Heat Pump Compressor Lockout. 0 means no limit Does not appear if Non programmable is chosen. Applies to all days of the week. With 2 selected the 'Cancel Period' option does not appear on the display Only shown if system has cool stages Only shown if system has heat stages. Only shown if system has cool stages Installer Setup Installer Setup Number Name 0640 0650 0660 0670 Clock Format Extended Fan On time Heat Extended Fan On time Cool Keypad Lockout 0680 Temperature Control 2 Heat 0685 Recovery Heat 5 0 -20 °F /hour Ramp Rate 0690 Temperature Control 2 Cool 0695 0700 Temperature Display 0 Offset Recovery Cool 3 0 -20 °F /hour Ramp Rate 0710 Restore Factory Defaults Default Setting 12 0 0 0 INSTALLER SYSTEM TEST ITEMS Test 1 Installer Test 0 Cool Test 2 Test 3 Installer Test Fan Installer Test Heat Test 4 Installer Test Auxiliary Heat Test 8 Installer Test TOD /Economizer 0—Off 90 -90 seconds 0 —Off 40-40 seconds 0— Unlocked 1— Partial Lockout 1 2— Partial Lockout 2 3 —Fully Locked 1 —Less Aggressive 2— Standard 3 —More Aggressive 1 —Less Aggressive 2— Standard 3 —More Aggressive 3( 1 5)— 3 °F 1 5 °C) 2 (1 0)— 2 °F (1 0 °C) 1 -0 5)— 1°F -0 5 °C) 0 (0 0)-0 °F (0 0 °C) 1 (0 5)-1°F (0 5 °C) 2 (1 0)— 2 °F (1 0 °C) 3 (1 5)-3 °F (1 5 °C) 0 0 —No 1 —Yes 0 —Off 1 —Cool Stage 1 2 —Cool Stage 2 0 0 —Off 1 —Fan On 0 0 —Off 1 —Heat Stage 1 2 —Heat Stage 1 and 2 3 —Heat Stage 1,2 and 3 0 0— Auxiliary Heat Off 1— Auxiliary Heat On 0 0 —TOD /Economizer Off 1 —TOD /Economizer On a Setting available for modification in both the Installer and User setup modes. NOTE. Press the Done button to exit the Installer System Test. TB8220 COMMERCIAL VISIONPROTM PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT Table 6. Installer Setup Menu. (Continued) All Settings Notes 12 -12 Hour 24 -24 Hour 15 Not displayed with fan set to fossil or with cool -only systems Only shown if system has cool stages. Unlocked All functions accessible Partial 1 Locks all but Holiday Override and Up /Down Partial 2: Locks all but Holiday and Override. Full: Entire interface locked /non functional. Only shown if system has heat stages Only integral gains affected. Affects control operation in all control regimes (not just recovery or setpoint change) More Aggressive stops signal prior to reaching the setpoint. (For use with oversized equipment.) Only shown if system has heat stages. 0 disables ramped recovery (step setpoint change at period start time) Only shown if system has cool stages. Only integral gains affected. Affects control operation in all control regimes (not just recovery or setpoint change) More Aggressive stops signal prior to reaching the setpoint. (For use with oversized equipment.) Only shown if system has cool stages. 0 disables ramped recovery (step setpoint change at period start time) This offset applies to both the control temperature and to the display temperature for indoor sensor (and remote indoor sensor) Resets all Installer Setup parameters to default values and resets the schedule to default Energy Star Retains only calendar settings and time. 63- 2625 -1 TB8220 COMMERCIAL VISIONPROTM PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT MAIN SCREEN PROGRAMMING 63- 2625 -1 ENTERS SCHEDULING MODE HOLIDAY CHANGES TEMPERATURE SETTING FOR DESIGNATED NUMBER OF DAYS TIME I DISPLAY CURRENT TIME OF DAY HOLD TIME REMAINING OR NUMBER OF HOLIDAY DAYS REMAINING Table 7 shows default program settings HEAT Schedule 1 Setpoints Period Time I Heat I Cool I0cc1 I8'00am I70 °F (21 °C) 175 °F (24 °C) IUnoccl 110 I55 °F (10 °C) I85 °F (29 5 °C) 10cc2 IUnocc2 I- 1- I- I— I— I— TUE FAN SELECTS `I FAN X Inside ON /AUTO AUTO SYSTEM '-I =I SELECTS EM. I SYSTEMI HEAT /HEAT /OFF/ COOL /AUTO HEAT 11'1.1 IC IU' a_.; (SCHEDULE(( HOLIDAY fl CLOCK SCHEDULE JI Jl J I TUE SHOWS CURRENT ti DAY OF THE WEEK TUE FAN I SHOWS FAN `I FAN I SETTING Inside' AUTO I_I _I SYSTEM SHOWS CURRENT `I SYSTEM I SYSTEM POSITION Table 7 Energy Star Default Program Settings. Fan Settings Auto Fan runs only when heating /cooling system is on See the Fan Schedule section for more information. On Fan runs continuously Fig. 34 Main screen selections. tn. ►r_ A r sL J Occupied (SCHEDULE HOLIDAY II Fig. 35. Main screen display Fan Setting On Auto 16 CLOCK II SCREEN II A. L UP ARROW r —1 I RAISES CSC TEMPERATURE I SETTING Folio ng h DOWN ARROW Schedule LOWERS TEMPERATURE SETTING SCREEN l! (!OVERRIDE SCREEN LOCKS OUT THE SCREEN TO ALLOW FOR CLEANING CLOCK SETS THE TIME FORWARD OR BACK INSIDE TEMPERATURE SHOWS THE CURRENT INSIDE UL ∎I I Following Schedule OVERRIDE! OVERRIDE SET TEMPORARY OVERRIDE TEMPERATURE M22748 SET TO TEMPERATURE SHOWS THE CURRENT SET TEMPERATURE FOLLOWING SCHEDULE SHOWS THE THERMOSTAT IS FOLLOWING THE PROGRAMMED SCHEDULE M22749 System Settings Heat: Thermostat controls the heating system. Oft Both heating and cooling systems are off Cool: Thermostat controls the cooling system. Auto Thermostat automatically changes between heat and cool operation, depending on indoor temperature Programming Heating and Cooling Schedule The thermostat can control up to four different schedule periods per day OCC 1 Work arrival time Period to keep space at a comfortable temperature UNOCCI Work exit time. Period to keep space at an energy- saving temperature. OCC 2: Second occupied period. UNOCC2. Second unoccupied period NOTE. Available schedule times are at 15- minute intervals. Editing Schedule 1 Press SCHEDULE. 2. Press EDIT NOTES The first time a change is made the screen appears mostly blank. (See Fig. 36 Multiple days can be selected MON I) TUE I WED it THU I FRI II SAT it SUN J` J` OK TO PiiCK MULTIPLE DAYS J J` II 11 II CANCEL M19954 Fig. 36. Initial schedule edit screen. 3. Select any combination of days to edit. NOTE Checkmarks appear next to selected days These are scheduled with identical times and temperatures. 4 Press OCC 1 Once pressed OCC 1 flashes to show it is selected. 5. Press Up and Down to modify time and temperatures from this screen. (See Fig. 37 NOTE. Fan settings for the selected period can be programmed for ON or AUTO See Fan Schedule section for more information MON �I I TUE Ij J WED II THU i1 FRI 1 1 SAT SUN l t OK TO PICK MULTIPLE DAYS 1 FAN XI ON AUTO I DONE II 1 CANCEL PERIOD AN f_ .nri, I ft_IU I 1 11 1 II I HEAT COOL II OCC 1 0 UNOCC1 11 OCC 2 11 UNOCC2 I CANCEL 11 1 II_I M22750 Fig. 37 Screen to edit existing settings. 6. Press UNOCC1 and repeat step 5 7 Press OCC 2 and repeat step 5 8. Press UNOCC2 and repeat step 5 TB8220 COMMERCIAL VISIONPROTMI PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT 17 9 When complete, press DONE. SAVING CHANGES appears on the screen to indicate changes are being saved to the day(s) modified. NOTE. To schedule the remaining days of the week, repeat steps 1 -9 10. To exit schedule without saving changes, press CANCEL any time. Cancelling a Schedule Period To accommodate special needs, a period can be cancelled. EXAMPLE. A space is always unoccupied during the week end. Cancel all Saturday and Sunday (occupied and unoccupied) periods. The thermostat then controls to the final Friday UNNOC temperature until Monday OCC 1 period. 1 Press SCHEDULE. 2. Press EDIT 3. Select the Day(s) of the week desired. 4. Press the schedule period to cancel (OCC 1 UNOCC1 OCC 2 or UNOCC2) Once selected the period flashes. 5. Press CANCEL PERIOD 6. The time temperature(s) and fan setting disappear The bar above the selected period is removed, indicating the scheduled period was cancelled. (See Fig 38 NOTE. To reinstate a schedule period, press an arrow to set desired time and temperatures. 7 Press DONE. 1 MON J1 TUE Jl WED 1 THU FRI SAT I� SUN j OK TO PICK MULTIPLE DAYS 1 IFAN 1 DONE II II OCC1 Setting Time 1 Press CLOCK. 2. Use arrows to set current time 3. Press DONE. HEAT 1 I A 1 I.1 1 11 UNOCC1 11 OCC2 11 UNOCC2 11 CANCEL COOL M22752 Fig. 38. Screen displayed when a period is cancelled. IMPORTANT The current day of the week should already be set correctly. If not, see the Advanced Settings section to set the day 63- 2625 -1 TB8220 COMMERCIAL VISIONPROTM PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT OPERATION Setting Temperature Overrides There are three temperature override options. Hold Temperature Until Override and Holiday HOLD TEMPERATURE UNTIL Holds the temperature temporarily until the time set by the user or the next scheduled period time. 1 Press the Up or Down arrow next to the temperature to adjust. The Hold Temperature Until time appears on the screen. The time defaults to the next scheduled period start time NOTE. Time Up and Down arrows are shown for approximately seven seconds. Pressing the screen time (where the 'Hold Temperature Until' time displays) causes arrows to reappear 2. Press Up or Down arrow next to the hold time to set desired time for the thermostat to resume schedule. NOTE. The installer setup can limit the length of time for an override to 1 2, 3 or 4 hours beyond the current time 3. Press CANCEL or SCHEDULE to cancel 'Hold Tempera- ture Until' and resume the schedule NOTE. Once the Hold Temperature Until time is reached the thermostat displays 'Following Schedule to indicate that the Hold (Override) has ended. OVERRIDE Changes temperature setting until the next period takes effect. For use during Unoccupied periods. 1 Press OVERRIDE. The settings change by default to the next Occupied period. NOTE. Changes are limited to those allowed by the lockout level. 2. Press Up or Down arrow to change the override time and temperature HOLIDAY Changes temperature setting for a designated number of days. Press HOLIDAY The screen shows 'Hold Temperature Until 1 DAYS' 1 Press Up or Down arrow to change the number of days desired for the thermostat to override the schedule 2. Press the Up or Down arrow to change the desired temperature for the duration of the holiday NOTE The DAYS Up and Down arrows appear for approxi- mately seven seconds Pressing the screen just below Hold Temperature Until allows the DAYS Up and Down arrows to reappear 3. To cancel the Holiday Override early press CANCEL. 63- 2625 -1 18 NOTE. When the number of Holiday Override days expires, the screen shows 'Following Schedule to indicate that the Holiday Override has ended. Fan Schedule Press FAN while in the SCHEDULE screen to program the system fan. Choices available from the SCHEDULE screen AUTO (default position) Fan runs with equipment. Programmable for all SCHEDULE periods. OCC 1 UNOCC1 OCC 2, and UNOCC2. ON Fan runs continuously Programmable for all SCHEDULE periods) Fan Status Displayed on Main Screen If the fan program is scheduled the scheduled mode (AUTO or ON) appears. When the thermostat is running the fan the fan blade symbol x appears next to FAN to indicate the thermostat has the fan on. NOTE. If the thermostat is not controlling the fan typical for many gas, forced -air heating systems —the fan blade symbol x will not appear even though the fan may be running. Manual Override of Fan Schedule AUTO —fan is automatically following the FAN schedule (choices are AUTO and ON) ON— overrides FAN schedule. The fan is continuously on. Replacing Batteries Not all thermostat models require batteries. If the thermostat has batteries, a low battery warning (see fig) flashes on the main screen for approximately 30 days. NOTES If batteries are not replaced when the Low Battery warning is flashing, the LO batt screen displays continuously and the thermostat stops operating until batteries are replaced. The thermostat has a low battery indicator However it is recommended that the batteries be replaced once each year Do this to prevent leakage and prevent the thermostat and HVAC system from shutting down due to lack of thermostat battery power ri L. 1 1 1 1 LU I L L Fig. 39. Low battery signal. M22755 Replace the batteries as follows: 1 Remove the thermostat from the base by pulling it straight out. (See Table 40 2. Install three new AAA alkaline batteries with proper polarization NOTES 3. Place thermostat back on subbase by aligning terminal screw blocks with the pins on the back of the thermostat. (See Table 41 4 Push the thermostat straight onto the base LTERMINAL SCREW BLOCK Always use AAA alkaline batteries. All programming (Schedule Date and Time) information is retained during battery replacement. WALLPLATE Fig. 40. Removing thermostat from subbase. Fig. 41 Placing thermostat back onto subbase PINS ON BACK OF THERMOSTAT TB8220 COMMERCIAL VISIONPROTM' PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT M22213 19 Cleaning Thermostat Screen The thermostat has a touch screen interface Follow these steps to clean the screen without making thermostat changes: 1 Press SCREEN Thermostat locks out the keypad for 30 seconds to allow for cleaning. IMPORTANT Do not spray any liquid directly on the screen. If using household glass cleaner spray cleaner on cloth. Then use the cloth wipe the screen clean 2. Use damp cloth slightly moistened with water or house- hold glass cleaner to clean the screen. 3. Repeat above steps, as necessary 4. Press DONE to return to the main screen and normal operation NOTE. If no button is pressed for two minutes, the device automatically returns to the main screen Reading Remote Indoor Temperature If connected to an installed remote indoor temperature sensor the thermostat displays the indoor temperature from the remote sensor(s). NOTE. If connected to an installed remote indoor temperature sensor the thermostat internal sensor is not used ONE REMOTE INDOOR SENSOR INSTALLED If one remote indoor temperature sensor is used, the screen showing the Inside temperature reading displays the temperature at the indoor remote sensor location MULTIPLE REMOTE INDOOR SENSORS INSTALLED If more than one remote indoor sensor is used, the screen showing the Inside temperature reading displays the average of all the remote indoor sensors. Reading Outdoor Temperature If connected to an outdoor sensor the thermostat displays the Outside temperature VIEW OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE The Outside temperature is located in the lower right corner of the main screen If it is not on the main screen, view the outdoor temperature by pressing MORE until the outside temperature shows. 63- 2625 -1 TB8220 COMMERCIAL VISIONPROTM PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT Screen Locked Portions of the touch screen interface can be fully or partially locked. See the Advanced Settings section for information to use these features. When the thermostat displays SCREEN LOCKED the touch screen interface is either fully or partially locked Fully Locked Screen In this mode the entire interface is locked and not functional. To unlock screen see the Advanced Settings section. The screen continuously displays SCREEN LOCKED Partially Locked Screen When partially locked: Pressing a locked key prompts the screen to indicate SCREEN LOCKED for five to seven seconds. Pressing an unlocked key with SCREEN LOCKED active removes SCREEN LOCKED from the display. PARTIAL LOCKOUT 1 This mode locks all keys except HOLIDAY OVERRIDE, and temperature Up /Down arrows: User can change the temperature setpoint, but cannot change schedule settings. The temporary temperature change lasts until next scheduled period The screen displays that time User can change the temperature setpoint, but cannot change schedule settings. Pressing HOLIDAY sets the temperature to the Unoccupied setting for the selected period of time The next Occupied period switches back to the program settings. Pressing OVERRIDE sets the temperature to the Occupied setting for the selected period of time. The next Unoccupied period switches back to the program settings. To cancel the temperature override and follow the programmed schedule press CANCEL. To unlock the screen see Advanced Settings section. PARTIAL LOCKOUT 2 This mode locks all keys except HOLIDAY and OVERRIDE. Pressing HOLIDAY sets the temperature to the Unoccupied setting for the selected period of time. The next Occupied period switches back to the program settings Pressing OVERRIDE sets the temperature to the Occupied setting for the selected period of time The next Unoccupied period switches back to the program settings. To cancel the temperature override and follow the programmed schedule press CANCEL. To unlock the screen, see Advanced Settings section. Temperature Recovery The thermostat is equipped with a feature to eliminate guesswork when setting a schedule That is, the user need not know the amount of time for the HVAC system to bring the space to temperature (without overshoot) prior to the scheduled time The thermostat manages that automatically Simply set the program schedule to the desired time to have the space at comfort temperature In addition, program the temperature to this comfort temperature The thermostat activates the heating or cooling at the proper time to reach the scheduled temperature at the scheduled time. NOTE. The setpoint changes gradually to use economical stages and avoid overshoot. 63- 2625 -1 20 For example —the space will be occupied at 8:00 AM and the desired temperature is 70 °F Set the OCC 1 period for 8 AM and 70 °F The thermostat turns on the heat prior to 8 AM to raise the temperature to 70 °F by 8 AM. The thermostat provides an alert that the heating or cooling system is coming on before a scheduled time by displaying 'Recovery' on the screen Minimum -Off Timer Compressor Protection The thermostat has an adjustable Minimum -Off Timer that can be set from zero to five minutes (Factory Setting —five minutes) The Minimum -Off Timer can be bypassed through the Installer System Test or it can be bypassed permanently by setting the Minimum -Off Timer to 0 minutes in the Installer Setup The Minimum -Off Timer is activated after the compressor turns off If the thermostat is system powered (common wire), the Minimum -Off Timer is also activated upon initial startup and after power interruptions. If there is a call for cooling or heating during the Minimum Off Time the thermostat displays 'Wait. When the Minimum Off Timer expires, 'Cool On or 'Heat On (heat pumps only)' appears solidly in the display and the compressor and fan turn on. Economizer /TOD Logic (Table 8) Effective Call for Occupancy Cool Occupied Unoccupied 'Yes INo !Override Table 8. Operation of Terminal A. Terminal A Economizer I TOD Energized I Energized Energized I De- energized De- energized De-energized Energized IEnergized Heat Pump Temperature Lockouts Dual Fuel Heat Pump and Outdoor Temperature Sensor In this operation, there is no external fossil fuel kit (dual fuel kit) installed the thermostat controls this function 1 Choose correct heat pump application in ISU 0170 2. Choose Outdoor Temperature Sensor for Heat Pump Temperature Lockouts Option in ISU 0340 3. Choose appropriate Balance Point Temperature in ISU 0350 OPERATION IN HEAT MODE ABOVE BALANCE POINT (OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE) When the outdoor temperature is above the selected Balance Point Temperature (ISU 0350), only the compressor operates and the fan (G terminal) energizes when the thermostat calls for heat. OPERATION IN HEAT MODE BELOW BALANCE POINT (OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE) When the outdoor temperature is below the selected Balance Point Temperature (ISU 0350), only the Fossil Fuel (auxiliary heat) operates and the fan (G terminal) does not energize when the thermostat calls for heat. Heat Pump with Auxiliary (Backup) Heat and Outdoor Temperature Sensor 1 Choose correct heat pump application in ISU 0170 2. Choose Outdoor Temperature Sensor for Control Option in ISU 0340 3. Choose Compressor Lockout Temperature in ISU 0350 4 Choose Auxiliary Lockout Temperature in ISU 0360 NOTE. There is a 5 °F deadband between Compressor and Auxiliary Heat lockout temperatures Operation in Heat Mode When the outdoor temperature is. Below Compressor Lockout Temperature only Auxiliary Heat operates. Above Auxiliary Lockout Temperature only the Compressor operates. See Fig. 31 Between the two temperatures. both the Compressor and Auxiliary Heat operate w I- 50 i– ce O 35 0 0 1- 0 COMPRESSOR ONLY BOTH COMPRESSOR AND AUXILIARY HEAT AUXILIARY ONLY AUXILIARY LOCKOUT TEMPERATURE COMPRESSOR LOCKOUT TEMPERATURE M19950 Fig 42. Heat Pump Operation with Lockout Temperatures Set. Operating Sequence The thermostat energizes specific terminal(s), depending on the demand for heating cooling or fan. The thermostat screen shows the time inside temperature, system and fan selections. Additional indicators are shown when the heating cooling or fan is energized. See Tables 9 and 10 for specification information Table 9. Sequence of Operation for Conventional Systems. System Fan Setting Setting IOff 'Auto 'Cool 'Auto Cool Auto Stage 1 or Auto Cooling I- I- Energize Screen Call for Action Terminals Message Y G Cool On Cool Auto Stages 1 and 2 Y y2a G Cool On or Auto Cooling IHeat 'Auto Heat Auto Stage 1 or Auto Heating Heat Auto Stages 1 and 2 w W2c Gb Heat On or Auto Heating a If Installer Setup System type is set to two stages of cooling. b G energizes only if Installer Setup 0180 is set to Electric. If Installer Setup System type is set to two stages of heating. W G TB8220 COMMERCIAL VISIONPROTM' PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT Heat On 21 Table 10. Sequence of Operation for Heat Pump Systems. System Fan Energize Screen Setting Setting Call for Action Terminals Message IOff Cool 'Auto Cool Auto or Auto Heat 'Auto Heat Auto or Auto Stage 1 Cooling Stages 1 and 2 Cooling I None Stage 1 Heating Stages 1 and 2 Heating Stages 1 2 and 3 Heating O /B IY G, O /B Y Y2 G, O /B IO /B IY G, O /B Y W1 G, O /B Y Y2 W1 G, O /B C7089U Outdoor Temperature Sensor I Cool On I Heat On Auxiliary Heat On a Configure O/B in Installer Setup Based on last piece of equipment called (cooling O heating B) b If Installer Setup System Type is set to 3Heat/2Cool Heat Pump with Auxiliary Heat. If Installer Setup System Type is set to 2Heat/1Cool Heat Pump with Auxiliary Heat. d This terminal does not energize if Installer Setup System type is set to 2 Heat/2 Cool Heat Pump with no Auxiliary Heat. Second Stage Heat and Cool Control While maintaining setpoint, several factors affect when 2nd stage energizes such as load conditions, environmental conditions, P +I control, and home insulation The second stage energizes when the thermostat senses 1st stage is running at 90% capacity This operation is droopless control. Temperature Sensor Operation and Checkout Allow outdoor or indoor temperature sensor to absorb the air for a minimum of five minutes before taking a reading See the Sensor instructions for more information. NOTE. The C7089U C7189U and T7770A Temperature Sensors are calibrated at the factory and cannot be recalibrated in the field. Operation When installed with Thermostat ISU 0340 set to 1 or 2 the thermostat can display outside temperature Checkout Allow C7089U Outdoor Sensor to absorb outdoor air for a minimum of twenty minutes before taking a reading. With an accurate thermometer (±1°F [0 5 °C]) measure the temperature at the sensor location, allowing time for the thermometer to stabilize before reading. To verify sensor resistance remove one wire from one of the C7089U 60 -in leadwires. Use an ohmmeter to measure the resistance across the sensor Then compare sensor accuracy with the temperature /resistance curve in Fig. 43 63- 2625 -1 TB8220 COMMERCIAL VISIONPROTm PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT C7189U Remote Indoor Temperature Sensor Operation When installed with Thermostat ISU 0340 set to 3, the remote inside temperature is displayed on the Thermostat Home Screen as Inside Temperature. The thermostat internal temperature sensor is not used. The C7189U can be used to provide one remote sensor input or as a temperature averaging network with multiple C7189U Sensors connected as shown in Fig 30 Checkout For best results, allow C7189U Wall Mount Temperature Sensor to absorb the air moving through the room for a minimum of twenty minutes before taking a resistance measurement. With an accurate thermometer (±1 °F [0.5 °C]) measure the temperature at the sensor location, allowing time for the thermometer to stabilize before reading. To verify sensor resistance remove one wire from one of C7189U wiring terminals. Use an ohmmeter to measure the resistance across the sensor Then compare sensor accuracy with the temperature /resistance curve in Fig. 43 220K 190K 160K 1. 130K 0 U 100K a 90K cc 60K 30K 10K OHM AT 77 °F (25 °C) OK -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 °F -40 30 -20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 °C TEMPERATURE (DEGREES) M22823 63- 2625 -1 22 T7770A Remote Temperature Sensor Operation When installed with Thermostat ISU 0340 set to 3 or 4 the remote inside temperature is displayed on the Thermostat Home Screen as Inside Temperature The thermostat internal temperature sensor is not used The T7770A can be used to provide one remote sensor input or as a temperature averaging network with multiple T7770A Sensors connected, as shown in Fig. 27 through 29 Checkout For best results, allow T7770A Wall Mount Temperature Sensor to absorb the air moving through the room for a minimum of twenty minutes before taking a resistance measurement. With an accurate thermometer (±1 F [0 5 °C]) measure the temperature at the sensor location allowing time for the thermometer to stabilize before reading. To verify sensor resistance, remove one wire from one of the wiring terminals. Use an ohmmeter to measure the resistance across the sensor Then verify the sensor accuracy with the temperature /resistance in Fig. 44 80K 70K g 60K Ca 50K U g 40K w 30K 20K 1 OK 20K OHM AT 77 F (25 °C) 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 °F 0 10 20 30 40 °C TEMPERATURE (DEGREES) M5874A Fig. 43. 10K ohm sensor resistance versus temperature. Fig. 44. 20K ohm sensor resistance versus temperature. TROUBLESHOOTING (TABLE 11) Symptom Display does not come on Temperature settings do not change Heating or cooling does not come on Thermostat is calling for Heat (Heat on) or Cool (Cool on) but operating. no heating or cooling is running. Fan does not turn on in a call for heat (electric furnace) Heat pump puts out cool air in the heat mode and warm air in the cool mode Both the heating and cooling equipment are running at the same time Possible Cause Thermostat is not being powered. T88220 COMMERCIAL VISIONPROTM PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT Table 11 Troubleshooting. The upper or lower temperature limits were reached. The keypad is fully locked Thermostat minimum off -time is activated System selection is not set to Heat or Cool System type Selection is incorrect. Heating or cooling equipment is not Heat does not turn on (Heat On is Heating equipment failure. solid in the display) Loose or broken wire connection between thermostat and heating equipment. Cooling does not turn on (Cool Cooling equipment failure On is solid in the display). Loose or broken wire connection between thermostat and cooling equipment. Fan Control in Heating is set to Gas or Oil Furnace (Setting 0180) Changeover Valve (ISU 0190) is not configured to match the changeover required by the installed heat pump The heating equipment is not a heat pump but the System Type (ISU 0170) is set to Heat Pump Heating and cooling wires are shorted together 23 Action Check for 24 Vac between C and Rc. Check that AAA batteries are installed correctly and are good. Check temperature setpoints. Check ISU 0600 and 0610 modify as needed Check ISU 0670 to change keypad locked options Wait up to five minutes for the system to respond Set system Selection to correct position Check ISU 0170 and make sure correct System type is chosen. Check wiring Check ISU 0170 and make sure correct system type is chosen. Verify operation of equipment in System Test mode Check for 24 Vac at the equipment on the secondary side of the transformer between power and common. If voltage is not present, check the heating equipment to find the cause of the problem. Check for 24 Vac between the heat terminal (W) and transformer common If 24 Vac is present, the thermostat is functional. Check the heating equipment to find the cause of the problem. Check for 24 Vac between the heat terminal (W) and transformer common. If voltage is not present, check wire connection (loose or broken) between the thermostat and the heating equipment. Check for 24 Vac at the equipment on the secondary side of the transformer between power and common. If voltage is not present, check the cooling equipment to find the cause of the problem. Check for 24 Vac between the cool terminal (Y) and transformer common. If 24 Vac is present, the thermostat is functional. Check the cooling equipment to find the cause of the problem. Check for 24 Vac between the cool terminal (Y) and transformer common. If voltage is not present, check the wire connection (loose or broken) between the thermostat and the cooling equipment. Set Fan Control in Heating to Electric Furnace (Setting 0180). Set Changeover Valve (ISU 0190) to match the changeover required by the installed heat pump Set System Type (ISU 0170) to match the installed heating and /or cooling equipment. Separate the shorted heating and cooling wires. 63- 2625 -1 TB8220 COMMERCIAL VISIONPROTm PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT Symptom Heating equipment is running in the cool mode. Heating equipment does not turn off and heat temperature setting is set below room temperature (Heat On is not in the display) Cannot set the system setting to Heat. Cannot set the system setting to System Type (ISU 0170) is set to Heat Cool. Only or Heat Only with Fan. Heat On is not in the display Cool On is not in the display Wait is in the display 'Screen Locked' appears on the screen and all or some of the keys do not respond CO U.S. Registered Trademark O 2005 Honeywell International Inc. 63- 2625 -1 B.B. 05-05 Table 11 Troubleshooting. (Continued) Possible Cause Heating equipment is not a heat pump but System Type (ISU 0170) is set to Heat Pump Heating equipment is not a heat pump but System Type (ISU 0170) is set to Heat Pump System Type (ISU 0170) is set to Cool Only System setting is not set to Heat and /or temperature setting is not set above room temperature System setting is not set to Cool and /or the temperature setting is not set below room temperature Compressor minimum off timer is active The keypad is fully or partially locked. Automation and Control Solutions Honeywell International Inc. Honeywell Limited Honeywell Limitee 1985 Douglas Drive North 35 Dynamic Drive Golden Valley MN 55422 Scarborough, Ontario MIV 4Z9 customer honeywell.com Printed in U.S.A. on recycled paper containing at least 10% post- consumer paper fibers. Action Set System Type (ISU 0170) to match the installed heating and /or cooling equipment. Set System Type (ISU 0170) to match the installed heating and /or cooling equipment. Set System Type (ISU 0170) to match the installed heating and /or cooling equipment. Set System Type (ISU 0170) to match the installed heating and /or cooling equipment. Set the system setting to Heat and set the temperature setting above the room temperature Set the system setting to Cool and set the temperature setting below the room temperature Wait up to five minutes for the cooling or heating (heat pump) equipment to turn on Check ISU 0670 to change keypad locked options. Honeywell Ir MITSUBISHI ANY ilk ELECTRIC HVAC Advanced Products Division SUBMITTAL DATA: MSY -A24NA MSY -A24NA 24,000 BTUIH WALL- MOUNTED AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS Job Name Purchaser' Submitted to Unit Designation. GENERAL FEATURES Wall- mounted indoor unit for residential applications Compact side discharge outdoor unit Zone control Quiet operation for both indoor and outdoor units 'Powerful Mode function permits system to temporarily run at a lower /higher temperature with an increased fan speed, which quickly brings the room to the optimum comfort level Wireless remote controller is included Indoor unit powered from outdoor unit using A- Control Automatic restart following a power outage Self -check functon onboard diagnostics Dry Mode function is standard Limited warranty one year on parts and defects and six years on the compressor OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Indoor Unit M -NET Control Adapter (MAC- 399IF) MA Contact Terminal Interface (MAC- 3971F) Wired Remote Controller (PAR -21 MAA, requires MAC- 3971F) Condensate Pump (230V• S13100 -230) Anti allergy Enzyme Filter (MAC- 2300FT) Three -pole Disconnect Switch (TAZ- MS303) Cooling* Rated Capacity 22,000 Btu /h Minimum Capacity 4 400 Btu /h SEER 16.0 Total Input 2,880 W Rating Conditions (Cooling) Indoor 80 °F (27 °C) DB 67 °F (19 °C) WB; Outdoor' 95 °F (35 °C) DB 75 °F (24 °C) WB Power Supply 208 230V 1- Phase, 60 Hz Breaker Size 20 A Voltage Indoor Outdoor S1 -S2 Indoor Outdoor S2 -S3 Indoor Remote Controller OPERATING RANGE Clallam County 3rd St Level 1 AC 208 230V DC 12 24V Wireless Indoor Intake Air Temp. I Outdoor Intake Air Temp. Maximum 190 °F (32'C) 08, 1 115 °F (46 °C) DB Cooling 73 °F (23 °C) WB Minimum 67 °F (19 °C) DB' 14 °F 10°C) DB 15 °F (14 °C) WB Location Clallam County 3rd St Level -1 Date Engineer For Reference Approval ['Construction Schedule No Indoor Unit: MSY -A24NA Wireless Remote Controller Indoor Unit MCA Fan Motor Airflow (Lo Med Hi Powerful) Cooling Sound Pressure Level (Lo Med Cooling DIMENSIONS W D H Weight. External Finish Field Drainpipe Size O.D Remote Controller Outdoor Unit Compressor MCA Fan Motor Sound Pressure Level Cooling DIMENSIONS W D H Weight External Finish Refrigerant Type Refrigerant Pipe Size 0 D Gas Side Liquid Side Max. Refrigerant Pipe Length Max. Refrigerant Pipe Height Difference Connection Method Split Zoning A/C and Heat Pumps I UNIT INCHES MM 143 -5/16 1,100 110 -1/4 260 112 13/16 325 !INCHES MM 133 -1/16 /840 113/330 133 -7/16 849 �lir.SL f�l. Outdoor Unit: MUY -A24NA 1 0 76 F.L.A. 296 431 568 624 Dry CFM 265 385 508 558 Wet CFM Hi Powerful) 34 40 49 51 dB(A) 37 lbs. 17 kg Munsell No 3Y 7 8 1 1 5/8'/1588mm Wireless 128 Ibs 58 kg Munsell 3Y 7.8 1 1 5/8'/1588mm 1/4 /635mm 100 ft /30m 50 ft. 15 m Flared I� R DC- driven Inverter Twin Rotary 17A 0.93 F L.A. 55 dB(A) R41OA 1 DIMENSIONS: MSY -A24NA MUY -A24NA MSY -A24NA m CNI MUY -A24NA 2 -3/161 1 1 AI 42 1/16 1 1 I 43 -5/16 31 1 /8 25/1 Wireless remote controller 20 -9/32 I 11 -25/32 2 -19/32 I Al out 19-11/16 33 -1/16 4 -25/32 w1 I'CERTIFIED Aviary Small AG AHRI Standard 210/240 amw.u„aK +eraarHm«m www.ahrlefrettery.or9 1 9 -15/16 1 C SD MSY -A24NA MUY -A24NA 200905 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC HVAC 2009 Installation plate 3 -7/8 r- 3 -7/8 16 -5/16 16 -5/16 6 -13/16 1 Air in Air out REQUIRED SPACE /N Wall hole 03 10-1/4 3/16 Installation plate d Open as a rule 20 inch or more if the front and both sides are open 4 3/8 13/16 Oval hole 3 3/16 Open as a rule 20 Inch or more if the back, both sides and top are ope Servi pa el 7 -25/32 ENERGY STAR PARTNER Indoor unit 6- 13/16, Liquid refrigerant pipe joint Refrigerant pipe (flared) 0 1/4 Ga refrigerant pipe joint Refrigerant pipe (fla ed) o5/8 Drain hose 05/8 (Connected part O.D) Insulation 01 1/8 Unit: inch 4 inch or mor 8 Inch or more if there are obstacles to both sides Unit: inch CO to CO CO s. M t N— 'Liquid line 01/4 19 -11/16 Gas line 05/8 16 -15/16 Insulation 01 15/16 O.D 01 1/4 I.D MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC HVAC Advanced Products Division 3400 Lawrenceville Suwanee Rd Suwanee. GA 30024 Tele: 678-376-2900 Fax: 800 -889 -9904 Toll Free: 800-433-4822 #3) www.mehvac.com Specifications are subject to change without notice. Nuone DESCRIPTION BLOWER: Plug -in, permanently lubricated motor engineered for continuous operation Dynamically balanced centrifugal blower wheel for quiet, efficient performance Low RPM for quiet operation Resilient anti vibration motor mounts HOUSING: Rugged, 26 gauge, galvanized steel construction Polymeric, 4" round duct connector with tapered sleeve and no metallic clatter 7.5/8' height allows for 2' x 8' (nominal) joist installations Sturdy easy four -point mounting directly to joist Includes unique spacer (patent pending) for mounting to engineered '1' joists Can be mounted in ceilings up to 12/12 pitch GRILLE: Polymeric construction Innovative design the result of extensive research with designers and consumers BUILDER PACKS: Model QTRNO5OF includes blower and grille only (packed 1 per carton) Rough -in housing required order NuTone Model QTXRN000HF (4 housings per carton) Includes hanger bars to position housing anywhere between 16" to 24' -on- center joists (4 sets of hangers per carton) Two sets of mounting holes for hanger bars allow flush installation with bottom or top of drywall CONTROLS (Purchase separately): Refer to NuTone's catalog for a complete line of accessories to effectively adapt these fans to your construction requirements. U.L. Listed for use over bathtubs and showers when connected to a GFCI protected branch circuit (ceiling mount only). 3 -Year Warranty 2100 HW CERTIFIED INSTALLATION Complete installation instructions are included with each Fan, Groan- NuTone LLC Hartford, Wisconsin REFERENCE QTY REMARKS MODELS QTRN050F, QTRN080 0TRN110 ARCHITECT'S SPECIFICATION Ceiling Ventilator shall be NuTone Model QTRNO5OF (QTR N080) (QTRN110). Ceiling Ventilator shall have corrosion resistant galvanized steel housing with four -point mounting capability It shall be ducted to a roof or wall cap using 4 round ductwork. Blower assembly shall be removable, have a centrifugal -type blower wheel and a permanently lubricated motor designed for continuous operation and mounted with resilient anti- vibration mounts. Non metallic damper /duct connector shall be Included. Air delivery shall be no less than 50 (80) (110) CFM and sound level no greater than 0.4 (1.0) (1.5) Sones. All air and sound ratings shall be certified by HVI. Ceiling Ventilator shall be U.L. Listed for use over bathtubs and showers when connected to a GFCI protected branch circuit. www,nutone.com 888- 336 -3948 Project CL 4(L4i (OJWY S i' 1.�1 1 Location ?ft: F,J I cry \OA' Architect Engineer Contractor AN 6.4 .?e Submitted by &t,3 Date2_ 70M 99044088A Architectural Engineering Specifications December 2007 QTRN Series ns PERFORMANCE RATINGS QTRN SERIES FANS HVI PERFORMANCE Model QTRNO5OF1 QTRN080 QTRN110 2100 HUI CERTIFIED AMPS Model I Amps QTRNO5OF I 0.3 QTRN080 I 0.7 QTRN110 I 0.9 Sones CFM 10.1 Ps 0.1 Ps 0.4 1 50 10 1 80 1.5 1 110 HVI-2100 CERTIFIED RATINGS comply with new testing technologies and procedures prescribed by the Home Ventilating Institute, for off -the -shell products, as they are available to consumers. Product performance is rated at0.1 In. static pressure, based on tests conducted in AMCA'sstate- of -lhe -art test laboratory Sones are a measure of humanty-percelved loudness, based on laboratory measurements. WEIGHT Model Shipping Weight QTRNO5OF I 5.9 lbs. QTRN080 1 10.61bs. QTRN110 1 10.6 lbs. B/ Nu AIR FLOW PERFORMANCE 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 !L 0.2 0.1 0.0 0 0.9 0.8 0.7 .1 0 0.5 0.4 Et 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.0 0.9 0.8 0.7 W 0.6 0.5 f, 0.4 IL 0.3 0.2 0.1 MODEL QTRNO5OF 10 20 30 40 Airflow (cfm) MODEL QTRN080 111111111111111111M MINIM I�r�� =�(i 11111 it rM =MINIM Mid -i1•� MIIIIMINIM IM11Ititl -1tw IIIItiMI- -r -lAlfi -u IMII1�ISM� Mial•r iIIIIMIIIII r1111111•fl•I>rlTTiwlw =•111111M =MI NIMMIM ---r- -I r- =11111rMl•I,IIIIr =M\11111111111 11•11111111NE== •11- -1•11- 1111l,lil• =•111r1•MMIIIIIII1 •tIIIIIIIM =MN= 1111111111MMIIMMINIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIMIMMIMINIMMINIMI IIIIIIIIMI -l• 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Airflow (cfm) MODEL QTRN110 50 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Airf ow (cfm) 80 Broan NuTone LLC Hartford, Wisconsin www.nutone.com 888- 336 -3948 90 60 100 110 70 5 120 4 MOO A 700 600 �J/� 700 600 -0 COMMERCIAL SUBMITTAL FORM i COLLAR SIZE 6 -20 T -BAR FRAMES I 3 3/8 .SEISMIC SUPPORT L 11 HOLES 23 3/4 700 600 LISTED SIZE 1/4 SQUARE COLLAR OPTIONAL �Ilflfllll 1 3/4 233/4 700 600 -0 PROJECT Clallam County 3rd St Level -1 LOCATION Ceiling Return Air Grille ENGINEER ARCHITECT CONTRACTOR Andgar Corporation N: \Operations \FnaI Websito Submttal\Commer ial \700600 5/8 700 -600 Series T -Bar Aluminum Lattice Standard 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/2' aluminum lattice return air grille with 055 T6 extruded aluminum frame (600) 2 x 2 galvaneal steel panel with seismic support holes (700) Square to round No Labor Collar Soft White Optional: Opposed Blade Damper (700 600 0) Square Collar 1/2 x 1/2' X 1 Lattice El x1 X1 Lattice TVB Thermal Vapor Blanket 1 thick 2 x 2 foil faced self- adhesive insulation blanket SUBMITTAL REVIEW PrinfForm 2/08